JP2020006233A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can enhance interest for a performance and increase player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: first preliminary performance control means for executing at least one of a first performance having a predetermined performance form and a second performance having a different performance form from the first performance, as a preliminary performance; and second preliminary performance control means for executing a third performance that is different from the first performance and the second performance in the performance form, when the first preliminary performance control means executes the first performance and the second performance of the same system, after execution of the first performance and the second performance of the same system. In the preliminary performance, when the first preliminary performance control means executes the first performance and the second performance of different types by each other, second preliminary performance control means does not execute the third performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 66

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine provided with a decorative accessory movably provided from a standby position to an operating position.

  A so-called pachinko gaming machine is known as a gaming machine for playing a game using gaming balls. This pachinko gaming machine has a display area for displaying an image in a game area, and as a decorative object configured to be movable between a standby position outside the display area and a fall position in the display area, the effect is movable. A device having a family crest is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-176446 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 described above, the effect of the effect is poor because the effect movable portion crest is simply configured to move between the standby position and the falling position. It becomes a monotonous production for.

  Therefore, if a monotonous effect by the role is repeated, there is a possibility that the player loses interest in the entire game without being limited to the effect in which the role moves.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest in a performance and enhance the interest in a game of a player.

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention has a game board (12) having a game area on which a game ball rolls, and a decoration movable from a standby position to an operating position by a driving means (motor 60D). A character (logo character 210), a starting area (for example, a second starting port 45 described later) provided on the game board and capable of detecting the passage of a game ball, and a game ball provided on the game board. A variable winning device (for example, one of a first state (open state described later) that is easy to receive and a second state (closed state described later) that is more difficult to receive game balls than the first state (for example, And a second large winning opening 54 to be described later), and when the starting area detects a game ball, the variable winning device repeats the first state and the second state to provide an advantageous state for the player. Special game state (for example, (For example, a main control circuit 70, which will be described later), and identification information (for example, a main control circuit 70 described later) corresponding to the lottery result based on the lottery result by the lottery means. , A special symbol described later), and thereafter, the identification information is displayed based on the result of the lottery performed by the identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 61 described later) for stopping and displaying the identification information. Effect control means (for example, a later-described sub-control circuit 200) for controlling an effect operation performed during a variable display period of information, and effect notifying means (for example, to be described later) for notifying information on the effect operation when the effect operation is performed. A display device 13), when the starting area detects the passage of a game ball during the fluctuation display period of the identification information, a result of the lottery performed by the lottery means performed at the time of the detection is recorded as a reserved ball. Storage means (for example, a start-up opening passage detection process described later) that performs at least one decoration part (a right character part 211A, a middle character part 211C, and a left character part 211B); A decoration member (base lens 220) provided behind the decoration portion, and a support member that supports the decoration member and movably supports the decoration portion, wherein the decoration accessory is the effect By moving the decorative part along with moving from the standby position to the operating position as one of the operations, the decorative member provided behind the decorative part is easily visible, and the effect control unit is Prior to executing the change display of the identification information based on the predetermined reserved ball, based on the content of the predetermined reserved ball, it is determined in advance whether or not to execute a preliminary effect (for example, a prefetch effect described later). Direction decision Means (for example, a prefetching effect flag determination process described later), and a first effect (for example, a symbol effect described later) having a predetermined effect form and a second effect having a different effect form from the first effect as the preliminary effect. First preliminary effect control means for executing an effect (for example, a background effect to be described later) using the effect notification means (for example, an effect before the start of a prefetch specialization zone, an effect at the start of a prefetch specialization zone, etc., described later) And in the preliminary effect, when the first effect and the second effect of the same type are executed by the first preliminary effect control means during the variable display period of the identification information based on the reserved ball, After the execution of the first effect and the second effect of the type, in the change display period of the identification information based on the predetermined holding ball, a third effect (the effect mode is different from the first effect and the second effect) For example Second pre-production effect control means (for example, effects in the pre-read specialization zone described later) for executing the pre-read specialization zone effects J to K described later using the effect notification means. In the previous production, when the first production and the second production of different types are executed by the first preliminary production control means, the third production by the second preliminary production control means is not executed. Have.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention further improves the degree of expectation of the player to the special game state (big hit game state) in the pre-production (pre-reading production), and increases the degree of expectation of the player for the pre-production (pre-read production). Interest can be improved.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a ball supply passage (first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B) capable of accumulating game balls to be given to a player when the variable prize device is won. Moving means (first and second sprockets 173A, 173B) capable of moving the game balls having passed through the ball supply path to the payout path; driving means (payout motor 174) for driving the moving means; Control means (payout CPU 301) for controlling the driving of the means; payout detection means (first count switch 181A and second count switch 181B) for detecting game balls moved to the payout path by the moving means; The control means, after driving the driving means, stops driving the driving means for a certain period (falling ball monitoring time), and controls the payout detection means during the certain period. The determination regarding the detection of the game ball is performed, and the predetermined period includes at least a holding period (excitation data holding period) for holding a posture of the moving unit and a cooling period for cooling the driving unit. During the holding period, the current applied to the driving unit is maintained at the current at the time of driving the driving unit, and during the cooling period, the current applied to the driving unit is maintained at the driving time of the driving unit. Has a configuration lower than that of the current.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs the determination regarding the detection of the game medium by the detection unit during the holding period and the cooling period, and thus efficiently drives the driving unit using the holding period and the cooling period. Can be managed.

  Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest in an effect and enhance the interest in a game of a player.

FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a decorative member, a reflector, a lens member, and a left side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a principal part perspective view of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the lightning bolt of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a rear view of a main part of the gaming board in which the lightning role of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is at a standby position. FIG. 2 is a rear view of a main part of the gaming board in which the lightning role of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is at a first position. It is a front view of the game board in which the lightning role of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is at the first position. It is a principal part rear view of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in which the lightning role of the game board is at the second position. It is a front view of the game board in which the lightning role of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is at the second position. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a logo combination of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a main part of a logo combination of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of a main part of a logo combination of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a principal part front view of the game board in which the logo combination of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is at the standby position. It is a principal part front view of the game board in which the logo combination of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is at the falling position. It is a principal part rear view of the game board in which the logo combination of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is at the standby position. It is a principal part front view of the game board in which the logo combination of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is at the falling position. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in which a lightning role is at a first position and a logo role is at a falling position. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the gaming board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention in which a lightning role is at a first position and a logo role is at a falling position. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a shutter accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a principal part perspective front view of the shutter accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a principal part perspective rear view of the shutter accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front view of a shutter accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention in which a gold shutter is at an open position and a silver shutter is at a closed position. FIG. 2 is a front view of a shutter accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention in which a silver shutter is at an open position and a gold shutter is at a closed position. It is a front view of a game board with a gold shutter of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention in a closed position. It is a front view of the game board in which the silver shutter of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the closed position. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a left silver shutter and a left silver door rack member of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) shows a procedure for mounting the left silver shutter and the left silver door rack member in which the positions of the holes of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention are the same in the horizontal direction. FIG. (A), (b) is a diagram showing a procedure for attaching a left silver shutter and a left silver door rack member having another shape attached to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a decorative member corresponding to a fourth symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of a decorative member corresponding to a fourth symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 8 is a sectional view taken in the direction of arrows AA in FIG. 7. FIG. 8 is a sectional view taken in the direction of arrows BB in FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view (corresponding to a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 7) of the main part of the game board having the pedestal having another shape of the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view (corresponding to a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 7) of a game board having a pedestal having another shape of the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram of a payout unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the prize ball case unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the effect mode and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an effect mode transition table that summarizes the contents of the effect mode transition type in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the operation example of the usual pseudo consecutive production in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the time flow of the normal pseudo continuous production and the stock pseudo continuous production in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining the example 1 of the operation of the stock pseudo consecutive production in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining the example 2 of the operation of the stock pseudo consecutive production in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the outline of the processing flow of stock pseudo consecutive production in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining the outline of the rank effect (latent accuracy expectation information notification effect) performed in mode A and the latent number of times notification effect performed in mode B in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. . It is a figure for explaining the outline of the number-of-times-of-the-hours notice production performed in mode C in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the outline of the processing flow of the notice effect performed in a time saving number notification effect. It is a figure showing an outline of an example of an operation of a notice effect performed in a time saving number notification effect. It is a figure showing the outline of the processing flow of the continuation production performed in the number-of-times reduction notice production. It is a figure for explaining various operation examples of the look-ahead special zone effect performed in the special effect stage of the normal mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the effect at the time of the pre-read specialization zone start performed in a pre-read specialization zone effect. It is a figure showing an example of a big hit random number judgment table (at the time of the 1st starting mouth winning) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the big hit random number judgment table (at the time of the 2nd starting mouth winning) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the big hit symbol random number judgment table (at the time of the first starting opening prize) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the big hit symbol random number judgment table (at the time of the second starting opening prize) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the big hit type decision table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a winning pattern determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a view illustrating an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the look-ahead effect flag table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuating effect table (no pre-reading) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuating effect table (with pre-reading) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuating effect table (before the start of a special look-ahead zone) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuating effect table (at the time of the start of a special look-ahead zone) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation effect table (in the look-ahead specialization zone) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation production table (special production stage) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a view illustrating an example of a pseudo consecutive number determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a mascot appearance number decision table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control main process performed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol fluctuation time management processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit start interval management process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit end interval process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol control process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the system timer interruption processing performed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch input detection process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening passage detection processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub control main process performed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prefetch effect flag determination process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable effect pattern determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable effect pattern determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stock pseudo continuous production pattern determination process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub control circuit interruption process performed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the latent expectation degree notification process performed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-potentials notification process performed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-times-of-times notification process performed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a transition flow between a normal mode and a mode B in a first modification. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation | movement of the latent-number-of-times notification effect performed in mode B in the modification 1. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a latent probability count notification process according to a first modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a time reduction notification pattern table used in Modification Example 2. FIG. 21 is a diagram for describing an operation example of a prefetch specialization zone effect according to a third modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect table (at the time of starting pre-read specialization zone) in the modification 3. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch specialization zone effect pattern determination process according to Modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interruption process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the security ball presence detection process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the detection processing without a security ball performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count switch detection process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start waiting process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor starting initial process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the excitation system of the payout motor in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding reception of prize ball control data of the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding transmission of payout error information data by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a modification of the form of communication between the main control circuit and the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart at the time of error information transmission by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a method of synthesizing error information in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a mode of reporting error information in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed using the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the excitation data classified by the number of required drops in the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart when a retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a payout state notification display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart at the time of occurrence of an overpayout error in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart at the time of occurrence of an error of the payout ball clogging in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart at the time of an error of lower tray full in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart at the time of payout motor abnormality occurrence in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding the receiving processing of the payout control circuit when the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is turned off. It is a front view showing the composition of the prize ball case unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interruption process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count switch detection processing performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor drive process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the origin adjustment excitation data setting process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count switch detection processing performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start waiting process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor starting initial process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

  Hereinafter, the configuration and various operations of a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

(First Embodiment)
First, a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Function flow]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is fired by a user's operation, and a payout control process of the game ball is performed when the game ball wins various kinds. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

  When the "big hit" in the special symbol game or the "hit" in the normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is easily performed. Become.

  In addition, in various winnings, a special symbol starting prize which is one condition for performing variable display of a special symbol in a special symbol game, and one condition for performing variable display of a normal symbol in a normal symbol game. It also includes a regular symbol start winning prize.

  Note that the term “variable display” in the present specification is a concept that is displayed so as to be variable, for example, “variable display” that is actually changed and displayed, and “stop display” that is actually stopped and displayed. And so on.

  In the “variable display”, for example, a “derived display” in which a special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a result of the special symbol game can be performed. That is, in this specification, the operation from the start of the “variable display” to the “derived display” is referred to as one “variable display”.

Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game will be described.
(1) When a special symbol starting prize is won in the special symbol game, random numbers (big hit determination random number and symbol determination random number) are extracted and extracted from the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. The random numbers are stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 1).

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination processing, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied, with reference to whether or not the random value is stored by the special symbol starting winning, as one condition that the random value is stored. judge.

  Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the big hit determination random number value extracted from the big hit determination counter is referred to, and a big hit determination as to whether or not the big hit is made is performed. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random number value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described big hit determination.

  Next, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the above-described big hit determination, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined.

  Next, an effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the above-described big hit determination, the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the above-described special symbol variation pattern are referred to, An effect pattern to be executed according to the variable display of the special symbol is determined.

  Next, as a result of the determined big hit determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variable display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed. And, an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

  Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a “big hit” is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that a "big hit" has occurred, a big hit game control process for performing a big hit game is executed. In the big hit game, the possibility of the various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “big hit” has not been achieved, the big hit game control processing is not executed.

  If it is determined that the “big hit” has not been achieved, or if the big hit game control processing has been completed, a game state shift control processing for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control processing, management of a normal game state different from the big hit game state is performed.

  As the normal game state, for example, in the above-described big hit determination, a game state in which the probability of being determined as “big hit” increases (hereinafter, referred to as a “probable changing game state”) or a special symbol start winning is easily obtained. A game state (hereinafter, referred to as a "time reduction game state") is exemplified. Thereafter, a process of determining whether to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins during a special symbol fluctuating display, various data (a random number value for determining a jackpot, a random number value for determining a symbol) Etc.) are suspended.

  That is, when the game ball wins during the special symbol change display, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is suspended, and after the change display of the special symbol currently being executed is completed. The variable display of the reserved special symbols is started. Hereinafter, the variable display of the reserved special symbol is also referred to as “reserved ball”.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described later, two types of special symbol starting prizes (first and second starting opening prizes) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol starting prize. You can get a number of pending balls. That is, in the present embodiment, up to eight reserved balls can be acquired.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment determines a hit of a reserved ball (whether or not a “big hit” has been won) based on the information of the reserved ball described above, and further, the determination result. May be provided with a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the prefetching effect function.

  (2) When a normal symbol start prize is won in the normal symbol game, a random value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random value is stored (the normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 1). Refer to the processing flow).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 1, in the ordinary symbol control process during the ordinary symbol game, it is first determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the ordinary symbol is satisfied. In this determination processing, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied as one condition that the random number value is stored. judge.

  Next, when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the hit determination counter is referred to, and a hit determination is made as to whether or not the hit is determined. Thereafter, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this processing, the result of the hit determination is referred to to determine the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol.

  Next, referring to the determined result of the hit determination and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol, a variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the ordinary symbol and an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

  When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a “hit” is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that "hit" is achieved, a hit game control process for performing a hit game is executed.

  In the hit game control processing, the possibility of the various winnings described above, in particular, the possibility of the special symbol starting winning of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not become "hit", the hit game control process is not executed. Thereafter, a process of determining whether to start variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball is performed based on conditions such as whether or not a “big hit” is obtained in the special symbol game, a transition state of the gaming state, and whether or not a “hit” is generated in the normal symbol game. The ease with which the process is performed changes.

  In this embodiment, as a method for extracting various random numbers, a soft random number method for generating a random number by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at predetermined intervals, a random number value is counted from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. May be adopted as the above-described method for extracting various random numbers.

  When the hard random number method is used, the initial value of the random number value is determined at a timing different from the predetermined period, thereby preventing the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined period.

[Structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing an appearance of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main body 2, a base door 3 that is openably and closably mounted on the main body 2, and a glass door that is openably and closably mounted on the base door 3. 4 is provided.

[Body]
The main body 2 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 3). The main body 2 is formed of a material such as wood, for example.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is formed of a plate-like member having a rectangular outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is disposed in front of the main body 2 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and the base door 3 is rotated about one side edge of the main body 2 as an axis to thereby rotate the main body 2. The opening 2a is opened and closed.

  The base door 3 is provided with a square opening 3a as shown in FIG. The opening 3a is formed from a substantially central portion of the base door 3 to a region above the base door 3, and has a size occupying most of the region.

  In addition, the base door 3 has a speaker 11, a game board 12, a liquid crystal display device 13 (effect notification means, effect display means), a plate unit 14, a firing device 15, a payout unit 16, a board unit 17 And a lightning role 80, a logo role 210, and a door role 420, which will be described later, are mounted on the game board 12, respectively. Here, logo combination 210 of the present embodiment constitutes a decoration combination of the present invention.

  The speaker 11 is disposed above the base door 3 (near the upper end). The game board 12 is arranged in front of the base door 3 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and is arranged so as to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

  The game board 12 is formed of a plate-shaped resin member having optical transparency. In addition, as the resin having light transmittance, for example, an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a methacrylic resin, or the like can be used.

  On the front surface of the gaming board 12 (the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1), there is formed a game area 12a in which game balls fired from the firing device 15 roll. The game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail (specifically, an outer rail (not shown) surrounding an opening 4a of the glass door 4 described later), and its outer peripheral shape is substantially circular.

  Further, a plurality of game nails (not shown) are driven into the game area 12a. The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 13a is set so as to occupy all or a part of the surface of the game board 12.

  In the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, various images such as an effect identification pattern, an effect image, and a decorative image (decorative pattern) are displayed. The player can view various images displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 via the game board 12.

  In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 13 is used as the display device. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plasma display, a rear projection display, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) A display device such as a display may be applied.

  A spacer 19 is provided on the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The spacer 19 is provided between the back surface of the gaming board 12 (the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 13 (the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The space which becomes the flow path of the game ball which rolls in the game territory 12a is formed.

  The spacer 19 is formed of a material having optical transparency. Note that the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the spacer 19 may be partially formed of a light-transmitting material, or may be formed of a light-impermeable material. .

  The dish unit 14 is arranged below the game board 12. The plate unit 14 has an upper plate 21 and a lower plate 22 disposed below the plate 21. As shown in FIG. 2, the upper plate and the lower plate 22 are formed with payout ports 21a and 22a for lending game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls), respectively.

  When the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout ports 21a and 22a and stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are fired by the firing device 15 to the game area 12a.

  Further, the dish unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. The effect button 23 is mounted on the upper plate 21. A dial operation unit (jog dial) 24 is attached to the periphery of the effect button 23 so as to be rotatable with respect to the effect button 23.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a predetermined effect function performed by using at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24. In the display area 13a, an image prompting operation of at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24 is displayed.

  The launching device 15 is disposed in the lower right area (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The firing device 15 includes a firing handle 25 that can be operated by a player, and a panel body 26 that engages a lower right portion of the dish unit 14. The firing handle 25 is disposed on the front side of the panel body 26 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 26.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a solenoid actuator (drive device) for controlling the firing operation of the game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 26. Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a touch sensor is provided on the periphery of the firing handle 25, and a firing volume is provided inside the firing handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25, and changes the power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player's hand contacts the touch sensor of the firing handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. Thus, it is detected that the player has gripped the firing handle 25, and the shooting ball can be fired by the solenoid actuator.

  Then, when the player grips the firing handle 25 and turns in the clockwise direction (clockwise as viewed from the player side), the resistance value of the firing volume changes according to the turning angle of the firing handle 25. Then, electric power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are sequentially fired, and the fired game balls are guided by the guide rail and released to the game area 12a of the game board 12.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a firing stop button is provided on the side of the firing handle 25. The firing stop button is a button provided for stopping the firing of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. When the player presses the firing stop button, the firing of the game ball is stopped even when the firing handle 25 is gripped and rotated.

  The payout unit 16 and the board unit 17 are arranged on the back side of the base door 3. Game balls are supplied to the payout unit 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout unit 16 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 based on establishment of a payout condition.

  The board unit 17 has various control boards. Various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70, a sub control circuit 200, a payout control circuit 300, and the like, which will be described later (see FIG. 41, which will be described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is formed of a plate-like member having a substantially square surface. The glass door 4 is arranged on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size that covers the game board 12. On the front surface of the glass door 4, a speaker cover 29 is provided in an upper region facing the speaker 11.

  In the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening 4a is formed in a region of the game board 12 facing the game region 12a so as to expose at least the game region 12a. The opening 4a of the glass door 4 is provided with a protective glass 28 having light transmissivity, thereby closing the opening 4a.

  Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is arranged so as to face at least the game area 12 a of the game board 12. As shown in FIG. 2, decorative members 58A to 58D are provided at four corners around the opening 4a of the glass door 4, and LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) 59a to 59d (see FIG. 2) are provided on the rear surfaces of the decorative members 58A to 58D. 41). The decorative members 58A to 58D display effects related to the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 described later by lighting the LEDs 59a to 59d. The glass door 4 constitutes a frame of the present invention, and the decorative members 58A to 58D constitute frame-side decorative members of the present invention.

  2, the decorative member 58C located at the lower left of the opening 4a is provided in front of a metallic left frame 111 provided on the glass door 4, as shown in FIG. The left frame 111 is grounded, and the left frame 111 has a function as a ground. A lens member 112, a reflector 113, and an illuminated board 109 are interposed between the left frame 111 and the decorative member 58C.

  The illumination board 109 is provided with an LED 59c (not shown in FIG. 2), and the light emitted from the LED 59c is guided to the lens member 112 by the reflector 113 so that the decoration member 58C is formed by the lens member 112. The effect display is performed. Note that, similarly to FIG. 2, an unillustrated illuminated substrate having LEDs 59a, 59b, and 59d is provided on the back of the decorative members 58A, 58B, and 58D.

  The lens member 112 is subjected to an aluminum deposition process. For this reason, as a result of the static electricity being charged in the lens member 112, static electricity may flow through the decorative substrate of the decorative member 58 </ b> A or the decorative substrate 109, which may damage the decorative substrate of the decorative member 58 </ b> A or the decorative substrate 109. . On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the surface of the reflector 113 is plated so that the reflector 113 comes into contact with the lens member 112, and the lens member 112 and the electric decoration board 109 are connected to the left frame. Fixed to 111. This allows the static electricity charged on the lens member 112 to escape from the reflector 113 to the left frame 111.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 12.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector 43, a first starting port 44, a second starting port 45 (starting area), and a normal electric accessory 46 are provided on the front surface of the game board 12. Are provided. On the front surface of the game board 12, general winning ports 51 and 52, a first winning port 53 (variable winning device), a second winning port 54 (variable winning device), and an out port 55 are illustrated. A plurality of game nails are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 7, a bulging portion 57 is provided on the front surface of the game board 12, and the bulging portion 57 bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 12. Hereinafter, the front of the game board 12 indicates the player side with respect to the game board 12, and the rear of the game board 12 indicates the side opposite to the player side with respect to the game board 12. The right and left sides of the game board 12 represent the right and left sides as viewed from the player. Therefore, when the game board 12 is viewed from the rear, the right side of the game board 12 is the left side and the left side of the game board 12 is the right side in the drawing.

  Further, a special symbol display device 61 (identification information display means, special symbol display means), an ordinary symbol display device 62, an ordinary symbol holding display device 63, a first special A symbol hold display device 64 and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a notification LED that lights when the result of the special symbol stop display is “big hit”, a round number display LED that displays the number of rounds during the big hit game, or the like may be provided.

[Various components in the game area]
The guide rail 41 extends in an arc shape so as to divide the game area 12a, and includes an outer rail 41a (shown by a virtual line in FIG. 5) surrounding the opening 4a of the glass door 4, and an inner side of the outer rail 41a. (Inner circumferential side) and an inner rail 41b extending in an arc shape.

  The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are arranged so as to face each other near the left end of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, whereby the launching device is provided between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b. A guide path 41c that guides the game ball fired by 15 to the upper part of the game area 12a is formed.

  A ball discharge port 41d is formed at the tip of the inner rail 41b located on the upper left side of the game area 12a by the tip of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a opposed thereto. A ball return preventing piece 42 is provided at the tip of the inner rail 41b so as to close the ball discharge port 41d.

  The ball return preventing piece 42 prevents the game ball discharged from the ball discharge port 41d into the game area 12a from passing through the ball discharge port 41d again and entering the guide path 41c.

  The game ball discharged from the ball discharge port 41d flows down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 12a such as a plurality of game nails, the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, and the like, and changes its traveling direction to the upper part of the game area 12a. Flows down from the bottom.

  A display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the game ball does not pass over an area overlapping the display area 13a in the game area 12a.

  The ball passage detector 43 is arranged near the right end of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The ball passing detector 43 is provided with a passing ball sensor 43a (see FIG. 41 described later) for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passing detector 43. In addition, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a “hit” has occurred, and a variation display of a normal symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

  The first starting port 44 is disposed below the display area 13a, and the second starting port 45 is disposed below the first starting port 44. The first starting port 44 and the second starting port 45 are formed of members capable of receiving game balls.

  Hereinafter, entering or passing a game ball into the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 is referred to as “winning”. Then, when the game balls win the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45, a first predetermined number (three in the present embodiment) of game balls are paid out.

  Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 44, a lottery is performed to determine whether the hit is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and the special symbol changes based on the result of the lottery. Display starts. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 45, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a "big hit" has occurred, and a variation display of a special symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

  The first starting port 44 is provided with a first starting port winning ball sensor 44a (see FIG. 41 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the first starting port 44. The second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball sensor 45a (see FIG. 41 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the second starting port 45. The game balls that have won the first starting port 44 and the second starting port 45 pass through a collecting port (not shown) provided on the game board 12 and are conveyed to a collecting section (not shown) for game balls. .

  The ordinary electric accessory 46 is provided at the second starting port 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 includes a pair of blade members rotatably mounted on both sides of the second starting port 45, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a (see FIG. 41 described later) that drives the pair of blade members. Have.

  The ordinary electric accessory 46 is driven by an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, and is in an open state in which the pair of blade members are expanded to make it easier for a game ball to enter the second starting port 45, and the pair of blade members are closed. One of the closed states in which the game balls cannot be awarded at the second starting port 45 is generated.

  In the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not made into a form that makes it impossible to win, but is made into a form that makes it difficult to win game balls. You may.

  The general winning opening 51 is arranged near the lower left of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side. In addition, the general winning opening 52 is arranged below the ball passage detector 43, and is arranged near the lower right of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side.

  The general winning opening 51 and the general winning opening 52 are formed of members capable of receiving game balls. Hereinafter, the entry or passage of a game ball into the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52 is also referred to as “winning”. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52, a second predetermined number (ten in the present embodiment) of game balls are paid out.

  The general winning opening 51 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 51a (see FIG. 41 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the general winning opening 51. The general winning opening 52 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 52a (see FIG. 41 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the general winning opening 52.

  The first special winning opening 53 and the second special winning opening 54 are arranged below the ball passing detector 43 and between the first starting opening 44 and the general winning opening 52. The first special winning opening 53 and the second special winning opening 54 are vertically arranged along the flow path of the game ball, and the first special winning opening 53 is disposed above the second special winning opening 54. You.

  The first special winning opening 53 and the second special winning opening 54 are both so-called attacker-type opening / closing devices, and are capable of opening and closing shutters 53a and 54a and a solenoid actuator for driving the shutter (a first actuator in FIG. 41 described later). The special winning opening solenoid 53b and the second special winning opening solenoid 54b) are provided.

  Each of the first special winning opening 53 and the second special winning opening 54 receives a game ball when the corresponding shutter is open (open state: first state), and the state where the shutter is closed (closed). In the state (second state), the game ball is not accepted.

  Hereinafter, the entry or passage of a game ball into or from the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54 is also referred to as “winning”. When a game ball wins in the first large winning opening 53, a third predetermined number of game balls (ten in the present embodiment) are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second big winning opening 54, a fourth predetermined number of balls (five in this embodiment) are paid out.

  Further, the first large winning opening 53 is provided with a count sensor 53c (see FIG. 41 described later) for counting the game balls that have won the first large winning opening 53. Further, the second large winning opening 54 is provided with a count sensor 54c (see FIG. 41 described later) for counting game balls that have won the second large winning opening 54.

  The out port 55 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area 12a. The out port 55 does not win any of the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the general winning port 51, the general winning port 52, the first large winning port 53, and the second large winning port 54. Accept the ball.

  When the arrangement of the various components in the game area 12a of the present embodiment is arranged as shown in FIG. 5, a case where a player hits a game ball into the area on the right side of the game area 12a (a case where the ball is hit right) A game ball is guided to the second starting port 45 by a game nail or the like.

  In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first starting port 44. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a player who wins the second starting port 45 is more likely to receive a "big hit" lottery which is advantageous to the player than a player who wins the first starting port 44.

  Therefore, in the “time-saving gaming state” described below, in which winning in the second starting port 45 is relatively easy, by performing a right-hand operation, the possibility of winning in the first starting port 44 (which is disadvantageous for the player) Game state).

  In FIG. 7, the bulging portion 57 is provided below the first big winning opening 53, and an inclined surface 57A is formed on the upper surface of the bulging portion 57. The inclined surface 57A is inclined from the upper right to the lower left as viewed from the player side, and the second large winning opening 54 is provided on the inclined surface 57A on the left side of the first large winning opening 53. .

  Ribs 57a and 57b are formed in the portion of the inclined surface 57A located to the right with respect to the second big winning opening 54 with the front and rear direction of the inclined surface 57A interposed therebetween, and the ribs 57a and 57b are formed on the inclined surface 57A. It is separated in the front-back direction along the inclination direction.

  The inclined surface 57A guides the game ball flowing down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a to the second big winning opening 54, and the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 57A collides with the ribs 57a, 57b. Then, the speed of the game ball is reduced, and the game ball is more likely to win the second big winning opening 54 in which the shutter 54a is open.

  As shown in FIG. 5, decoration members 58E to 58H are provided around the display area 13a of the game board 12, and LEDs 59e to 59h (see FIG. 41) are provided on the rear surfaces of the decoration members 58E to 58H. Have been. The decorative members 58E to 58H display effects related to the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 described later by lighting the LEDs 59e to 59h. The decorative members 58E to 58H constitute a game board side decorative member of the present invention.

[Schematic structure of lightning role]
Next, with reference to FIG. 8 to FIG. 13, the lightning role 80 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of a lightning bolt and a moving mechanism for moving the lightning bolt. In FIG. 8, the lightning bolt 80 includes a right lightning bolt 81 and a left lightning bolt 86. Here, the right lightning role 81 of the present embodiment constitutes the first role and role of the present invention, and the left lightning role 86 forms the second role and role of the present invention. I do.

  The right lightning role 81 includes a lightning lens 82, a lightning inner lens 83 provided behind the lightning lens 82, and an LED 59 i (see FIG. 41) provided as a light emitting element on the front surface, provided behind the lightning inner lens 83. And a lightning lens cover 85 provided behind the lightning lens substrate 84. The LED 59i emits light toward the front lightning lens 82.

  The lightning lens 82, the lightning inner lens 83, the lightning lens substrate 84, and the lightning lens cover 85 are integrated. When the LED 59 i of the lightning lens substrate 84 is turned on, the right lightning role 81 changes the lightning inner lens 83. The lighting display of the lightning lens 82 via the light-emitting device provides an effect display representing lightning. Further, the lightning lens cover 85 constitutes a pedestal for installing the lightning lens substrate 84 and has a function as a reflector.

  The left lightning bolt 86 includes a lightning lens 87, a lightning inner lens 88 provided behind the lightning lens 87, and an LED 59j (see FIG. 41) provided as a light emitting element on the front surface provided behind the lightning inner lens 88. And a lightning lens cover 90 provided behind the lightning lens substrate 89. The LED 59j emits light toward the front lightning lens 87. Further, the lightning lens cover 90 constitutes a pedestal for installing the lightning lens substrate 89 and has a function as a reflector.

  The lightning lens 87, the lightning inner lens 88, the lightning lens substrate 89, and the lightning lens cover 90 are integrated. When the LED 59 j of the lightning lens substrate 84 is turned on, the left lightning bolt 86 turns on the lightning inner lens 88. When the lightning lens 87 is illuminated and displayed, an effect display expressing lightning is performed.

  The distal end of the right lightning role arm 91 is connected to the proximal end of the lightning lens cover 85 via a pin 91A. As shown in FIG. 9, the base end of the right lightning role arm 91 is attached to the base plate 93 via a pin 91B. The right lightning role arm 91 is attached to the base plate 93 with the pin 91B as a fulcrum. Rocks. Thus, the right lightning role 81 and the right lightning role arm 91 are relatively movable. Here, the base plate 93 of the present embodiment constitutes a support plate of the present invention, and the right lightning bolt arm 91 constitutes a third swing member of the present invention. Here, the number of support plates may be one or more. Note that “the swing of the accessory” means that the accessory is directly or indirectly driven by a motor (means for generating or transmitting driving force or power, or driving means, means for moving an object). It shows a mode of movement (driving, moving, rotating, etc.), an event, and a phenomenon.

  A left lightning bolt arm 92 is connected to the base end of the lightning lens cover 90 via a pin 92A. As shown in FIG. 9, the base end of the left lightning bolt arm 92 is swingably attached to the base plate 93 via a pin 92B. The left lightning bolt arm 92 is supported by the pin 92B as a fulcrum. It swings with respect to the base plate 93. Thus, the left lightning bolt 86 and the left lightning bolt arm 92 are relatively movable. Here, the left lightning role arm 92 constitutes a fourth swing member of the present invention.

  8 and 9, a tooth portion 91C is formed at the base end of the right lightning role arm 91, and the tooth portion 91C meshes (engages) with the gear 94. A tooth portion 92C is formed at the base end of the left lightning role arm 92, and the tooth portion 92C meshes (engages) with the tooth portion 91C of the right lightning role arm 91. The gear 94 is rotatably mounted on the base plate 93, and the gear 95 is engaged with the gear 95 of the motor 60A. Further, a torsion spring 97A is provided around the pin 91B of the right lightning role arm 91, and the torsion spring 97A is fixed to the base plate 93 so that the right lightning role arm 91 is in the standby position at the initial position. Biased to the position.

  In FIG. 9, guide grooves 93 </ b> A and 93 </ b> B extending in the vertical direction so as to sandwich the base end of the right lightning role arm 91 and the base end of the left lightning role arm 92 in the base plate 93. Guide grooves 93C and 93D extending so as to be curved in the left and right directions on both left and right sides of the base plate 93, and slits 93E and 93F cut in the vertical direction between the guide grooves 93A and 93B and the guide grooves 93C and 93D in the left and right direction. Is formed.

  Here, the guide groove 93C constitutes the first support plate side guide part of the present invention, and the guide groove 93D constitutes the second support plate side guide part of the present invention. The guide groove 93A constitutes a third support plate side guide of the present invention, and the guide groove 93B constitutes a fourth support plate side guide of the present invention.

  The pins 91A and 92A of the right lightning role arm 91 and the left lightning role arm 92 are engaged with the slits 93E and 93F, and the right lightning role arm 91 and the left lightning role arm 92 are connected to the slits 93E and 93F. It is movable along.

  A projection 91D is formed on the right lightning role arm 91, and the projection 91D protrudes from the right lightning role arm 91 toward the base plate 93 and is engaged with the guide groove 93A. A protrusion 92D is formed on the left lightning bolt arm 92, and the protrusion 92D protrudes from the left lightning bolt arm 92 toward the base plate 93 and engages with the guide groove 93B.

  8, a right lightning role arm 96 is provided behind the lightning lens cover 85 of the right lightning role 81, and the right lightning role arm 96 is arranged in the front-rear direction of the game board 12 in the front-rear direction. It is installed between 91 and the right lightning role 81.

  The right lightning role arm 96 is attached to the base plate 93 via a pin 96A, and the right lightning role arm 96 is swingable with respect to the base plate 93 about the pin 96A.

  A torsion spring 97B is provided around the pin 96A of the right lightning role arm 96, and the torsion spring 97B is fixed to the base plate 93, so that the right lightning role arm 96 is at a standby position which is an initial position. It is energizing.

  Guide grooves 96B and 96C are formed in the right lightning role arm 96, and the guide groove 96B extends along the extending direction of the right lightning role arm 96, and the guide groove 96C is formed with the right lightning role. The lower part of the arm 96 is formed shorter than the guide groove 96B. A projecting portion 85A is formed on the lightning lens cover 85 of the right lightning role 81, and the projecting portion 85A projects from the lightning lens cover 85 toward the right lightning role arm 96, and guides the right lightning role arm 96. It is engaged with the groove 96B.

  A projection 96D is formed on the right lightning role arm 96, and the projection 96D protrudes from the right lightning role arm 96 toward the base plate 93 and engages with a guide groove 93C of the base plate 93. The pin 98A of the cam gear 98 is engaged with the guide groove 96C of the right lightning role arm 96, and the cam gear 98 is rotatably supported by the base plate 93. A gear 99 meshes with the cam gear 98, and the gear 99 is rotatably supported by the base plate 93.

  A gear 100 of a motor 60B meshes with the gear 99, and the motor 60B is fixed to a base plate 93. A left lightning bolt arm 101 is provided behind the lightning lens cover 90 of the left lightning bolt 86. The left lightning role arm 101 is attached to the base plate 93 via a pin 101A, and the left lightning role arm 101 is swingable with respect to the base plate 93 about the pin 101A. Here, the right lightning role arm 96 of the present embodiment constitutes a first swing member, and the left lightning role arm 101 constitutes a second swing member. Further, pin 96A of the present embodiment constitutes a first swing shaft of the present invention, and pin 101A constitutes a second swing shaft of the present invention.

  A torsion spring 97C is provided around the pin 101A of the left lightning bolt arm 101, and the torsion spring 97C is fixed to the base plate 93, so that the left lightning bolt arm 101 is at a standby position which is an initial position. It is energizing.

  Guide grooves 101B and 101C are formed in the left lightning bolt arm 101, and the guide groove 101B extends in a substantially L shape along the extending direction of the left lightning bolt arm 101. In the lower part of the left lightning role arm 101, it is formed shorter than the guide groove 101B.

  A projection 90A is formed on the lightning lens cover 90 of the left lightning role 86, and the projection 90A protrudes from the lightning lens cover 90 toward the left lightning role arm 101, and guides the left lightning role arm 101. It is engaged with the groove 101B.

  A projection 101D is formed on the left lightning role arm 101, and the projection 101D protrudes from the left lightning role arm 101 toward the base plate 93 and engages with a guide groove 93D of the base plate 93. The pin 102A of the cam gear 102 is engaged with the guide groove 101C of the left lightning role arm 101, and the cam gear 102 is rotatably supported by the base plate 93. A gear 103 meshes with the cam gear 102, and the gear 103 is rotatably supported by a base plate 93. A gear 103 of a motor 60C meshes with the cam gear 102, and the motor 60C is fixed to a base plate 93.

  Here, the motor 60B of the present embodiment constitutes the first drive unit and the drive unit of the present invention, the motor 60C constitutes the second drive unit and the drive unit of the present invention, and the motor 60A This constitutes a third driving means of the present invention. The guide groove 96B of the right lightning role arm 96 constitutes the first swing member side guide portion of the present invention, and the guide groove 101B of the left lightning role arm 101 corresponds to the second swinging portion of the present invention. A member-side guide is configured.

  In addition, the projecting portion 85A of the right lightning role 81 constitutes a first accessory side engaging portion of the present invention, and the projecting portion 90A of the left lightning role 86 corresponds to the second accessory side engaging portion of the present invention. Construct a joint. The projection 96D of the right lightning role arm 96 constitutes the first swing member side engaging portion of the present invention, and the projection 101D of the left lightning role arm 101 is the second swinging portion of the present invention. A moving member side engaging portion is configured.

  The projecting portion 91D of the right lightning role arm 91 constitutes the third swing member side engaging portion of the present invention, and the projecting portion 92D of the left lightning role arm 92 is the fourth swinging portion of the present invention. A moving member side engaging portion is configured. The tooth portion 91C of the right lightning role arm 91 constitutes a first proximal engagement portion of the present invention, and the tooth portion 92C of the left lightning role arm 92 is a second proximal engagement portion of the present invention. Construct a joint.

  Further, the cam gear 98, the gear 99, and the gear 100 can be defined as first power transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the first arm, and the cam gear 102 and the gear 103 Can be defined as second power transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the second drive means to the second arm. In addition, the gear 94 and the gear 95 can be defined as a third power transmitting unit that transmits the driving force of the third driving unit to the first arm and the second arm.

  A motor including the motor 60B, the cam gear 98, the gear 99, the gear 100, and the right lightning bolt arm 96 constitute the first moving mechanism 106 and the moving mechanism of the present invention, and the motor 60C, the cam gear 102, the gear 103 and the left lightning bolt arm 101 constitute a second moving mechanism 107 and a moving mechanism of the present invention, and the motor 60A, the gear 94, the gear 95, the right lightning bolt arm 91, and the left lightning bolt What includes the arm 92 constitutes the third moving mechanism 108 of the present invention.

  A projecting piece 91E is formed on the right lightning role arm 91, and the projecting piece 91E is detected by a sensor such as a photo sensor (not shown) in a state where the right lightning role 81 is located at the standby position (see FIG. 9). You. A projecting piece 96E is formed on the right lightning role arm 96, and the projecting piece 96E is detected by a sensor such as a photo sensor (not shown) in a state where the right lightning role 81 is located at the standby position (see FIG. 9). You. A projecting piece 101E is formed on the left lightning role arm 101, and the projecting piece 101E is detected by a sensor (not shown) in a state where the left lightning role 86 is located at the standby position (see FIG. 9). The detection information of these three sensors is output to the main control circuit 70 (see FIG. 41), and the main control circuit 70 determines the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning based on the information of the sensors. It recognizes that the accessory 86 is at the standby position. Each photosensor blocks light from the light emitting element to the light receiving element when the protruding pieces 91E, 96E and 101E are detected, and when the protruding pieces 91E, 96E and 101E are not detected, the light receiving element turns off the light emitting element. It is configured to receive light from the camera.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the right lightning role 81 having such a configuration is a standby position when the extending direction is located horizontally in the outside of the display region 13a, and the left lightning role 86 is in the display region 13a. The state where the extending direction is inclined outside is the standby position. FIG. 9 is a view of the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 from the rear of the game board 12, and the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are located below and to the left of the display area 13a, respectively. It is located in. Also, as shown in FIG. 5, when viewing the game board 12 from the player side, the player cannot visually recognize the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86.

  Next, in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the operation of the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 will be described based on a state in which the game board 12 is viewed from behind.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when the right lightning role 81 is located at the standby position, when the motor 60B is driven, the rotation of the gear 100 of the motor 60B is transmitted from the gear 99 to the cam gear 98. At this time, since the pin 98A of the cam gear 98 moves along the guide groove 96C of the right lightning role arm 96, the right lightning role arm 96 swings counterclockwise around the pin 96A. When the right lightning role arm 96 swings counterclockwise, the protrusion 96D of the right lightning role arm 96 moves along the guide groove 93C from the right end to the left end of the guide groove 93C of the base plate 93. Then, the right lightning role arm 96 is guided and moved along the guide groove 93C. At this time, the right lightning role 81 having the protrusion 85A engaging with the guide groove 96B of the right lightning role arm 96 is lifted by the right lightning role arm 96 and counterclockwise from the horizontal direction with the pin 91A as a fulcrum. Swing in the direction of rotation.

  Here, the “counterclockwise rotation direction” in the present embodiment is the counterclockwise rotation direction on each drawing. For example, as shown in FIG. 9 described above, in the case of a drawing viewed from the back of the gaming board 12 or the back of the gaming machine 1, the “counterclockwise rotation direction” refers to the back of the gaming board 12 or the gaming machine 1. Means the counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from behind. The same applies to the “clockwise rotation direction”.

  When the protrusion 96D of the right lightning role arm 96 moves to a position where it contacts the left end of the guide groove 93C of the base plate 93, the driving of the motor 60B is stopped, and the right lightning role arm 96 is shown in FIGS. As described above, the display area 13a moves from the outside to the first position in the display area 13a.

  When the right lightning role arm 96 is at the standby position, the pin 98A of the cam gear 98 is in contact with the right end of the guide groove 96C of the right lightning role arm 96 (see FIG. 9). The pin 98A is rotated with the rotation of the cam gear 98 until the right lightning role arm 96 moves to the first position until the pin 98A comes into contact with the right end of the guide groove 96C (see FIG. 11). Then, after contacting the left end of the guide groove 96C, it comes into contact with the right end of the guide groove 96C as shown in FIG. That is, the pin 98A reciprocates once along the guide groove 96C until the right lightning role arm 96 moves from the standby position to the first position.

  When the left lightning bolt arm 101 is at the standby position, the pin 102A of the cam gear 102 is in contact with the left end of the guide groove 101C of the left lightning bolt arm 101 (see FIG. 9). The pin 102A rotates with the rotation of the cam gear 102 until the left lightning bolt arm 101 moves to the first position and the pin 102A comes into contact with the left end of the guide groove 101C (see FIG. 11). 11 comes into contact with the right end of the guide groove 101C and then contacts the left end of the guide groove 101C as shown in FIG. That is, the pin 102A reciprocates once along the guide groove 101C until the left lightning role arm 101 moves from the standby position to the first position.

  Here, the motor 60B is driven by a motor control circuit 60 provided in a sub-control circuit 200 described later. Specifically, the motor control circuit 60 sets the number of steps of the motor 60B until the right lightning role 81 moves from the standby position to the first position. When the motor 60B reaches the number of steps enough to move to the first position after detecting the projecting piece 96E of the arm 96, the motor 60B is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the motor 60C is driven while the left lightning role 86 is located at the standby position, the rotation of the gear 103 of the motor 60C is transmitted to the cam gear 102. At this time, since the pin 102A of the cam gear 102 moves along the guide groove 101C of the left lightning bolt arm 101, the left lightning bolt arm 101 swings counterclockwise around the pin 101A.

  When the left lightning bolt arm 101 swings counterclockwise, the protrusion 101D of the left lightning bolt arm 101 moves along the guide groove 93D from the right end to the left end of the guide groove 93D of the base plate 93. The left lightning role arm 101 moves while being guided by the guide groove 93D. At this time, the left lightning role 86 having the projection 90A engaging with the guide groove 101B of the left lightning role arm 101 is pushed by the left lightning role arm 101 and rotates counterclockwise from the standby position with the pin 92A as a fulcrum. Rocks in the direction.

  When the protruding portion 101D of the left lightning bolt arm 101 moves to a position where it contacts the left end of the guide groove 93D of the base plate 93, the driving of the motor 60C is stopped, and the left lightning bolt arm 101 is shown in FIGS. Move to the first position in the display area 13a as described above. Here, the motor control circuit 60 sets the number of steps of the motor 60C until the left lightning bolt 86 moves from the standby position to the first position. When the motor 60C reaches the number of steps enough to move to the first position after detecting the projecting piece 101E, the motor 60C is stopped. As a result, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 move to the first position facing in the left-right direction while being inclined in a C-shape. Here, the first position in the present embodiment corresponds to a driving position.

  In the effect of moving the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 from the standby position to the first position, after moving the right lightning role 81 from the standby position to the first position, the left lightning role 81 is moved to the first position. The effect of moving the object 86 from the standby position to the first position, or the effect of simultaneously moving the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 from the standby position to the first position may be adopted. However, the effect of moving the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 from the standby position to the first position is not particularly limited. In addition, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 of the present embodiment are located outside the display area 13a at the standby position, but the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 at the standby position. Some may be located.

  When the motor 60A is driven with the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 moved to the first position, the rotation of the gear 95 of the motor 60A causes the rotation of the right lightning role arm 91 via the gear 94. It is transmitted to the tooth part 91C.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 12, the right lightning role arm 91 swings clockwise about the pin 91B. When the right lightning role arm 91 swings clockwise, the projecting portion 91D of the right lightning role arm 91 moves upward from the lower end of the guide groove 93A of the base plate 93 along the guide groove 93A. The accessory arm 91 moves while being guided by the guide groove 93A.

  At this time, the projection 96D of the right lightning role arm 96 abuts on the left end of the guide groove 93C, and the swing in the counterclockwise direction is restricted. As a result, as the right lightning role arm 91 swings clockwise, the protrusion 85A of the right lightning role 81 moves upward along the guide groove 96B of the right lightning role arm 96. Then, the right lightning role 81 moves upward along the guide groove 96B.

  Since the right lightning role 81 is relatively movably connected to the right lightning role arm 91 via the pin 91A, in the display area 13a, the right lightning role 81 and the right lightning role arm 91 each have a guide groove. It moves upward along 96B and the guide groove 93A, and the right lightning role 81 moves so as to be above the first position and to tilt obliquely upward and to the left when viewed from the front of the game board 12 (FIG. 13). reference).

  On the other hand, since the tooth portion 92C of the left lightning bolt arm 92 meshes with the tooth portion 91C of the right lightning bolt arm 91, the left lightning bolt arm 92 is opposite from the first position with the pin 92B as a fulcrum. Swings clockwise. When the left lightning bolt arm 92 swings in the counterclockwise direction, the protrusion 92D of the left lightning bolt arm 92 moves upward from the lower end of the guide groove 93B of the base plate 93 along the guide groove 93B. The lightning role arm 92 moves while being guided by the guide groove 93B.

  At this time, in the left lightning role arm 101, the protruding portion 101D abuts on the left end of the guide groove 93D, and the swing in the counterclockwise rotation direction is restricted. As a result, the projecting portion 90A of the left lightning role 86 moves upward along the guide groove 101B of the left lightning role arm 101 as the left lightning role arm 92 swings counterclockwise. Thereby, the left lightning role 86 moves upward along the guide groove 101B. Since the left lightning bolt 86 is relatively movably connected to the left lightning bolt arm 92 via the pin 92A, in the display area 13a, the left lightning bolt 86 and the left lightning bolt arm 92 each have a guide groove. 101B and moves upward along the guide groove 93B, and the left lightning role 86 is tilted obliquely upward and to the left as viewed from the front of the gaming board 12 above the first position and the right lightning role 81 Move so that they are almost parallel.

  Here, “substantially parallel” means that in the present embodiment, when the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are viewed as shown in FIG. 13, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 Are substantially parallel to each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the present embodiment as well, when the longitudinal axis of the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 is strictly calculated. Are not parallel, and remain substantially parallel as a design, or become substantially parallel when at least one of the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 is driven. I just want to have something. More specifically, two points are defined around the right lightning role 81 when viewed from a predetermined direction, and a straight line that can be connected between the two points and the left lightning role 86 are determined from a predetermined direction. It is sufficient that two points are set around the perimeter when viewed, and a straight line that can be connected between the two points is parallel, and in particular, one straight line that can be drawn by the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 Instead, a plurality of straight lines can be drawn according to the shape of the accessory. Also, it is not necessary to be visible from the player, and the direction is not limited to the longitudinal direction, may be the transverse direction, and may or may not be defined as parallel according to the shape of the accessory. Describe.

  Further, when the protrusion 85A of the right lightning role 81 and the protrusion 90A of the left lightning role 86 abut against the upper ends of the guide grooves 96B and 101B, the driving of the motor 60A is stopped. Specifically, the motor control circuit 60 sets the number of steps of the motor 60A until the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 move from the first position to the second position. When the sensor reaches the number of steps enough to move the motor 60A to the second position after the sensor detects the projecting piece 91E of the right lightning role arm 91, the motor 60A is stopped.

  In addition, by rotating the motors 60A to 60C in the reverse direction and performing the operation opposite to the above-described operation, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 can be returned from the second position to the standby position. Since the right lightning role arm 96, the left lightning role arm 101, and the right lightning role arm 91 are urged to the initial position by the torsion springs 97A to 97C, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are provided. When the vehicle returns from the second position to the standby position, the right lightning role arm 96, the left lightning role arm 101, and the right lightning role arm 91 can provide an assisting force in the return direction.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the motor 60B that drives the right lightning role 81 and the motor 60C that drives the left lightning role 86, and the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role The first moving mechanism 106 and the second moving mechanism 107 for moving the object 86 from the standby position to the first position (drive position) according to the effect, and the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 There is provided a third moving mechanism 108 having a motor 60A capable of moving the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 from the first position to a second position where the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are substantially parallel to each other.

  Thereby, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment moves the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 from the standby position to the first position by the first moving mechanism 106 and the second moving mechanism 107. After that, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 can be moved by the third moving mechanism 108 from the first position to the second position which is substantially parallel in the display area 13a.

  Therefore, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are moved by the common third movement mechanism 108 to the second position that cannot be moved by the first movement mechanism 106 and the second movement mechanism 107. Can be. Therefore, the effect at the first position and the effect at the second position can be performed continuously, and the interest in the effect can be improved compared to the effect of the conventional monotonous character, and the player can enjoy the effect. Interest in games can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base plate 93 engages with the guide groove 93C engaging with the projection 96D of the right lightning role arm 96 and the projection 101D of the left lightning role arm 101. A right lightning bolt having a guide groove 93D, a first moving mechanism 106 and a second moving mechanism 107 are provided so as to be swingable around the pins 96A and 101A, and have the guide groove 96B and the guide groove 101B. It has a role arm 96 and a left lightning role arm 101, and when the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 move from the standby position to the first position, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 can be moved along the guide groove 96B of the right lightning role arm 96, the guide groove 101B of the left lightning role arm 101, the guide groove 93C of the base plate 93, and the guide groove 93D. That.

  Therefore, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 can be moved in a direction having a higher effect than when simply moving in the rotation direction (drive direction) of the motors 60B and 60C. As a result, it is possible to more effectively improve the interest in the effect as compared with the conventional effect of the monotonous role, and it is possible to more effectively increase the interest in the game of the player.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are formed by the first moving mechanism 106 having the motor 60B and the second moving mechanism 107 having the motor 60C. After moving from the standby position to the first position, the projecting portion 85A of the right lightning role 81 moves along the guide groove 96B of the right lightning role arm 96 by the third moving mechanism 108 having the motor 60A. The protrusion 91D of the right lightning role arm 91 moves along the guide groove 93A of the base plate 93, and the protrusion 90A of the left lightning role 86 moves along the guide groove 101B of the left lightning role arm 101. When the protrusion 92D of the left lightning bolt arm 92 moves along the guide groove 93B of the base plate 93, the right lightning bolt 81 and the left lightning bolt 86 are moved. It was constructed from the first position to move to the second position.

  Thereby, the guide grooves 93A to 93D formed in the base plate 93, the guide grooves 96B formed in the right lightning role arm 96, and the guide grooves 101B formed in the left lightning role arm 101 are used to make the right The lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 can be gradually moved from the standby position to the second position via the first position.

  Therefore, the combination of the guide grooves 93A to 93D formed in the base plate 93 and the guide grooves 96B formed in the right lightning role arm 96 and the guide grooves 101B formed in the left lightning role arm 101 is appropriately set. This makes it possible to diversify the effect expression until the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are moved from the standby position through the first position to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively improve the interest in the effect as compared with the effect of the conventional monotonous role, and it is possible to more effectively improve the interest in the game of the player.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first accessory is constituted by the right lightning accessory 81 and the second accessory is constituted by the left lightning accessory 86. It may be constituted by the left lightning role 86 and the second lightning portion may be constituted by the right lightning role 81.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first base end engaging portion is formed on the right lightning role arm 91, and the second base end engaging portion is formed on the left lightning role arm 92. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first base end engaging portion may be formed on the left lightning role arm 92 and the second base end engaging portion may be formed on the right lightning role arm 91. Good.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are moved from the standby position to the second position based on the number of steps of the motors 60A to 60C. The sensor may directly detect that the lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 have moved to the standby position, the first position, and the second position.

[Schematic structure of logo role]
Next, a logo combination 210 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the logo combination 210. In FIG. 14, a logo character 210 has a right character portion 211A, a middle character portion 211C, a left character portion 211B, a finger portion 212, a right inner lens 213, a left inner lens 214, a right logo substrate 215, a left logo substrate 216, and a right logo substrate. A logo back cover 217, a left logo back cover 218, a middle logo inner lens 219, a base lens 220, a right inner lens 221, a left inner lens 222, a middle logo substrate 223, and a middle logo back cover 224 are provided.

  The right character part 211A, the middle character part 211C, and the left character part 211B are divided, and the right character part 211A, the middle character part 211C, and the left character part 211B are composed of alphabets, numbers, kanji, hiragana, katakana, symbols, etc. It may be composed of characters, or a picture constituting the character, another liquid crystal display device different from the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided, and when there are a plurality of other liquid crystal display devices, a plurality of other liquid crystal display devices are used. A configuration may be adopted in which characters or pictures are displayed one by one and one display is achieved by combining display contents of a plurality of other liquid crystal display devices. Further, when the other liquid crystal display device is single, the effect may be performed by displaying a single character or a plurality of characters or pictures.

  In addition, the expression corresponding to each character or picture (expressing a similar character or picture, or an effect display that can be associated with each character or picture) is expressed on the liquid crystal display device 13, so that the holding ball can be displayed. Increase, the probability of being a big hit when each performance is executed (big hit expectation or reliability of each performance), and display of the demonstration, and display of the gaming machine frame (outer frame, front door) A member that can be expressed corresponding to each character or picture provided (a decorative member that simulates each character or picture, a decorative member that can be associated with each character or picture, or a liquid crystal display device) is provided. Providing and performing an effect in which the expressible member performs at least one of light emission, movement, driving, display, and the like, the probability of being a big hit when each effect executed in the gaming machine is executed (each effect Of the jackpot expectation or reliability) Mode may be driven in accordance with the display.

  Here, right character part 211A, middle character part 211C, and left character part 211B of the present embodiment constitute a decorative part of the present invention. The finger part 212 has a thumb 212A and index finger 212B attached to the left character part 211B, a middle finger 212C and a ring finger 212D attached to the middle character part 211C, and a little finger 212E attached to the right character part 211A.

  The right inner lens 213 and the left inner lens 214 are provided behind the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B, and emit light emitted from a plurality of LEDs 59k provided on the right logo substrate 215 and the left logo substrate 216. The light is guided to the right character part 211A and the left character part 211B to light or blink the right character part 211A and the left character part 211B.

  In addition, the thumb 212A, the index finger 212B, the middle finger 212C, the ring finger 212D, and the little finger 212E are the number of holding balls or the probability of being a big hit when each of the effects performed on the gaming machine is executed (the expectation degree of the big hit of each effect) Lighting or blinking may be selectable in accordance with (or reliability).

  In such a case, an effect is conceivable in which the thumb 212A blinks in response to the changing effect, and the index finger 212B lights up when the first holding ball wins. In addition, the thumb 212A, the index finger 212B, the middle finger 212C, the ring finger 212D, and the little finger 212E as described above can be driven according to the number of holding balls, or the probability of being a big hit when each of the effects performed on the gaming machine is executed. (For example, the thumb 212A, the index finger 212B, the middle finger 212C, the ring finger 212D, and the little finger 212E move so as to squeeze the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B).

  The right logo back cover 217 and the left logo back cover 218 fix the right inner lens 213, the left inner lens 214, the right logo substrate 215, and the left logo substrate 216 to the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B, respectively.

  The base lens 220 is provided behind the right logo back cover 217, the left logo back cover 218, and the middle logo inner lens 219, and emits light emitted from a plurality of LEDs 59l provided at the center of the middle logo substrate 223. Then, the light is guided to the middle character portion 211C through the middle logo inner lens 219 to light or blink the middle character portion 211C.

  The right side of the base lens 220 constitutes a right display section 220A. As described later, when the right character section 211A moves to the right with respect to the middle character section 211C, the middle character section 211C and the right character section 211A. Of the right display unit 220A provided behind is easily visible.

  In this state, the right inner lens 221 provided behind the right display unit 220A guides the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 59m provided on the middle logo substrate 223 to the right display unit 220A, thereby displaying the right display. The unit 220A performs an effect display indicating lightning.

  The left side of the base lens 220 constitutes a left display part 220B. As described later, when the left character part 211B moves to the left with respect to the middle character part 211C, the middle character part 211C and the left character part 211B Of the left display unit 220B provided behind is easily visible. Here, right character part 211A of the present embodiment constitutes a first decorative part of the present invention, and left character part 211B constitutes a second decorative part of the present invention.

  In addition, the right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B, which are decorative members, are easy to visually recognize when the decorative members are difficult to visually recognize by the decorative unit (for example, a player cannot visually recognize a part or all of the decorative members, or (A state in which the decorative part is installed so as to block the line of sight), and if the player can visually recognize a part or all of the decorative member simply, it can be determined that the visual recognition is easy. However, it is not always necessary to provide all the decorative members so that they can be visually recognized, and as a part or all, the display that is initially visible from a state in which some of the decorative members are visible. If the visible range of the decorative member is widened even slightly from a part of the member, it can be recognized that the decorative member is easily visible.

  In this state, the left inner lens 222 provided behind the left display unit 220B guides light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 59m provided on the middle logo substrate 223 to the left display unit 220B, thereby displaying the left image. The unit 220B performs an effect display indicating lightning.

  The middle logo back cover 224 fixes the middle logo substrate 223, the right inner lens 221 and the left inner lens 222 to the base lens 220. Here, base lens 220 of the present embodiment constitutes a decorative member of the present invention. The logo combination 210 includes a base plate 225, a motor 60D, a moving mechanism 226, and a support member 227. Here, base plate 225 of the present embodiment constitutes a holding plate of the present invention, and motor 60D constitutes a decorative accessory driving means of the present invention. The number of holding plates is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 19, the base plate 225 is provided on the upper part of the game board 12, and as shown in FIG. 15, the base plate 225 has a guide groove 225A curved in the vertical direction and a guide groove 225A. The base plate 225 is also provided with guide pins 225C and 225D protruding forward from the base plate 225. Here, the guide groove 225A of the present embodiment forms a first holding plate side guide of the present invention, and the guide groove 225B forms a second holding plate side guide of the present invention.

  The motor 60D is provided on the rear surface of the base plate 225. A cam gear 228 having a pin 228A is provided on the output shaft of the motor 60D. The moving mechanism 226 includes a cam gear 228, a main arm 229, a logo link 231, a compression spring 232, and a sub arm 233.

  The main arm 229 is provided in front of the base plate 225. An engaging hole 229A is formed in the main arm 229, and the engaging hole 229A is engaged with a guide pin 225C of the base plate 225. The main arm 229 is provided with an engagement protrusion 229B, and the engagement protrusion 229B is engaged with the guide groove 225A via the bush 230A.

  One end of a logo link 231 is connected to the main arm 229, and the other end of the logo link 231 is connected to a pin 228 </ b> A of the cam gear 228. The main arm 229 is provided with a spring engaging portion 229C, and one end of a compression spring 232 is engaged with the spring engaging portion 229C. The other end of the compression spring 232 is engaged with a spring engagement portion 225E of the base plate 225. When the game board 12 is viewed from the front in FIG. 15, the compression spring 232 urges the main arm 229 counterclockwise around the guide pin 225C.

  Guide grooves 229D, 229E are formed at the tip of the main arm 229, and the guide grooves 229D, 229E are curved in the circumferential direction at the tip of the main arm 229. An opening 229F is formed at the tip of the main arm 229, and the opening 229F is formed between the guide grooves 229D and 229E.

  The main arm 229 swings with the guide pin 225C as a fulcrum. When the swinging is performed, the engagement protrusion 229B is guided along the guide groove 225A. Rocks between the and the falling position. Note that the falling position in the present embodiment is the operating position of the present invention. Here, the guide pin 225C of the present embodiment constitutes a first swing fulcrum of the present invention. The guide groove 229D constitutes the first main swing member side guide of the present invention, and the guide groove 229E constitutes the second main swing member side guide of the present invention.

  The sub arm 233 has an engagement hole 233A at one end and an engagement hole 233B at the other end, and a guide pin 225D is engaged with the engagement hole 233A. In FIG. 16, an engagement protrusion 233C is formed on the back surface of the sub arm 233, and the engagement protrusion 233C engages with the guide groove 225B through the bush 230B. Therefore, the sub arm 233 swings around the guide pin 225D as a fulcrum, and is guided along the guide groove 225B when swinging. Here, the guide pin 225D of the present embodiment forms a second swing fulcrum. Further, the main arm 229 of the present embodiment constitutes a main swing member of the present invention, and the sub arm 233 constitutes a sub swing member of the present invention.

  15 and 16, the support member 227 includes a support plate 234, a right gear 235, a left gear 236, a middle gear 237, a right rack member 238, and a left rack member 239. Here, the middle gear 237 of the present embodiment constitutes a first power transmission member of the present invention, the right gear 235 constitutes a second power transmission member of the present invention, and the left gear 236 The third power transmission member of the present invention is constituted. The support plate 234 constitutes the support of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 16, engagement projections 234A, 234B, 234C are formed on the rear surface of the support plate 234. The engagement protrusion 234A is engaged with the guide groove 229D of the main arm 229 via the bush 230C, and the engagement protrusion 234B is engaged with the guide groove 229E of the main arm 229 via the bush 230D. The engagement protrusion 234C is engaged with the engagement hole 233B of the sub arm 233. Here, the engagement protrusion 234A of the present embodiment constitutes a first engagement protrusion of the invention, the engagement protrusion 234B constitutes a second engagement protrusion of the invention, and the engagement protrusion 234C Constitutes a third engagement projection of the present invention.

  The middle logo back cover 224 is attached to the support plate 234. As shown in FIG. 16, guide pins 224A and 224B are formed on the surface of the middle logo back cover 224 facing the support plate 234, and the guide pins 224A are formed. , 224B rotatably support the right gear 235 and the left gear 236, respectively.

  The right gear 235 includes a large gear 235A and a small gear 235B coaxially, and the left gear 236 includes coaxial large gears 236A and 236B. The right rack member 238 is formed with rack teeth 238A extending in the left-right direction, and the large gear 235A of the right gear 235 meshes (engages) with the rack teeth 238A.

  The left rack member 239 is formed with rack teeth 239A extending in the left-right direction, and the large gear 236A of the left gear 236 meshes (engages) with the rack teeth 239A. The middle gear 237 meshes (engages) with the small gear 235B of the right gear 235 and the small gear 236B of the left gear 236, and when the middle gear 237 rotates, the right gear 235B and 237B rotate with the rotation of the small gears 235B and 237B. The rack member 238 and the left rack member 239 move in the left-right direction. Here, the right rack member 238 of the present embodiment constitutes a first engaging member of the present invention, and the rack teeth 238A constitute an engaging portion of the first engaging member of the present invention. Further, left rack member 239 of the present embodiment constitutes a second engaging member of the present invention, and rack teeth 239A constitute an engaging portion of the second engaging member of the present invention.

  A right character part 211A, a right inner lens 213, a right logo board 215, and a right logo back cover 217 are fixed to the right rack member 238, and the left character part 211B, the left inner lens 214, The left logo substrate 216 and the left logo back cover 218 are fixed. Thus, when the right rack member 238 and the left rack member 239 move in the left-right direction, the right character portion 211A, the right inner lens 213, the right logo substrate 215 and the right logo back cover 217, the left character portion 211B, and the left inner lens 214 , The left logo substrate 216 and the left logo back cover 218 move integrally in the left-right direction.

  Then, when the right rack member 238 and the left rack member 239 are moved to the outside in the left-right direction, the right display portion 220A provided behind the middle character portion 211C and the right character portion 211A becomes easily visible, and the middle character is displayed. The left display portion 220B provided behind the portion 211C and the left character portion 211B becomes easily visible.

  The middle gear 237 is fitted into a fitting portion 229G formed around the opening 229F of the main arm 229, and the middle gear 237 cannot rotate relative to the main arm 229. The middle gear 237 is rotatably supported by a shaft 237A, and the shaft 237A is supported by the middle logo back cover 224 and the opening 229F of the main arm 229. Therefore, the middle gear 237 rotates relative to the support plate 234.

  In the logo role 210 having such a configuration, the state in which the engagement protrusion 229B of the main arm 229 is in contact with the upper end of the guide groove 225A via the bush 230A is the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion. The character portion 211B is a standby position where the character portion 211B is located at an initial position outside the display area 13a.

  In a state where the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B are located at the standby positions, when the cam gear 228 rotates clockwise in FIG. When the pin 228A pulls the logo link 231 to the left, the main arm 229 swings clockwise about the guide pin 225C. At this time, as shown in FIG. 15, in the main arm 229, the engaging protrusion 229B is guided downward along the guide groove 225A, and the distal end portion where the opening 229F is formed moves downward.

  Further, since the sub arm 233 is connected to the main arm 229 via the support plate 234, the sub arm 233 moves the guide groove 225B around the guide pin 225D as the tip of the main arm 229 moves downward. Swinging in the clockwise direction along, the tip of the sub arm 233 moves downward. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, the support member 227 and the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B move from the standby position to the falling position in the display area 13a.

  In the support plate 234 of this embodiment, the engagement protrusions 234A, 234B, and 234C engage with the guide grooves 229D and 229E of the main arm 229 via the bushes 230C and 230D, and Since the main arm 229 swings from the standby position to the drop position, the distance between the bushes 230C and 230D and the engagement hole 233B is unchanged since the engagement with the mating hole 233B is performed. That is, the triangular shape formed by connecting the bushes 230C and 230D and the engagement hole 233B has the same shape when the main arm 229 swings from the standby position to the drop position.

  For this reason, when the main arm 229 swings from the standby position to the drop position, the support plate 234 moves from the standby position to the drop position while maintaining the horizontal posture, so that the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and The left character portion 211B also moves from the standby position to the drop position while maintaining the horizontal posture.

  When the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B swing from the standby position to the drop position, the main arm 229 swings clockwise with the guide pin 225C as a fulcrum. The tip of 229 tilts downward. Accordingly, the middle gear 237 rotates clockwise and the small gear 235B of the right gear 235 and the small gear 236B of the left gear 236 rotate in the counterclockwise direction, respectively, whereby the large gear 235A and the left gear 235A of the right gear 235 are rotated. The right rack member 238 and the left rack member 239 are moved outward in the left-right direction via the large gear 236A of the gear 236.

  Thereby, the right character part 211A and the left character part 211B move outward in the left-right direction, and as shown in FIG. 18, the right display part 220A provided behind the middle character part 211C and the right character part 211A is visually recognized. This facilitates the visual recognition of the left display portion 220B provided behind the middle character portion 211C and the left character portion 211B.

  That is, while the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B are moved from the standby position to the drop position by the moving mechanism 226, the logo character 210 of the present embodiment has the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B. Moves outward in the left-right direction.

  When the engagement protrusion 229B of the main arm 229 swings to a position where it contacts the lower end of the guide groove 225A of the base plate 225, the driving of the motor 60D is stopped. The motor 60D is driven by a motor control circuit 60 (see FIG. 41). The motor control circuit 60 contacts the position where the engagement protrusion 229B of the main arm 229 contacts the upper end of the guide groove 225A of the base plate 225 and the lower end. The right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B are moved between the standby position and the falling position by controlling the number of steps between the positions.

  Further, the main arm 229 of the present embodiment has the guide grooves 229D and 229E, and the engaging protrusions 234A and 234B of the support plate 234 are engaged with the guide grooves 229D and 229E. Since the engagement protrusions 234A and 234B move along the guide grooves 229D and 229E when swinging clockwise about the pin 225C (see FIG. 20), the swing of the main arm 229 by the support plate 234 is performed. Is not disturbed.

  On the other hand, when the cam gear 228 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 15 by the drive of the motor 60D, the pin 228A pushes the logo link 231 to the right along with the rotation of the cam gear 228, thereby pushing the guide pin 225C. The main arm 229 swings counterclockwise around the fulcrum. At this time, the engagement protrusion 229B of the main arm 229 is guided upward along the guide groove 225A, and the distal end portion where the opening 229F is formed moves upward.

  Further, as the tip of the main arm 229 moves upward, the sub-arm 233 swings clockwise along the guide groove 225B with the guide pin 225D as a fulcrum, so that the tip of the sub-arm 233 rises upward. Go to Accordingly, the support member 227 and the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B move from the drop position to the standby position outside the display area 13a.

  Further, as described above, when the main arm 229 swings from the drop position to the standby position, the triangles formed with the bushes 230C and 230D and the engagement hole 233B have the same shape. As a result, the support plate 234 moves from the drop position to the standby position while maintaining the horizontal posture, so that the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B also wait from the drop position while maintaining the horizontal position. Move to position.

  When the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B swing from the drop position to the standby position, the main arm 229 swings counterclockwise around the guide pin 225C, so that the main arm 229 swings. The tip of the arm 229 tilts upward. Thus, the middle gear 237 rotates in the counterclockwise direction to rotate the small gear 235B of the right gear 235 and the small gear 236B of the left gear 236 in the clockwise direction, respectively, so that the large gear 235A and the left gear 235 of the right gear 235 are rotated. The right rack member 238 and the left rack member 239 are moved inward in the left-right direction via the large gear 236A of the gear 236.

  Thereby, the right character part 211A and the left character part 211B move inward in the left-right direction, and the gap between the middle character part 211C and the right character part 211A and the gap between the middle character part 211C and the left character part 211B are changed. The right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B become invisible. In other words, the logo character 210 of the present embodiment moves the right character part 211A, the middle character part 211C, and the left character part 211B from the drop position to the standby position by the moving mechanism 226 while the right character part 211A and the left character part 211B. Moves inward in the left-right direction.

  When the engagement protrusion 229B of the main arm 229 swings to a position where it comes into contact with the upper end of the guide groove 225A of the base plate 225, the motor control circuit 60 stops driving the motor 60D.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B are moved in the left-right direction while the support member 227 is moved from the standby position to the falling position by being driven by the motor 60D. A moving mechanism 226 for moving outwardly is provided, and is provided behind the middle character part 211C, the right character part 211A, and the left character part 211B when the right character part 211A and the left character part 211B move outward in the left-right direction. The displayed right display unit 220A and left display unit 220B are easily visible.

  Thus, not only the middle character portion 211C, the right character portion 211A, and the left character portion 211B fall, but also an effect of moving the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B outward in the left-right direction is performed. An effect of displaying the right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B provided behind the left character unit 211B can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the effect, and to enhance the interest in the game of the player.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the support plate 234 supporting the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B is engaged with the guide grooves 229D and 229E of the main arm 229. The support plate 234 includes the engagement protrusions 234A and 234B and the engagement protrusion 234C that engages with the engagement hole 233B of the sub arm 233.

  Accordingly, when the main arm 229 and the sub arm 233 swing by the driving of the motor 60D, the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B are maintained horizontally by the right character portion via the support plate 234. The part 211A, the middle character part 211C, and the left character part 211B can be moved from the standby position to the drop position.

  Further, a support member 227 is rotatably supported by the support plate 234, and supports the right gear 235 and the left gear 236 meshing with the middle gear 237, and the rack teeth 238A meshing with the right gear 235 while supporting the right character portion 211A. And a right rack member 238 movable in the left-right direction with respect to the support plate 234, and a rack tooth 239A that supports the left character portion 211B and meshes with the left gear 236. A left rack member 239 that is movable in the left-right direction.

  Accordingly, when the main arm 229 and the sub arm 233 swing, the inclination of the main arm 229 is maintained while the posture of the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B is kept horizontal via the support plate 234. Accordingly, by rotating the middle gear 237 to move the right gear 235 and the left gear 236 in the left-right direction, the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B can be moved in the left-right direction.

  As a result, the movement mechanism 226 that effectively moves the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B can enhance the interest in the effect, and can enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the single character motor 60D moves the right character part 211A, the middle character part 211C, and the left character part 211B to the standby position and the drop position, and the right character part 211A, the middle character part 211C, and the left character part 211B fall. Since the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B can be moved in the left-right direction as they move to the position, the number of motors can be reduced and the number of parts of the logo combination 210 can be reduced. Note that the logo role 210 of the embodiment is provided with a standby position, which is an initial position, above the game board 12 so as to move from the standby position above the game board 12 to the drop position below, It is not limited to this. For example, the logo role 210 may be provided on the right or left side of the game board 12 so as to move into the display area 13a from the right or left side of the game board 12. For example, the logo role 210 may be provided in an oblique direction of the game board 12 so as to move into the display area 13a from an oblique direction of the game board 12.

[Composite production of lightning and logo characters]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, a description will be given of a composite effect of the lightning role 80 and the logo role 210 according to the present embodiment.

  21 and 22, in a state where the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are moved from the standby position to the first position by driving the first moving mechanism 106 and the second moving mechanism 107, and The right character part 211A and the left character part 211B open in the left-right direction of the game board 12, and the right display part 220A and the left display part 220B provided behind the middle character part 211C, the right character part 211A, and the left character part 211B. In a state in which the right lightning part 81 and the left lightning part 86 are visible, the front ends of the right lightning part 81 and the left lightning part 86 overlap the right display part 220A and the left display part 220B in the front-rear direction behind the right display part 220A and the left display part 220B.

  At this time, the LEDs 59h and 59i are turned on to light the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86, and the LED 59m is turned on to display lightning by the right display part 220A and the left display part 220B of the base lens 220. I do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the decorative members 58A and 58D provided on the extension of the right lightning role 81 at the first position around the opening 4a of the glass door 4 are turned on by the LEDs 59a and 59d. By lighting the decorative members 58B and 58C provided on the extension of the left lightning bolt 86 at the first position around the opening 4a of the glass door 4 by the LEDs 59b and 59c, an effect display representing lightning is displayed. Do.

  In addition, the decorative members 58F, 58H provided on the extension of the right lightning role 81 at the first position around the display area 13a of the game board 12 are turned on by the LEDs 59f, 59h, and the display area is turned on. By lighting the decorative member 58G provided on the extension of the left lightning role 86 at the first position around the 13a by the LED 59g, an effect display representing lightning is performed.

  Thereby, the decorative members 58B, 58F, the right display portion 220A, the right lightning role 81, the decorative members 58H, 58D and the decorative member 58A, the left display portion 220B, the left lightning role 86, the decorative members 58G, 58C are respectively formed. Through this, it is possible to perform an effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1 as if lightning had fallen from the sky.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 have moved to the second position, the right lightning role in the second position around the opening 4 a of the glass door 4. The decorative members 58A, 58D provided on the extension of the object 81 and the left lightning role 86 are turned on by the LEDs 59a, 59d, and the right lightning role located at the second position around the display area 13a of the game board 12. The decorative members 58E and 58H provided on the extension of the 81 and the left lightning role 86 are turned on by the LEDs 59e and 59h.

  Thus, through the decoration members 58A and 58E, the right lightning role 81, the left lightning role 86, and the decoration members 58H and 58D, it is possible to perform an effect as if lightning had fallen from the heavens to the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

  Note that the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 and the logo position 210 are moved in the order that the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 move from the standby position to the first position. The accessory 210 may be moved from the standby position to the drop position.

  Further, after moving the logo role 210 from the standby position to the falling position, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 may be moved from the standby position to the first position. Alternatively, at the same time that the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 move from the standby position to the first position, the logo role 210 may be moved from the standby position to the falling position. However, the order of movement of the right lightning role 81, the left lightning role 86, and the logo role 210 is not particularly limited.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right lightning part 81 and the left lightning part 86 move to the first position (drive position), and the right character part 211A and the left character part When the right display portion 211A is opened in the left-right direction of the game board 12 and the right display portion 220A and the left display portion 220B provided behind the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B become easily visible, the right The front ends of the lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are configured to overlap a part of the right display portion 220A and the left display portion 220B in the front-back direction.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect in which the right display part 220A and the left display part 220B are related to the right lightning part 81 and the left lightning part 86, and the logo part 210, the right lightning part 81 and the left lightning part 86 Can be synergistically improved in the interest of the player in the game, as compared with the case where the effects of the above are performed alone.

  In addition, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are overlapped with the right display part 220A and the left display part 220B in the front-rear direction, so that the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are related. The base lens 220 of the logo role 210 can be recognized by the player from the shapes and positions of the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the logo role 210 is in the form of the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86, that is, that the logo is being rendered in accordance with the lightning. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is not possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right lightning part 81 and the left lightning part 86 move to the first position, and the right character part 211A, the middle character part 211C, and the left character part 211B are formed. When moved to the drop position, the decorative members 58A to 58D of the glass door 4 and the decorative members 58E to 58H of the game board 12 located on the extension of the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 become the right lightning role. An effect linked to the form of 81 and the left lightning role 86 is performed.

  As a result, an effect in which the decorative members 58A to 58H are related to the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 can be executed, and the effect of the decoration members 58A to 58H and the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 can be performed. Compared with the case where each is played alone, the interest of the player in the game can be synergistically improved. In addition, the player can recognize the decorative members 58A to 58H from the shapes and positions of the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the decorative members 58A to 58H are performing effects according to the forms of the decorative members 58A to 58H and the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the tips of the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 are made to overlap a part of the right display part 220A and the left display part 220B in the front-rear direction. The front ends of the lightning role 81 and the left lightning portion 86 may overlap the entirety of the right display portion 220A and the left display portion 220B in the front-rear direction. The display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B do not need to overlap.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative portion is composed of three right character portions 211A, a middle character portion 211C, and a left character portion 211B, but the number of the decorative portions may be two or more.

[Schematic configuration of door accessory]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32, the door role 420 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door role 420 and a moving mechanism for moving the door role 420. In FIG. 23, a door role 420 includes a pair of right and left gold doors 421 and 422, and a pair of right and left silver doors 423 and 423 provided behind the right and left gold doors 421 and 422. 424. The right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 of the present embodiment constitute a pair of first door members of the present invention, and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 form a pair of second doors of the present invention. Configure the members. Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a pair of right gold doors 421 and a left gold door 422 and a pair of right silver doors 423 and a left silver door 424. The left gold door 422 may have any one, and the pair of right silver door 423 and left silver door 424 may have either one.

  A lower guide rail 425 is provided below the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423, and the left silver door 424, and the lower guide rail 425 extends in the left-right direction of the game board 12. are doing. Protrusions 421A, 422A, 423A and 424A are formed below the right and left gold doors 421, 422, 423 and 424. Here, the lower guide rail 425 of the present embodiment constitutes a guide member of the present invention.

  The protrusions 421A, 422A, 423A, and 424A are movably fitted to the lower guide rail 425, and the right and left gold doors 421 and 422 and the right and left silver doors 423 and 424 are on the lower side. The game board 12 is supported to move in the left-right direction so as to be located at an open position outside the display area 13a (see FIG. 5) and a closed position inside the display area 13a (see FIGS. 28 and 29) along the guide rail 425. I do. In addition, in the case where the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 move to the closed position, and in the case where the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 move to the closed position, the identification symbol for production, the production image, and the decoration Various images such as images (decorative designs) become invisible.

  As shown in FIG. 28, a right lightning bolt 81 and a left lightning bolt 86 are provided behind the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, and a right gold door 421, a left gold door 422, and a right silver door are provided. In a state where the 423 and the left silver door 424 are in the closed position, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, the right lightning bolt 81 and the left lightning bolt 86, Oppose each other with a gap in the front-rear direction of the game board 12.

  In FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, the right lightning bolt 81 and the left lightning bolt 86 are shown in order to show that the right lightning bolt 81 and the left lightning bolt 86 are located behind the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424. The lightning role 86 is shown in a state where it has been moved to the second position. Here, the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 of the present embodiment are formed of a lightning role different from the door role, and constitute a second moving member of the present invention. The second moving member may be constituted by a structure, a movable object, a decorative member, or the like, and is not particularly limited.

  23 to 25, an upper guide shaft 426 and a lower guide shaft 427 are provided above the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, respectively. The lower guide shaft 427 is provided in parallel in the up-down direction. That is, the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 are provided on the opposite side of the lower guide rail 425 with the right and left gold doors 421 and 422 and the right and left silver doors 423 and 424 therebetween. Here, the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 of the present embodiment constitute a pair of long members of the present invention.

  The right gold door 421 is attached to the right gold door rack member 428. The right gold door rack member 428 has a right gold door 421 attached thereto, a guide plate 428A movably fitted to the upper guide shaft 426, and a rack integrally provided on the guide plate 428A and extending in the left-right direction. It has a shaft 428B and rack teeth 428a and 428b formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the rack shaft 428B and formed in the axial direction of the rack shaft 428B.

  The left gold door 422 is attached to the left gold door rack member 429. The left gold door rack member 429 includes a guide plate 429A to which the left gold door 422 is attached and movably fitted to the lower guide shaft 427, and a rack shaft integrally provided on the guide plate 429A and extending in the left-right direction. 429B and rack teeth 429a formed on the upper surface of the rack shaft 429B and formed in the axial direction of the rack shaft 429B.

  The right silver door 423 is attached to the right silver door rack member 430. The right silver door rack member 430 has a right silver door 423 attached thereto, a guide plate 430A movably fitted to the lower guide shaft 427, and a rack provided integrally with the guide plate 430A and extending in the left-right direction. It has a shaft 430B and rack teeth 430a formed on the upper surface of the rack shaft 430B and formed in the axial direction of the rack shaft 430B.

  The left silver door 424 is attached to the left silver door rack member 431. The left silver door rack member 431 has a left silver door 424 attached thereto, a guide plate 431A that is movably fitted to the upper guide shaft 426, and a rack that is provided integrally with the guide plate 431A and extends in the left-right direction. It has a shaft 431B and rack teeth 431a, 431b formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the rack shaft 431B and formed in the axial direction of the rack shaft 431B.

  In FIG. 30, the right silver door 423 is provided with a pair of bosses 423A and 423B having screw grooves, and the bosses 423A and 423B are formed at the same height in the horizontal direction. A pair of boss holes 431d and 431e are formed in the guide plate 430A of the right silver door rack member 430, and the boss holes 431d and 431e are formed at the same height in the horizontal direction.

  The bosses 423A and 423B are fitted in the boss holes 431d and 431e, and in this state, the countersunk screws 433A and 433B are fastened to the screw grooves of the bosses 423A and 423B through the boss holes 431d and 431e. Thus, the right silver door 423 is fixed to the guide plate 430A. Note that the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, and the left silver door 424 are also fixed to the guide plates 428A, 429A, 431A with countersunk screws 433A, 433B in the same configuration as the right silver door 423.

  23 to 27, a gold door drive motor 60E is provided on the left side in the extending direction of the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 (corresponding to one side in the extending direction of the present invention). The gold door drive motor 60E has a motor shaft 60e that extends in the front-rear direction and has a gear 435 attached to the tip end in the extension direction. ) Is installed above the upper guide shaft 426.

  The gear 435 meshes with the gear 438 via the gear 436 and the gear 437, and the metal door drive motor 60 </ b> E and the gears 435 to 438 extend in the extending direction of the upper guide shaft 426, that is, the right metal door 421 and the left metal door 421. It is installed in the opening and closing direction of the gold door 422.

  The gear 438 meshes with the rack teeth 428 a of the right gold door rack member 428, and the gear 439 meshes between the rack teeth 428 b of the right gold door rack member 428 and the rack teeth 429 a of the left gold door rack member 429. are doing.

  Therefore, when the gear 435 rotates forward and backward by driving the gold door drive motor 60E, the gear 438 rotates via the gear 436 and the gear 437, so that the right metal door rack member 428 moves in the left-right direction. Then, the left gold door rack member 429 moves left and right via the gear 439 as the right gold door rack member 428 moves right and left, so that the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 are closed and opened. Move between positions.

  Here, the right gold door rack member 428 of the present embodiment forms a first mounting portion of the present invention, and the left gold door rack member 429 forms a second mounting portion of the present invention. Further, right silver door rack member 430 of the present embodiment constitutes a third attachment portion of the present invention, and left silver door rack member 431 constitutes a fourth attachment portion of the present invention. Further, the gold door drive motor 60E of the present embodiment constitutes a first movable member driving means of the present invention, and the gears 435 to 439 and the rack teeth 428a, 428b, 429a are the first movable member of the present invention. The moving mechanism 451 is configured.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a right gold door rack member 428 and a right gold door 421, a left gold door rack member 429 and a left gold door 422, a right silver door rack member 430 and a right silver door 423. And the left silver door rack member 431 and the left silver door 424 are formed by integrating separate members, but may be formed integrally. Further, a member including the right gold door rack member 428, the left gold door rack member 429, the right gold door 421, and the left gold door 422 constitute a first moving member and a first movable member of the present invention. In addition, a member including the right silver door rack member 430, the left silver door rack member 431, the right silver door 423, and the left silver door 424 constitute a first moving member and a second movable member of the present invention.

  A silver door drive motor 60F is provided on the right side in the extending direction of the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 (corresponding to the other side in the extending direction of the present invention). The silver door drive motor 60F has a motor shaft 60f that extends in the front-rear direction and has a gear 441 attached to a tip end in the extension direction. The gear 441 is located on the rear side in the front-rear direction (corresponding to the other side in the front-rear direction of the present invention). ) Is installed above the upper guide shaft 426. Here, the motor shafts 60e and 60f of the present embodiment constitute an output shaft of the present invention.

  The gear 441 meshes with the gear 444 via the gear 442 and the gear 443, and the silver door drive motor 60F and the gears 441 to 444 extend in the extending direction of the upper guide shaft 426, that is, the right silver door 423 and the left It is installed in the opening and closing direction of the silver door 424. Further, the gears 441 to 444 are installed apart from the gears 435 to 438 in the front-rear direction.

  The gear 444 meshes with the rack teeth 431a of the left silver door rack member 431, and the gear 445 meshes between the rack teeth 431b of the left silver door rack member 431 and the rack teeth 430a of the right silver door rack member 430. are doing.

  Therefore, when the gear 441 rotates forward and backward by driving the silver door drive motor 60F, the gear 444 rotates via the gear 442 and the gear 443, so that the left silver door rack member 431 moves in the left-right direction. The right silver door rack member 430 moves left and right via the gear 445 as the left silver door rack member 431 moves left and right, so that the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 close and open. Move between positions.

  Note that the open positions of the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 of the present embodiment correspond to the first position of the present invention, and the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 421. The closed position of 422 and the right and left silver doors 423 and 424 corresponds to the second position of the present invention.

  Here, the silver door drive motor 60F of the present embodiment constitutes the second movable member drive means of the present invention, and the gears 441 to 445 and the rack teeth 430a, 431a, 431b are the second movable member drive means of the present invention. The member moving mechanism 452 is configured. Further, gear 435 of the present embodiment constitutes a first power output member of the present invention, and gear 441 constitutes a second power output member of the present invention.

  A gold door sensor 446A is provided on the right outside of the silver door drive motor 60F. The gold door sensor 446A includes a photo sensor. The gold door sensor 446A detects a protruding piece 428C provided to protrude upward from the guide plate 428A of the right gold door rack member 428. In the right gold door rack member 428, when the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 are located at the open positions outside the display area 13a, the gold door sensor 446A detects the protruding piece 428C.

  Information detected by the gold door sensor 446A is input to the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 (see FIG. 41). The main CPU 71 transmits a motor drive command to the motor control circuit 60 based on the detection information of the gold door sensor 446A. The motor control circuit 60 moves the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 to the closed position by controlling the number of steps of the gold door drive motor 60E from the open position based on the motor drive command.

  A silver door sensor 446B is provided on the left outside of the gold door drive motor 60E. The silver door sensor 446B includes a photo sensor. The silver door sensor 446B detects a protruding piece 431C provided to protrude upward from the rack shaft 431B of the left silver door rack member 431. In the left silver door rack member 431, the silver door sensor 446B detects the projecting piece 431C when the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are located at the open positions outside the display area 13a.

  The detection information of the silver door sensor 446B is input to the main CPU 71 (see FIG. 41) of the main control circuit 70. The main CPU 71 transmits a motor drive command to the motor control circuit 60 based on the detection information of the silver door sensor 446B. The motor control circuit 60 moves the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 to the open position by controlling the number of steps of the silver door drive motor 60F from the open position by the motor drive command.

  Here, the “open position” and the “closed position” in the present invention may be the same as the mode in which the first moving member moves from the “standby position” to the “drive position”. That is, it is assumed that the “open position” functions as the “standby position” and the “closed position” functions as the “drive position”.

  In FIG. 23, a pair of left and right LED boards 448 and 449 having LEDs 59g and 59h are provided on the front surface of the lower guide rail 425, and the LED boards 448 and 449 are provided with openings 448a formed in the LED boards 448 and 449. , 449a are fitted to the bosses 425a, 425b of the lower guide rail 425. Threads are formed in the bosses 425a and 425b, and bolts (not shown) are screwed into the screw grooves.

  A lower panel base 450 fixed to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in front of the lower guide rail 425, and the lower panel base 450 is located below the display area 13a (FIG. 5), and is fixed to the lower guide rail 425. The lower panel base 450 includes decorative members 58G and 58H. When the LEDs 59g and 59h are turned on, the decorative members 58G and 58H display an effect including lightning. Here, the lower panel base 450 of the present embodiment constitutes a fixing member of the present invention. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lower guide rail 425 is fixed to the lower panel base 450, and the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423, the left silver door 424 Has a predetermined distance between the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86. The lower guide rail 425 is provided between the lower panel base 450 and the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86.

  Here, having a “predetermined distance” between the first moving member and the second moving member means that the first moving member is at the open position and the second moving member is at the standby position. When the first moving member is in the closed position, when the first moving member is in the closed position, and when the second moving member is in the standby position and has the predetermined distance, the first moving member is in the open position, It is assumed that the second moving member has a predetermined interval when it is in the driving position, the first moving member has a predetermined interval when it is in the closed position, and the second moving member has a predetermined interval when it is in the driving position. However, any one of them may be used, or all of them may have a “predetermined interval”.

  Further, that the guide member is provided “between” the fixed member and the second moving member means that the fixed member and the second moving member are in the driving range of the second moving member (from the standby position to the driving position). At least a portion of the fixed member and the second moving member are overlapped when viewed from any direction, and the fixed member and the second moving member are provided with a point and a point. It is assumed that at least a part of the guide member is present on a straight line. In addition to this, when the driving range of the second moving member is extended in the movable direction, the fixed member and the second moving member It is also conceivable that they overlap when viewed from any direction.

  A plurality of fitting holes 450a to 450f are formed in the lower panel base 450. A plurality of bosses 425c to 425f are formed on the front surface of the lower guide rail 425, and among the bosses 425c to 425f, screw grooves (not shown) are formed in the bosses 425c and 425f.

  The lower panel base 450 has fitting holes 450a and 450f on both left and right sides fitted into the bosses 425c and 425f of the lower guide rail 425, and screws are screwed into the bosses 425c and 425f through the fitting holes 450a and 450f. Thus, both left and right sides are fixed to the lower guide rail 425.

  Further, the lower panel base 450 has fitting holes 450b and 450e fitted into the bosses 425d and 425e of the lower guide rail 425, and the lower side into which the openings 448a and 449a of the LED boards 448 and 449 are fitted. In a state where the fitting holes 450c and 450e are fitted to the bosses 425a and 425b of the guide rail 425, screws are screwed into the bosses 425a and 425b through the fitting holes 450c and 450e, thereby lowering the LED boards 448 and 449 together. It is fixed to the side guide rail 425.

  Therefore, the lower guide rail 425 is pulled toward the lower panel base 450 by the fastening force of the screw and is fixed to the lower panel base 450, and the rigidity of the lower guide rail 425 increases.

  According to such a pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lower guide rail 425 is fixed to the lower panel base 450, and the right and left gold doors 421, 422, 423, and 424 are provided. Have a predetermined distance between the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86. In addition, a lower guide rail 425 is provided between the lower panel base 450 and the right and left lightning bolts 81 and 86.

  Thereby, the lower guide rail 425 can be fixed so as to be attracted to the lower panel base 450 side, and the rigidity of the lower guide rail 425 can be increased. Therefore, when any external force is applied to the lower guide rail 425, the lower guide rail 425 can be prevented from bending in the front-rear direction, and the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, and the right silver door 423 can be prevented. In addition, the gap in the front-rear direction between the left silver door 424 and the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 can be kept constant. Therefore, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, and the right lightning role 81 and the left lightning role 86 can be smoothly moved.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right gold door 421 is attached to the upper guide shaft 426 via the guide plate 428A of the right gold door rack member 428, and the left gold door 422 is connected to the left gold door rack. The right silver door 423 is attached to the lower guide shaft 427 via the guide plate 430A of the right silver door rack member 430, and the left silver door 424 is attached to the other side of the lower guide shaft 427 via the guide plate 429A of the member 429. A gold door drive motor 60E, which is movably attached to the upper guide shaft 426 via the left silver door rack member 431, and is provided on the left side in the extending direction of the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427, the upper guide shaft 426, And a silver door drive motor 60F provided on the right side in the extending direction of the lower guide shaft 427.

  Thereby, the gold door drive motor 60E and the silver door drive motor 60F can be installed so as to reduce the gap in the front-rear direction between the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424. An effective effect using the door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 can be realized.

  In addition, since the gap in the front-rear direction between the right and left gold doors 421 and 422 and the right and left silver doors 423 and 424 can be reduced, for example, the right and left gold doors 421 and 422 are moved from the closed position to the open position. An effect in which the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 move from the open position to the closed position when moved, that is, the right silver door 421 and the left silver door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 When performing an effect in which the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are moved so that the open / close state is switched (see FIGS. 26 and 27), the right gold door 421 and the left gold door. As much as the gap between the door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 can be reduced, a visually effective effect can be performed for the player.

  For this reason, the visual effect of the production of the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 can be improved, and the interest in the production can be improved, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Can be improved.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can reduce the gap in the front-rear direction between the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, so that the right gold door 421 and the left gold The space for installing the door 422, the right silver door 423, and the left silver door 424 can be reduced, and as a result, the length of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. As a result, the installation space for the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gold door drive motor 60E and the silver door drive motor 60F respectively extend in the front-rear direction, and the gears 435, 441 are attached to the leading ends in the extending direction. It has motor shafts 60e and 60f, and the gold door drive motor 60E is installed above the upper guide shaft 426 so that the gear 435 is located on the front side in the front-rear direction. The gear 441 is installed above the upper guide shaft 426 so as to be located on the other side in the front-rear direction.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the gold door drive motor 60E and the silver door drive motor 60F from being largely displaced from the upper guide shaft 426 in the front-rear direction above the upper guide shaft 426. Therefore, the first movable member moving mechanism 451 and the second movable member moving mechanism 452 can be installed close to each other in the front-rear direction, and the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423, and the left silver The space for installing the door 424 can be reduced. Therefore, for example, a decorative member or the like can be installed in an empty space in front of the first movable member moving mechanism 451 and the second movable member moving mechanism 452, and the effect can be more effectively improved.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 are provided above the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424. However, the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 may be provided below the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424. In this case, the gold door drive motor 60E is installed below the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 so that the gear 435 is located on the front side in the front-rear direction. The gear 441 is located below the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 such that the gear 441 is located on the other side in the front-rear direction.

  When the upper and lower guide shafts 426 and 427 are provided below the right and left silver doors 421 and 422 and the right and left silver doors 423 and 424, respectively, the lower guide rail 425 The corresponding guide members may be installed below the right and left silver doors 421, 422, 423, and 424.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, the upper guide shaft 426, the lower guide shaft 427, and the lower guide rail 425. The right and left gold doors 421 and 422 and the right and left silver doors 423 and 424 are supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Alternatively, it may be configured to be supported in an oblique direction.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the right silver door 423 is provided with a pair of bosses 423A and 432B having screw grooves, and the right silver door rack member 430 is provided with a pair of bosses on the guide plate 430A. The holes 431d and 431e are formed, but need not be limited to this.

  For example, screw grooves are formed in the guide plate 428A of the right gold door rack member 428, the guide plate 429A of the left gold door rack member 429, the guide plate 430A of the right silver door rack member 430, and the guide plate 431A of the left silver door rack member 431. A plurality of screw holes are formed in each of the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423, and the left silver door 424, and the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423, and the left silver door are formed. By screwing a screw into a screw groove through each screw hole with the door 424, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are connected to the guide plates 428A to 431A. Is also good. However, in the case of such a configuration, the plurality of screw holes formed in the right and left silver doors 421 and 422 and the right and left silver doors 423 and 424, respectively, may be vertically displaced. preferable.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 31A, a plurality of screw grooves 461A and 461B are formed in the guide plate 430A of the right silver door rack member 430, and a plurality of screw holes 462A and 462B are formed in the right silver door 423. Then, a case where the screw holes 462A and 462B are formed horizontally in the vertical direction will be described. Here, the screw grooves 461A and 461B of the present embodiment constitute the grooves of the present invention, and the screw holes 462A and 462B constitute the holes of the present invention. The holes may be any holes as long as all or some of the fastening members penetrate in addition to the screw holes.

  When the right silver door 423 in which the screw holes 462A and 462B are formed horizontally in the vertical direction is attached to the guide plate 430A using the pan screw 463 (the pan screw 463 is shown by a virtual line), the pan screw 463 is placed on the right side. It is fastened to the right screw groove 461B through the screw hole 462B, that is, screwed and rotated in the clockwise rotation direction R. Here, the pan screw 463 of the present embodiment constitutes a fastening member of the present invention.

  Here, “the fastening member is fastened” means that the right and left gold doors 421 and 422 and the right and left silver doors 423 and 424 are guided by the guide plates 428A and 429A in this embodiment. It is fastened (screwed) to 430A, 431A, but is not limited to this, it may be fastened using bolts and nuts, and is limited as long as it can be fastened or fixed. Although not limited to the above, it is preferable that at least one fastening member is a fastening member that is fastened by a rotation operation, for example, a helical shape, even if the fastening member includes a plurality of members.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), due to friction between the pan screw 463 and the right silver door 423, the center axis 465 of the right silver door 423 is moved by the radial play of the screw hole 462B and the screw groove 461B. Tilt to the right with respect to the vertical axis.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, the right silver door 423 of the present embodiment has the screw holes 464A and 464B so that the screw holes 464A are located above the screw holes 464B by the distance T. It was formed shifted vertically.

  When this right silver door 423 is attached to the guide plate 430A of the right silver door rack member 430, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the radial direction of the screw hole 464A and the screw groove 461A and the screw hole 464B and the screw groove 461B. The screw hole 464A and the screw groove 461A and the screw hole 464B and the screw groove 461B are positioned in such a manner that the center axis 465 of the right silver door 423 is tilted leftward by the amount of the backlash.

  In this state, when a pan screw 463 (shown by a phantom line) is screwed into the screw groove 461B of the guide plate 430A through the right screw hole 464A and the pan screw is rotated in the clockwise direction R, FIG. As shown, the frictional force between the pan screw 463 and the right silver door 423 causes the right silver door 423 to incline by a gap between the screw groove 461B and the screw hole 464B.

  Then, when the gap between the screw groove 461B and the upper part of the screw hole 461B is eliminated, the upper end of the screw hole 464B comes into contact with the bolt shaft of the pan screw on which the screw is formed (corresponding to the screw hole 461b in FIG. 32B). Therefore, the right silver door 423 does not tilt any more when the central axis 465 is coaxial with the vertical axis. Further, the gap between the screw groove 461A and the lower portion of the screw hole 464A disappears in a state where the central axis 465 of the right silver door 423 is coaxial with the vertical axis.

  For this reason, when the pan screw is screwed into the screw groove 461B of the guide plate 430A through the left screw hole 464A, the lower end of the screw hole 464A abuts on the bolt axis of the pan screw (corresponding to the screw groove 461A). The silver door 423 does not tilt any further with the central axis 465 coaxial with the vertical axis.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the screw holes 464A and 464B of the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are shifted in the vertical direction. Each of the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423, and the left silver door 424 in a state where the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423, and the left silver door 424 are tilted in advance. Pan screws are screwed into the screw grooves 461A, 461B of the guide plates 428A, 429A, 430A, 431A through the screw holes 464A, 464B, and the frictional force in the rotation direction R of the pan screws from the pan screw to the right metal door 421 and the left metal door. 422, and the right and left silver doors 423 and 424, respectively, can rotate the right and left silver doors 421 and 422, and the right and left silver doors 423 and 424 to normal positions.

  For this reason, when the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are fastened to the guide plates 428A, 429A, 430A, and 431A, respectively, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right The inclination of the silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 can be corrected to prevent the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 from being inclined. For this reason, when the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are moved in the left-right direction along the lower guide rail 425, an unintended operation can be prevented.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are provided behind the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, but the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are provided. May be provided with a right gold door 421 and a left gold door 422. In this case, the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 form a pair of first door members, and the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 form a pair of second door members.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are opened along the lower guide rail 425 outside the display area 13a ( The game board 12 is supported to move in the left-right direction so as to be located at a closed position (see FIGS. 28 and 29) in the display area 13a. A part of the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 may be located (exposed) in the display area 13a in the closed position.

[Configuration of the fourth symbol]
Next, a fourth symbol according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth symbol.

  5 and 7, a decoration member 470 is provided on the right side of the game board 12 on the right side of the display area 13a, and a decoration member 471 is provided on the lower right side of the display area 13a. 33, a panel base 472, a diffusion sheet 473, a reflector 474, and a panel substrate 475 are provided behind the decoration member 470. The diffusion sheet 473, the reflector 474, and the panel substrate 475 are attached to the panel base 472. I have.

  The panel substrate 475 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 59n, and the light emitted from the LEDs 59n is guided to the diffusion sheet 473 by the reflector 474, and is diffused by the diffusion sheet 473, so that the decoration member 470 is turned on or blinks. By doing so, a display effect related to the game is performed.

  A display member 476 constituting a fourth symbol is provided behind the decoration member 471, and the display member 476 includes a pair of lenses 478, 479, a front reflector 480 provided behind the lenses 478, 479, A back reflector 481 provided behind the front reflector 480 and a pair of LEDs 59p and 59q provided below the panel substrate 475 behind the back reflector 481 are provided.

  Here, the LEDs 59p and 59q of the present embodiment constitute the light emitting device of the present invention. Further, the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481 constitute a light guide member of the present invention, the front reflector 480 constitutes a first light guide member of the present invention, and the back reflector 481 is a second light guide member of the present invention. A light guide member is configured. The panel substrate 475 constitutes the substrate of the present invention.

  The game board 12 includes a pedestal 477 that forms a frame surrounding the display area 13a. A pair of openings 477A and 477B are formed below the pedestal 477, and the openings 477A and 477B are formed below the pedestal 477. A support frame 477C protruding rearward from the rear surface of the pedestal 477 is formed around the periphery (see FIG. 34).

  33 and 34, bosses 480A and 480B are formed on the front reflector 480, and the bosses 480A and 480B have through holes 480C and 480D extending in the front-rear direction of the game board 12.

  35 and 36, the front reflector 480 is fitted to the support frame 477C of the pedestal 477. When the front reflector 480 is fitted to the support frame 477C, the front ends of the bosses 480A and 480B have openings 477A. , 477B. Here, the support frame 477C of the present embodiment constitutes a mounting portion of the present invention. The “mounting portion” refers to a position where a light guide member such as a through-hole, a dent, an unevenness, or the like provided in the pedestal 477 is installed, or a shape or a member that can be fitted, or an installation position using the pedestal 477 itself. Assisting the installation of the light guide member, or providing a fulcrum when installing the light guide member, or indirectly or directly enhancing the effect of the light guide member, or simply installing the light guide member on the base 477 It is assumed that it has been done.

  In FIG. 34, a pair of bosses 471A and 471B are provided on the back surface of the decorative member 471 so as to extend in the front-rear direction of the game board 12, and lenses 478 and 479 are fitted to the bosses 471A and 471B. . 35 and 36, when the lenses 478 and 479 are fitted to the bosses 471A and 471B, the rear ends of the lenses 478 and 479 are in contact with the front end surfaces of the bosses 480A and 480B of the front reflector 480.

  33 and 34, bosses 481A and 481B are formed on the back reflector 481 so as to extend in the front-rear direction of the game board 12, and the bosses 481A and 481B extend in the front-rear direction of the game board 12. It has through holes 481C and 481D, and the through holes 481C and 481D communicate with the through holes 480C and 480D of the bosses 480A and 480B of the front reflector 480. 35 and 36, the inside diameters of the opening ends 481c, 481d of the through holes 481C, 481D of the back reflector 481 on the side facing the front reflector 480 are formed smaller than the inside diameters of the through holes 480C, 480D.

  Here, the through holes 480C, 480D of the bosses 480A, 480B of the front reflector 480 constitute the first through hole of the present invention, and the through holes 481C, 481D of the bosses 481A, 481B of the back reflector 481 correspond to the present invention. A second through hole is formed.

  In FIG. 33, a support portion 472A is formed below the panel base 472, and bosses 481A and 481B of the back reflector 481 are supported by the support portion 472A. When the diffusion sheet 473, the reflector 474, and the panel substrate 475 are attached to the panel base 472, the back reflector 481 has front end surfaces 481a, 481b of the bosses 481A, 481B, and rear end surfaces 480a, 480A of the front reflector 480. The panel base 472 is supported by the panel base 472 between the panel substrate 475 and the front reflector 480 so as to be separated from the panel reflector 480b by a predetermined gap (see FIGS. 35 and 36).

  Thus, the back reflector 481 is provided between the front reflector 480 and the LEDs 59p and 59q. Further, the pedestal 477 is located closer to the opposing surfaces of the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481, that is, the rear end surfaces 480 a and 480 b of the bosses 480 A and 480 B of the front reflector 480 and the front end surfaces 481 a and 481 b of the bosses 481 A and 481 B of the back reflector 481. It is installed on the decorative member 471 side.

  The LEDs 59p and 59q are installed on the panel substrate 475 so as to be located behind the bosses 481A and 481B of the back reflector 481. Here, the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481 of the present embodiment are formed of a black resin component having a high light-shielding property.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, light emitted from the LEDs 59p, 59q passes through the bosses 481A, 481B of the back reflector 481, the through holes 481C, 481D, and the bosses 480A of the front reflector 480, the through holes 480C of the 480B, After the light is guided to 480D, the light is guided to the decorative member 471 through the lenses 478 and 479, and an effect display for lighting or blinking the decorative member 471 is performed. Accordingly, the light guided from the LEDs 59p and 59q to the lenses 478 and 479 is guided to the decoration member 471 without being interrupted by the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481.

  Here, the display member 476 according to the present embodiment, when the special symbol is the first symbol, the ordinary symbol is the second symbol, and the effect identification symbol (decorative symbol) is the third symbol, The fourth symbol is a kind of decorative symbol. For example, when the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 are in a closed state, the display area 13a is blocked by the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, and the player visually checks the effect identification symbols in the display area 13a. Can not.

  In such a case, the display effect by the fourth symbol notifies the player that the identification symbol for effect is changing in the display area 13a. As the display member 476, 7-segment may be used, and effect display may be performed such that the same effect identification symbol as the effect identification symbol fluctuating in the display area 13a is variably displayed.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having such a configuration, the reflector is provided separately from the front reflector 480 and the front reflector 480 fitted to the pedestal 477 so as to be located behind the decorative member 471, A back reflector 481 is provided between the front reflector 480 and the LEDs 59p and 59q, and the pedestal 477 is installed closer to the decorative member 471 than the opposing surfaces of the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481.

  Accordingly, when the distance from the LEDs 59n and 59q to the decorative member 471 is long, only the front reflector 480 shorter than the distance from the LEDs 59n and 59q to the decorative member 471 is fitted to the support frame 477C of the pedestal 477. When assembling the reflector 480 to the pedestal 477, the front reflector 480 can be prevented from tilting with respect to the pedestal 477, and the assemblability of the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481 can be improved.

  For this reason, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the adjacent LEDs 59p and 59q from interfering with the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481, and to efficiently guide the light from the LEDs 59p and 59q to the decorative member 471.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reflector is divided into a front reflector 480 and a back reflector 481 instead of a single elongated reflector as in the related art, so that the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481 are installed. When the area is small, the rigidity of each of the front reflector 480 and the rear reflector 481 can be prevented from decreasing, and as a result, the overall rigidity of the reflector can be prevented from decreasing.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the inside diameters of the opening ends 481c and 481d of the through-holes 481C and 481D of the back reflector 481 on the side facing the front reflector 480 are set to the through-holes 480C and 480D of the front reflector 480. Formed smaller than the inner diameter of

  Thereby, when there is a gap between the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481, the light is narrowed down by the opening ends 481c and 481d of the through holes 481C and 481D of the back reflector 481 and guided to the through holes 480C and 480D of the front reflector 480. Can be.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap between the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481. For this reason, it is possible to more effectively prevent light emitted from the adjacent LEDs 59p and 59q from being interfered by the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481, and to efficiently guide light from the LEDs 59p and 59q to the decorative member 471. Can be.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the front end surfaces 480a, 480b of the front reflector 480 and the front end surfaces 481a, 481b of the bosses 481A, 481B of the back reflector 481 abut on the front reflector 480. The gap between 480 and back reflector 481 may be eliminated.

  37 and 38, the front end 477c of the support frame 477C of the base 477 is connected to the rear end surfaces 480a and 480b of the bosses 480A and 480B of the front reflector 480 and the front end surfaces 481a of the bosses 481A and 481B of the back reflector 481. , 481b.

  In this way, the front end 477c of the support frame 477C can cover the rear end surfaces 480a and 480b of the bosses 480A and 480B of the front reflector 480 and the front end surfaces 481a and 481b of the bosses 481A and 481B of the rear reflector 481.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap between the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively prevent the light emitted from the adjacent LEDs 59p and 59q from being interfered by the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481, and to efficiently guide the light to the LEDs 59p and 59q.

  Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has, as first to third power transmission means, a cam gear 98, a gear 99 and a gear 100, a cam gear 102 and a gear 103, a gear 94 and a gear 95, respectively. However, the first to third power transmission means are not limited to this. For example, using a crank, a solenoid, a lever, or the like, the power of the rotational motion may be used as the power of a member performing the reciprocating motion, or the power of the reciprocating motion may be transmitted to the power of the rotational motion. It is not limited to gears as long as (energy, torque) can be transmitted.

[Special design display]
The special symbol display device 61 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, as shown in FIG.

  The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) a special symbol in a special symbol game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, a special symbol display device 61 is configured by a device that displays a special symbol with a symbol or the like.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display device 61 may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern formed by turning on and off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display device 61 performs a fluctuation display of the special symbol (identification information) when the game ball wins the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 (special symbol starting prize). Then, the special symbol display device 61 performs a change display of the special symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the special symbol.

  In the following, a special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when a game ball has won the first starting port 44 is referred to as a first special symbol. In addition, a special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball has won the second starting port 45 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specific mode ("big hit" mode), the gaming state is more advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. The state shifts to the jackpot game state.

  That is, in the special symbol display device 61, the state where the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a state of shifting to the big hit game state is "big hit".

  In the big hit game state, the first big winning opening 53 or the second big winning opening 54 is in an open state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 44 and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the special symbol display device 61, the first big winning symbol is won. The mouth 53 is opened.

  On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 45 and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61 in a specific mode, the second large winning port 54 is opened.

  The open state of each big winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. If the elapsed time of the open state of each special winning opening satisfies any one of these conditions, the large winning opening that has been open is closed.

  Hereinafter, a game in which the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54 is in a state (open state) in which game balls can be easily received is referred to as a round game. During the round game, the special winning opening is closed.

  The round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the special symbol stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the specific mode (a mode of "losing"), the game state does not shift except when a win is selected in the drop lottery.

  That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the special symbol display device 61, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game state is shifted or maintained according to the result.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 44 during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is displayed. The variable display (holding ball) is held.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the held first special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be retained (so-called “reserved number (the number of retained balls)”) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 45 during the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) ) Is suspended.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbol to be held (the number of holdings) is defined as a maximum of four times (number). Therefore, in this embodiment, the total number of variable display of special symbols held is a maximum of eight in total.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the other special symbol. I do. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the special symbol may be changed and displayed in the reserved order.

[Normal symbol display device]
The normal symbol display device 62 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 62 is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

  The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) a normal symbol in a normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display device 62 includes a plurality of LEDs (ordinary symbol display LEDs). . Then, in the ordinary symbol display device 62, a display pattern formed by turning on / off each ordinary symbol display LED is represented as an ordinary symbol.

  The ordinary symbol display device 62 alternately turns on and off the two ordinary symbol display LEDs when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, and performs a variable display of the ordinary symbol. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs a change display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the ordinary symbol.

  In the normal symbol display device 62, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a predetermined mode ("hit" mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the stop-displayed normal symbol is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of “losing”), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

  In other words, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol is fluctuated and displayed by the ordinary symbol display device 62, then the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

  When the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the held ordinary symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the ordinary symbols to be retained (that is, the “reserved number”) is defined as a maximum of four times.

[Normal symbol hold display]
The normal symbol hold display device 63 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, as shown in FIG.

  The ordinary symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of held ordinary symbols in variable display, and the ordinary symbol hold display device 63 includes a plurality of ordinary symbol hold display LEDs. By illuminating / turning off each of the ordinary symbol holding display LEDs, the number of ordinary symbols held for variable display is displayed.

  Specifically, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays a normal symbol hold display LED in accordance with the number of variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hold display LED corresponds to the number of variable display of the normal symbol in variable display. Up to four lights.

[First Special Symbol Hold Display Device]
As shown in FIG. 5, the first special symbol holding display device 64 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The first special symbol holding display device 64 is a device that displays information relating to the variable display of the held first special symbol (holding ball of the first special symbol). In the present embodiment, the first special symbol holding display device 64 includes a plurality of first special symbol holding display LEDs.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold display device 64 displays the first special symbol hold display LED according to the number of variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold display LED is the first special symbol hold display LED. Up to four are lit according to the number of symbols on the variable display.

[Second special symbol hold display]
As shown in FIG. 5, the second special symbol hold display device 65 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The second special symbol holding display device 65 is a device that displays information related to the variable display of the held second special symbol (holding ball of the second special symbol). The second special symbol hold display LED is provided.

  Specifically, the second special symbol holding display device 65 displays a second special symbol holding display LED according to the number of variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol holding display LED is a second special symbol holding display LED. A maximum of four are lit according to the number of reserved special display symbols.

[Liquid crystal display]
The liquid crystal display device 13 is composed of liquid crystal as described above, and performs various effect displays in its display area 13a.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being fluctuated and displayed on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of effect identification symbols (decorations) including, for example, numbers 1 to 8 and various characters, except for a specific case. Symbol) is variably displayed in the display area 13a.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol (such as a liquid crystal symbol that will be described later) are also stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

  If the special symbol stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is "big hit"), the special symbol is displayed for the player to recognize that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 13a.

  As an effect for causing the player to recognize that it is a “big hit”, for example, first, a plurality of stop-displayed decorative symbols are arranged in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction). ), And thereafter, an effect of displaying an image notifying “big hit” is given.

  In the present embodiment, an effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol hold display device 64 and the second special symbol hold display device 65 is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. For example, in the display area 13a, hold information (for example, the same number of holding symbols as the number of holding symbols) for notifying the number of holding symbols for variable display of special symbols is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pre-reading effect is performed based on information on a special designating ball, and a notice at this time is also displayed in the display area 13a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 62 is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. A function for displaying may be further provided.

[Schematic configuration of payout unit]
Next, the payout unit 16 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a view showing the overall configuration of the payout unit 16 and is a view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the back. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a configuration of a winning ball case unit 170 as a payout device described later.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the payout unit 16 is supplied with a game ball from a storage unit (not shown) at the top of the gaming machine, and a ball tank 161 as a ball storage tank for storing the supplied game ball, and a ball tank. The ball tank lower passage 162 connected to the ball tank 161 so as to communicate with the ball 161 and the payout of game balls can be managed, such as paying out game balls to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22. And a prize ball case unit 170.

  Further, a board unit 17 in which various control boards including the payout control circuit 300 are incorporated is disposed below the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162 so as to be parallel to the prize ball case unit 170. .

  Here, the above-described storage unit (not shown) is, for example, a replenishing device serving as ancillary equipment of a hall (game hall) provided for supplying game balls to the ball tank 161 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the payout unit 16, the game balls supplied from the storage unit are guided to the prize ball case unit 170 through the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162, and are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the prize ball case unit 170 includes a first starting port 44, a second starting port 45, and a general winning port 51 as a plurality of winning ports provided in the above-described gaming area 12a (see FIG. 5). The game ball is paid out from the ball tank 161 to a payout passage 180 described below on condition that the game ball has won one of the general winning opening 52, the first winning opening 53, and the second winning opening 54. is there. The payout passage 180 is arranged at the lowermost part of the winning ball case unit 170.

  The prize ball case unit 170 includes a first ball supply passage 171A, a first 15-ball security switch 172A as supply detecting means, and a first sprocket 173A as moving means. Here, although the prize ball case unit 170 is omitted except for a part in FIG. 41, it is the same as the first ball supply passage 171A, the first 15 ball security switch 172A, and the first sprocket 173A described above. A second ball supply passage 171B, a second fifteen ball security switch 172B, and a second sprocket 173B as a moving means are arranged on the back side in the paper direction of FIG. 41 (the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1). I have.

  That is, the prize ball case unit 170 has a structure including two rows of the ball supply passage 171, the 15 ball security switch 172, and the sprocket 173.

  However, the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are arranged out of phase with each other by 60 °. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the first ball supply passage 171A and the second ball supply passage 171B are collectively referred to as “ball supply passage 171”, and the first 15 ball security switch 172A and the The two 15-ball security switches 172B are collectively referred to as “15-ball security switch 172”, and the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are generically referred to as “sprocket 173”.

  Also, the payout passage 180 is actually a two-row structure having a first payout passage 180A and a second payout passage 180B. However, in the following, the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B are collectively referred to as “payout passage 180” unless otherwise specified.

  The ball supply passage 171 communicates with the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162, and game balls are supplied from the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162. The ball supply passage 171 can store up to a specified number (15 in the present embodiment) of game balls supplied from the ball tank 161. It should be noted that, in practice, the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B have a two-row structure, so that a total of 30 game balls can be accumulated in these passages.

  The 15-ball security switch 172 detects a game ball replenished in the ball supply passage 171. Specifically, the 15-ball security switch 172 detects that the ball is supplied by detecting the ball detection shield plate 172a by the detection sensor 172b every time the ball is supplied (passes). I do.

  Therefore, when the number of the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 is insufficient, that is, less than 15, the ball detection shield plate 172a operates and moves out of the detection area of the detection sensor 172b, so that the ball supply passage 171 It is detected that the specified number (15 in the present embodiment) is not stored in.

  The 15-ball security switch 172 is kept ON while detecting that the game balls are being replenished. FIG. 41 shows a state in which the 15-ball security switch 172 detects the replenished game balls.

  The 15-ball security switch 172 is turned on while detecting that the game ball supplied to the ball supply passage 171 is passing over the 15-ball security switch 172. The "supply of the game ball" means that the 15-ball security switch 172 detects that the game ball passes through the ball supply passage 171 and that the game ball exists in the ball supply passage 171. This includes ensuring that a predetermined number of game balls exist in the ball supply passage 171 on the premise that game balls are connected.

  The sprocket 173 is connected to a payout motor 174 as a driving means constituted by a stepping motor, and rotates clockwise in the drawing according to the drive of the payout motor 174. The sprocket 173 receives the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 one by one, rotates by driving the payout motor 174 by a predetermined number of steps, and moves to the payout passage 180 one ball at a time, that is, pays out. It has become.

  In addition to the above, the sprocket 173 rotates when the payout motor 174 is driven by a predetermined number of steps, and as a result, the sprocket 173 rotates so that the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 can be received one by one. This may include a form depending on the rotation of the payout motor 174.

  In other words, it can be expressed that the sprocket 173 performs the rotation that can be accepted one ball at a time and pays out one ball at a time by the payout motor 174, and as a result of the predetermined rotation of the payout motor 174, the sprocket 173 turns one ball at a time. It can also be expressed that they accepted and paid out one ball at a time.

  The sprocket 173 is assumed to rotate, but is not limited to this. The sprocket 173 is formed in a plate shape, and is a sliding type that is movable or driven parallel to and perpendicular to the payout passage 180. The sprocket 173 may have any shape as long as the sprocket 173 receives a predetermined number of game balls at a time and can be paid out.

  The dispensing motor 174 uses a common motor for the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B. The sprocket 173 and the payout motor 174 in the present embodiment constitute game ball control means and payout means capable of moving game balls passing through the ball supply passage 171.

  Further, a first counting switch 181A and a second counting switch 181B are provided in the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B, respectively. However, in the following, the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B are collectively referred to as “counting switch 181” unless otherwise specified.

  The counting switch 181 detects the game balls paid out to the payout passage 180 by the sprocket 173. The counting switch 181 in the present embodiment constitutes a payout detecting unit.

  In addition, a ball ejection shutter 175 is provided near the uppermost portion of the ball supply passage 171. When the ball removing shutter 175 is rotated clockwise in the drawing, the ball supply passage 171 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the upper portion of the ball supply passage 171 are discharged through the ball removal passage 176. It has become. The ball release shutter 175 is normally locked, and is used, for example, when discharging game balls stored in the ball tank 161.

[Circuit configuration of pachinko machines]
Next, the configuration of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 70 for controlling a game operation, a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling a staging operation in accordance with the progress of the game, and And a payout control circuit 300 that controls payout.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 71, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 73. The main control circuit 70 includes a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, and a serial communication IC (Integrated Circuit) 76. As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery process of the special symbol is performed at the time of winning the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45, but this process is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as a means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

  The main CPU 71 is connected to a main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, a reset clock pulse generating circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, a serial communication IC 76, and the like. The main ROM 72 stores various programs (see FIGS. 72 to 84) for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables (see FIGS. 56 to 62), and the like. The main ROM 72 may store all of various data tables (see FIGS. 56 to 71).

  The main CPU 71 executes various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 acts as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values required for the main CPU 71 for various processes.

  In the present embodiment, the main RAM 73 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written can be used as the temporary storage area. Good.

  The reset clock pulse generation circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when power is turned on. Then, the serial communication IC 76 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, various devices that operate according to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

  Specifically, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are connected to the main control circuit 70. Is done.

  Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on an output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 controls the operation of variably displaying the special symbol in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Do.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 is connected to a normal electric accessory solenoid 46a, a first winning port solenoid 53b, and a second winning port solenoid 54b. Then, the main control circuit 70 controls the drive of the ordinary electric accessory 46a to bring the pair of blade members of the ordinary electric accessory 46 into an open state or a closed state.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 controls the driving of the first special winning opening solenoid 53b and the second special winning opening solenoid 54b, respectively, to bring the first special winning opening 53 and the second special winning opening 54 into an open state or a closed state. I do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various sensors and receives output signals from the various sensors. Specifically, the main control circuit 70 includes a count sensor 53c, 54c, a general winning ball sensor 51a, 52a, a passing ball sensor 43a, a first starting opening winning ball sensor 44a, a second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a, and a backup. The clear switch 121, the gold door sensor 446A, the silver door sensor 446B, and the like are connected.

  The count sensor 53c counts the game balls that have won the first special winning opening 53, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count sensor 54c counts the game balls that have won the second special winning opening 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70.

  The general winning ball sensor 51a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 51, and the general winning ball sensor 52a receives a game ball in the general winning opening 52. In this case, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70.

  The passing ball sensor 43a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes the ball passing detector 43. The first starting port winning ball sensor 44a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball has won the first starting port 44.

  The second starting port winning ball sensor 45a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball has won the second starting port 45. Further, the backup clear switch 121 outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 when the backup data is cleared in response to an operation of a game arcade manager or the like at the time of a power failure or the like. .

  Although not shown in FIG. 41, the main control circuit 70 is connected to an external terminal board and a calling device. The external terminal board is used to transmit data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in a hall (game store). The calling device has a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of hits.

  The gold door sensor 446A and the silver door sensor 446B detect that the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423, and the left silver door 424 are located at open positions outside the game area 13a, and the main CPU 71. Output a detection signal.

  Further, a payout control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 70. Here, the main control circuit 70 determines the number of prize balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out via the prize ball case unit 170 described later, on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied.

  The main control circuit 70 for determining the number of prize balls constitutes a payout amount determination unit. The predetermined payout condition is that the game ball has won the various starting ports and the various winning ports described above.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 transmits information including the number of winning balls determined as described above to the payout control circuit 300 as a winning ball control command. Therefore, the main control circuit 70 constitutes a signal transmission unit.

[Payout control circuit]
The payout control circuit 300 includes a payout CPU 301, a ROM 302, and a RAM 303. The ROM 302 stores, for example, various programs (see FIGS. 103 to 110) for controlling the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball case unit 170.

  The payout CPU 301 executes various processes according to a program stored in the ROM 302. The RAM 303 acts as a temporary storage area when the payout CPU 301 executes various processes, and stores values of various flags and variables required by the payout CPU 301 for various processes.

  In the present embodiment, the RAM 303 is used as a temporary storage area of the payout CPU 301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used as the temporary storage area. .

  The payout control circuit 300 is connected to a prize ball case unit 170 for paying out game balls. Specifically, the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B, the payout motor 174, and the first and second count switches 181A and 181B are connected to the payout control circuit 300.

  The first and second fifteen-ball security switches 172A and 172B detect game balls replenished in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B, and output a predetermined output signal indicating the result. Output to 300.

  The payout motor 174 is driven according to a control signal from the payout CPU 301. The first and second counting switches 181A, 181B detect game balls paid out to the first and second payout passages 180A, 180B by the first and second sprockets 173A, 173B, respectively, and show the results. A predetermined output signal is output to the payout control circuit 300.

  Further, to the payout control circuit 300, a payout state notification display device 178 and a lower plate full switch 179 are connected. As will be described in detail later, the payout state notification display device 178 is a display device for notifying the type of the abnormality when an abnormality has occurred with respect to the payout of game balls, and constitutes a notification unit.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the payout state notification display device 178 is formed of a 7-segment display, and is provided at a predetermined position on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, so that only the manager of the hall can visually recognize it.

  The lower plate full switch 179 detects when the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 are full, and outputs the result to the payout control circuit 300. When a signal indicating that the lower plate is full is input from the lower plate full switch 179, the payout control circuit 300 performs notification through the payout state notification display device 178 and sends the lower control signal to the main control circuit 70. A signal indicating that the tank is full is output.

  As a result, the main control circuit 70 transmits the effect control command to the sub control circuit 200, and the lower plate 22 is in the full state through the speaker 11, the lamp 18, the LED and the liquid crystal display device 13 by the sub control circuit 200. Notify.

  Further, to the payout control circuit 300, a launching device 15 for launching a game ball, an external terminal plate 140, and a card unit 150 are connected. A data display 141 is connected to the external terminal plate 140, and a lending operation unit 151 is connected to the card unit 150.

  Here, the card unit 150 determines the number of loaned balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out via the request case unit 170 described below, on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The card unit 150 that determines the number of balls to be loaned constitutes a payout amount determination unit. The predetermined payout condition is that the above-described lending operation unit 151 has been operated.

  The payout control circuit 300 supplies electric power to the solenoid actuator of the firing device 15 according to the rotation angle when the firing handle 25 is gripped by the player and rotated clockwise. Thereby, the launching device 15 controls to launch the game ball.

  The external terminal board 140 is used to transmit data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in a hall (game hall). The data display 141 is installed, for example, as an accessory to a hall above the pachinko gaming machine 1 and has a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of hits.

  When operated by the player, the lending operation section 151 outputs a signal requesting lending of the game ball to the card unit 150. When the card unit 150 receives a signal requesting lending of game balls from the lending operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits a lending ball control signal including information on the determined number of lending balls to the payout control circuit 300. Therefore, the card unit 150 constitutes a signal transmission unit.

  The payout control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and the lending ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 150, and transmits a predetermined signal to the prize ball case unit 170.

  Thereby, the prize ball case unit 170 pays out game balls. The payout control circuit 300 that receives the prize ball control command and the loan ball control signal as described above constitutes a signal receiving unit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the payout CPU 301 has first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B, and first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B. The first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B and the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B are provided as functions of the payout CPU 301.

  The first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B start from the initial value (“1950 times” in the present embodiment) set in the secured ball monitoring initial setting process (see S409 and S412 in FIG. 103) described later. While the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B detect a game ball, the counter is decremented by “1” every time a predetermined time (“1 ms” in the present embodiment) elapses. .

  In the present embodiment, a counter for counting down is used as the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B, but a counter for counting up may be used.

  Therefore, the payout CPU 301 requires the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B to start paying out game balls and the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B to detect game balls. The initial value (“1950 times” in the present embodiment) is changed every time a predetermined time (“1 ms” in the present embodiment) elapses, that is, every time a system timer interrupt process (to be described later, see FIG. 105) is performed. Is decremented by 1, ie, updated.

  The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a second update unit. The value updated by the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B can be set to a value in a narrower range than the value updated by first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B described later. At the same time, it corresponds to the time during which the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B are detecting game balls, and constitutes a second value.

  The first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B respectively determine the initial value (“2000 ms” in the present embodiment) set in the secured ball monitoring initial setting process (see S409 and S412 in FIG. 103) described later. The timer is decremented by “1” every time a predetermined time (“1 ms” in the present embodiment) elapses. In the present embodiment, a timer for counting down is used as the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B, but a timer for counting up may be used.

  Accordingly, the payout CPU 301 sets the initial value (“2000 ms” in the present embodiment) to a predetermined time (in the present embodiment) on the condition that the payout of the game balls is started by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B. Each time "1 ms") elapses, that is, every time a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105) described later is performed, "1" is subtracted, that is, updated.

  Here, the initial value (“2000 ms” in the present embodiment) set in the above-described first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B is a time at which it is assumed that the security of 15 game balls is completed. That is, the time is set to a time sufficient to pay out a predetermined number (15 in the present embodiment) of game balls from the ball tank 161. The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a first update unit. The value updated by the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B constitutes a first value.

[Sub-control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the serial communication IC 76 of the main control circuit 70. Then, the sub-control circuit 200 performs display control on the liquid crystal display device 13, control regarding sound generated from the speaker 11, control of the lamp 18, and the like in accordance with various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

  That is, the sub-control circuit 200 executes various effects according to the progress of the game based on the command from the main control circuit 70. In the present embodiment, the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal transmission from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70 is performed. Possible configurations may be provided.

  The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, a sound control circuit 206, a lamp control circuit 207, and a motor control circuit 60, as shown in FIG. . The sub CPU 201 is connected to a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, an audio control circuit 206, a lamp control circuit 207, and a motor control circuit 60.

  The program ROM 202 stores various programs (see FIGS. 85 to 95) for controlling the staging operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, and various data tables (see FIGS. 63 to 71). The sub CPU 201 executes various processes according to a program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 72 and the program ROM 202 are applied as storage means for storing programs and various tables, but the present invention is not limited to this. As such a storage unit, a storage medium of another mode may be used as long as it is a storage medium readable by a computer having a control unit. For example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, and the like May be applied.

  Further, each of the programs may be recorded on a separate storage medium. Further, the program may be recorded in a recording medium in advance, or may be downloaded from the outside after power-on, and may be recorded in the main RAM 73, the work RAM 203, or the like.

  The work RAM 203 acts as a temporary storage area when the sub CPU 201 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values required for the sub CPU 201 for various processes. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used as the temporary storage area. .

  The display control circuit 205 performs control to display an image related to the effect on the liquid crystal display device 13. Although not shown, the display control circuit 205 includes an image data processor (hereinafter, referred to as a VDP (Video Display Processor)), an image data ROM, a frame buffer, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter, and the like.

  The image data ROM stores data for generating various types of image data. The frame buffer temporarily stores image data. The D / A converter converts image data (digital electric signal) into an image signal (analog electric signal).

  The display control circuit 205 performs various processes for displaying an image on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the display control circuit 205 temporarily stores image data such as decorative design image data, decorative image data, background image data, and performance image data representing a decorative design (design effect design) based on an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. And store it in the frame buffer.

  Then, the display control circuit 205 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal, and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The audio control circuit 206 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier for amplifying an audio signal (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 11. The sound source IC selects one audio data from a plurality of audio data stored in the audio data ROM based on an audio generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  Then, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the read audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies it to the AMP. Further, the AMP amplifies the audio signal and generates a sound from the speaker 11.

  The lamp control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a lamp data ROM storing a plurality of types of lamp lighting patterns, and the like. The drive circuit selects one lamp lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the lamp data ROM based on a lamp lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  Thereby, an effect display including an effect display of the lightning role 80, the logo role 210, and the door role 210 is performed.

  The motor control circuit 60 drives the motors 60A to 60F based on data supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  Then, the selected lamp lighting pattern is read from the lamp data ROM, the read audio data is converted into a predetermined lamp control signal, and the lamp 18 including the LEDs 59a to 59m and 59p, 59q is turned on and off.

<Game flow>
Next, the contents of a game flow in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flow of the effect mode mainly controlled by the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

  Further, FIG. 42 also shows a gaming state controlled (managed) by the main CPU 71 (main control circuit 70) as appropriate during the flow of the effect mode.

  FIG. 43 is an effect mode transition table in which the contents of the effect mode transition types [1] to [5] (transition mode at the end of the big hit game) are summarized.

  The effect mode transition table in FIG. 43 includes the type (type) of “big hit” defined for each game state of the effect mode before transition, the effect mode transition types [1] to [5], and the liquid crystal indicating the same. It is a table which shows the relationship with a pattern matching eye. In addition, the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43 also shows the winning probability, the number of round games to be awarded, and the number of time-saving games (number of time savings) that can be performed at the transition destination for each type of “big hit”.

  In addition, the "liquid crystal pattern matching eyes" referred to in the present specification is a mode in which decorative patterns composed of three numbers and / or characters are displayed in the display area 13a.

  In addition, here, a liquid crystal pattern alignment where the three numbers and / or characters do not have regularity (even number alignment, odd number alignment, same number (character) alignment, etc.) is referred to as “disordered”.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the effect modes managed and controlled by the sub CPU 201 are “normal mode”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”, and “mode D”. There are five types.

  In each effect mode, the game state controlled (managed) by the main CPU 71 (main control circuit 70) also changes.

[Type of gaming state]
First, before describing the contents of the various effect modes controlled by the sub CPU 201, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 are “big hit game state” (special game state) and “small hit game state” (special game state) in which the degree of expectation of prize balls differs from each other. ).

  The “big hit gaming state” is a game in which a round game in which the shutter opening period (that is, one round period) of the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54 is long (30 seconds in the present embodiment) occurs. State, in which a large prize ball can be expected for the player. That is, in the "big hit gaming state", the repeated state of the open state and the closed state of the shutter of the special winning opening is in a state more advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, the “small hit gaming state” is a gaming state in which a round game occurs in a shorter round (1.8 seconds in the present embodiment) than the “big hit gaming state”, and a large prize for the player. It is a game state where the ball cannot be expected. That is, in the "small hitting game state", the repeated state of the open state and the closed state of the shutter of the big winning port is disadvantageous for the player.

  In the present embodiment, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 are “probable changing gaming state” (high-probability gaming state) and “normal gaming state” (high-probability gaming state) having different winning probabilities of “big hit”. Low probability gaming state).

  The “probable change game state” is a game state in which the winning probability of “big hit” (1 / 131.86 in the present embodiment) is high. On the other hand, the “normal gaming state” is a gaming state in which the winning probability of “big hit” (1 / 392.43 in the present embodiment) is lower than the “probable changing gaming state”.

  In the present embodiment, after the “big hit game” ends, the “probable change game state” always starts. The “probable change game state” is maintained until the predetermined number of lotteries (variable display of special symbols) is performed up to 200 times after the “big hit game” ends.

  On the other hand, when the "small hit game" ends, the game state does not basically shift, and the game state at the time of the "small hit" win is maintained. In other words, if the gaming state at the time of the "small hit" win is the "probable change game state", the game state is maintained at the "probable change game state" even after the "small hit game" ends, and the game at the time of the "small hit" win If the state is the “normal gaming state”, the “normal gaming state” is maintained as the gaming state even after the “small hitting game” ends.

  However, in the present embodiment, for example, when the "small hit" is won in the last change display (for example, the 200th change display described later) of the "probable change game state" (or the "time saving game state"), In the fluctuation display, the game state is shifted from the “probable change game state” to the “normal game state” (or from the “time reduction game state” to the “non-time reduction game state”). That is, in such a case, as an exception, the game state shifts before and after the “small hit game”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a type of the game state controlled and managed by the main CPU 71, a normal symbol winning probability (a probability that the normal symbol is in a “hit” state) is different from each other in a “time reduction gaming state” ( High winning prize gaming state) and "non-time saving gaming state" (low winning prize gaming state).

  The "time-saving gaming state" in this specification is a gaming state in which the winning probability of a normal symbol is high. That is, the “time-saving gaming state” is a gaming state in which the ordinary electric accessory 46 (blade member) provided in the second starting port 45 is likely to be in an open state (a gaming state in which a second starting port winning is likely to occur). , A game state that is advantageous for the player. The "time saving game state" ends when "big hit" is determined or when a special symbol variation display for a predetermined number of time savings described later is executed.

  On the other hand, the “non-time-saving (no time-saving) gaming state” is a gaming state in which the winning probability of a normal symbol is lower than the “time-saving gaming state”. Therefore, the “non-time-saving gaming state” is a gaming state in which the ordinary electric accessory 46 (blade member) is unlikely to be in an open state (a gaming state in which it is difficult for the second starting opening prize to occur), and is a disadvantageous game for the player State.

  Then, in the present embodiment, combinations of the above-described game states other than the “big hit game state” and the “small hit game state” change according to the effect mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a game state in which the “probable change game state” and the “time reduction game state” occur simultaneously according to the effect mode (the state of “high probability time reduction” in FIG. 60) is set. Provided.

  In addition, a game state in which a “probable change game state” and a “non-time saving game state” occur simultaneously according to the effect mode (a state of “no high probability time saving” in FIG. 60) is provided. Further, in accordance with the effect mode, there is provided a game state in which a “non-time saving game state” and a “normal game state” occur simultaneously (a state of “no low probability time saving” in FIG. 60).

  In the present embodiment, a game state in which the “normal game state” and the “time reduction game state” occur at the same time (a state with “low probability time reduction”) is not provided. In the gaming state in which the “probable change game state” and the “non-time saving game state” occur simultaneously (the state of “no high probability time saving”), the player determines whether or not the game state is the “probable change game state”. Because it is difficult to determine, here, such a game state is also referred to as a “latent game state”.

  The transition operation between the various game states described above is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also functions as means for controlling the transition operation between the various game states (the first game state control means, the second game state control means, and the third game state control means).

[Normal mode]
The normal mode is an effect mode set at the start of the game, for example.
In the normal mode, the game state controlled by the main CPU 71 is, as shown in FIG. 42, “low probability time saving no” (“normal game state” and “non-time saving gaming state” state) or “high probability time saving no time reduction”. ("Probable change game state" and "non-time saving game state").

  When the "big hit" is won in the normal mode, the big hit game is executed as shown in FIG. 42, and after the big hit game ends, the effect mode shifts to any one of mode A, mode B, mode C and mode D. .

  At this time, the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit and the type of the "big hit" ("hit 1" to "hit 17" and "hit 17" of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43). The effect mode of the transition destination is different according to one of the two special symbols (“hit 1”).

  Further, in the normal mode, when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is “no high probability time saving”, as shown in FIG. 43, the effect mode does not shift to the mode A (the effect mode of the effect mode of the shift type [4]). No migration occurs).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode, the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is “low probability time saving no” and the type of the “big hit” is “hit 15” to “hit” 17 ”, that is, in the normal mode,“ variable eyes ”corresponding to the transition type [4] as the liquid crystal pattern matching eyes (“ Low probability no time saving ”column in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43) Is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13, the effect mode shifts to mode A after the end of the big hit game.

  Further, for example, in the normal mode, when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is “no low probability time saving” and the type of the “big hit” is any one of “hit 8” to “hit 14” in the special map 1, Alternatively, when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is “no high probability time saving” and the type of the “big hit” is “hit 14” in FIG. 1, that is, in the normal mode, the transition type [ 3] is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13 (see "Even when there is no low probability time saving" and "when there is no high probability time saving" in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43). At the end of the big hit game, the effect mode shifts to mode B.

  Also, for example, in the normal mode, when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is “no low probability time saving” and the type of the “big hit” is any one of “hit 3” to “hit 7” in Toku-zu, Alternatively, the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is "no high probability time saving" and the type of the "big hit" is any one of "hit 3" to "hit 7" and "hit 9" to "hit 13" in Toku-zu 1 That is, in the normal mode, in the normal mode, "odd alignment" or "even alignment" corresponding to the transition type [2] as the liquid crystal symbol alignment ("low probability without time saving" in the effect mode transition table in FIG. 43) When “High probability no working hours” column is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13, after the big hit game ends, the effect mode shifts to mode C.

  Further, for example, in the normal mode, when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is "no low probability time saving" and the type of the "big hit" is "hit 1" or "hit 2" in Tokujin 1 If the gaming state of "Big hit" is "low probability" and the type of "big hit" is "hit 1" in Tokujin 2, the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is "high probability no time saving" and "big hit" Is one of "Hit 1", "Hit 2", "Hit 8", and "Hit 15" to "Hit 17" in the special map 1, or the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is "high probability". "No time saving" and the type of "big hit" is "hit 1" in Tokujin 2, that is, in the normal mode, "variable eyes" and "VVV" corresponding to the transition type [1] as the liquid crystal pattern matching eyes. Alignment, Odd Alignment, Even Alignment, or 777 Alignment Is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13 (see the column “When there is no low probability time saving” and “when there is no high probability time saving” in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43), after the big hit game is over, The effect mode shifts to mode D.

  In the present embodiment, the game state always transitions to the “probably changed game state” after the end of the big hit game.

  Therefore, when the effect mode shifts from the normal mode to any one of the mode A, the mode B, the mode C, and the mode D via the big hit game, regardless of the gaming state of the normal mode when the big hit is won, the shift is performed. The gaming state in the previous production mode is “probable changing gaming state”, and the “probable changing gaming state” is maintained after the “big hit game” is completed until a predetermined number of lotteries up to 200 times are performed. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 42, in the normal mode, if the “small hit” is won, and then the small hit game is consumed, the effect mode shifts to the mode A. In this case, the transition mode is a mode in which the effect mode shifts to mode A immediately after the end of the small hitting game (a mode in which the mode directly shifts from the small hitting game state), or the normal mode is returned to the normal mode again after the small hitting game ends, and the predetermined mode is set. There is a mode in which the effect mode shifts to mode A after the special symbol of the number is displayed in a variable manner (a mode in which the mode is indirectly shifted from the small hitting game state).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the game state does not shift before and after the start of the small hit game. Therefore, at the time of the small hit winning, the gaming state does not shift regardless of the mode of shifting to the mode A. That is, when transitioning from the normal mode to the mode A via the small hitting game state, if the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning in the normal mode is “no low probability time saving”, even in the mode A after the transition, “ The game state of "no low probability working hours" is continued. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning in the normal mode is “no high probability time saving”, the gaming state of “no high probability time saving” is continued even in mode A after the transition.

  In the present embodiment, when the small hits are won, the liquid crystal symbol alignment displayed on the display area 13a of the display device 13 is referred to as “barrage eyes”, and the liquid crystal symbol alignment displayed at the time of the small hit election is set at the time of the big hit election. It is set so as not to be distinguished from the displayed liquid crystal symbol.

  In particular, by making it impossible to distinguish between "small hits" and "big hits" at the time of "high probability no time savings", when "small hits" are won in the "normal gaming state", "low probability no time savings" The game state of "" has been maintained, or the game state has shifted to "no high probability time saving", so that the player cannot distinguish at a glance. As a result, in the present embodiment, the playability can be further improved.

  Also, in the normal mode, the special symbol is fluctuated 200 times during the game state of “no high probability time saving”, but the “big hit” is not won (when the “probable change game state” ends). , The effect mode does not shift, but the gaming state shifts from “no high probability time saving” to “low probability no time saving”.

[Mode A]
In the mode A, the game state controlled by the main CPU 71 is “low probability no time saving” (“normal game state” and “non-time saving game state”) or “high probability no time saving” (“probable changing game state”). And "non-time saving game state"). When the effect mode shifts from the normal mode to the mode A via the small hit game, the game state of the mode A is the game state of the normal mode (“no low probability time saving” or “no high probability time saving”). To be continued. Further, when the effect mode shifts to the mode A via the big hit game, the game state of the mode A is “no high probability time saving”.

  In the mode A game, an end lottery of the mode A (a drop lottery to the normal mode) and a promotion lottery to the mode B are performed. These lotteries may be performed each time a special symbol is changed and displayed, or may be performed each time a predetermined number (two or more) of special symbols are changed and displayed. The promotion lottery to the mode B is performed only when the game state of the mode A is “no high probability time saving”.

  When the "big hit" is won in the mode A, the big hit game is executed as shown in FIG. 42, and after the big hit game, the effect mode is shifted to any one of the mode A, the mode B, the mode C, and the mode D. .

  At this time, the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit and the type of the "big hit" ("hit 1" to "hit 17" and "hit 17" of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43). The effect mode of the transition destination is different depending on the “Special 1” of the two special symbols, and the transition mode is the transition mode to the mode A, the mode B, the mode C, or the mode D in the above-described normal mode ( This is the same as the transfer types [1] to [4]).

  Note that, in the mode A, when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is “no high probability time saving”, as shown in FIG. 43, the effect mode does not shift to the mode A (the effect mode of the effect mode of the shift type [4]). No migration occurs). That is, in the mode A, when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is "no high probability time saving", after the big hit game is over, the mode A is not continued, and the production mode is the mode B, the mode C and the mode D. Move to one.

  Further, in the mode A, when the gaming state is “no high probability time saving” and the promotion lottery to the mode B is won, the effect mode shifts to the mode B as shown in FIG.

  In addition, in the mode A, the effect mode shifts to the mode B also when the change display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times. The predetermined number of times of the special symbol change display, which is a transition condition at this time, is selected from a range of 0 to 199 times by lottery. In addition, in the lottery processing of the predetermined number of times of the special symbol change display as the transition condition, for example, a case where the number of times exceeding 200 is selected as the predetermined number is set. There may be a case where the process does not shift to.

  Further, in the mode A, when the gaming state is “no high probability time saving” and the special symbol change display (ST: Special Time) is performed 200 times but the “big hit” is not won (ST200 times) At the end), the effect mode shifts to the normal mode as shown in FIG.

  In addition, in the mode A, even when the lottery in the mode A is won regardless of the gaming state, the effect mode is shifted to the normal mode. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the game state of mode A is “no high probability time saving”, if the end lottery of mode A is won, the effect mode is shifted to the normal mode.

[Mode B]
In the mode B, the game state controlled by the main CPU 71 is “no high probability time saving” (“probable change game state” and “non-time saving game state”). That is, the game state in the mode B is "the latent game state". In addition, also in the mode B, the “probable change game state” is maintained after the “big hit game” ends, until a predetermined number of lotteries up to 200 times are performed.

  When the "big hit" is won in the mode B, a big hit game is executed as shown in FIG. 42, and after the big hit game, the effect mode is shifted to any one of the mode B, the mode C and the mode D. At this time, the transition destination of the effect mode is different depending on the type of “big hit”.

  For example, in mode B ("no high probability working hours"), if the type of "big hit" is "hit 14" in Tokujin 1, that is, in mode B, it corresponds to the transition type [3] as a liquid crystal symbol alignment When the “even numbered match” (see the “high probability time saving no” column in the effect mode transition table in FIG. 43) is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13, after the big hit game ends, the effect mode is set to the mode. B (mode B is continued).

  Further, for example, in mode B, when the type of “big hit” is any one of “hit 3” to “hit 7” and “hit 9” to “hit 13” in FIG. 1, ie, in mode B, As the liquid crystal pattern alignment, “odd alignment” or “even alignment” corresponding to the transition type [2] (see the “high probability time saving no” column in the effect mode transition table in FIG. 43) is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13. Is displayed, the effect mode shifts to mode C after the end of the big hit game.

  Further, for example, in the mode B, when the type of the “big hit” is any one of “hit 1”, “hit 2”, “hit 8”, and “hit 15” to “hit 17” of Toku-zu, or , The type of “big hit” is “hit 1” in Tokuju 2, that is, in mode B, “variable eye”, “VVV uniform”, “odd number” corresponding to the transition type [1] as the liquid crystal symbol uniformity If "all", "even" or "777" (see the "High probability no working hours" column in the effect mode transition table in FIG. 43) is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13, the big hit game After the end, the effect mode shifts to mode D.

  In addition, in the mode B, the special symbol change display is performed 200 times, but when the “big hit” is not won, that is, when the “probable change game state” (high probability state) ends, FIG. As shown in the figure, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.

[Mode C]
In the mode C, the game state controlled by the main CPU 71 is a “probable change game state”. Therefore, even in the mode C, the “probable change game state” is maintained after the “big hit game” is completed until a predetermined number of lotteries up to 200 times are performed.

  Further, in the mode C, the time-saving game is performed in a range of 40 to 200 times depending on the type of the “big hit” that has triggered the transition to the mode C (see FIG. 43). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, when the effect mode shifts to mode C, the shift type is type [2]. In this case, the number of times saved depends on the type of “big hit”. Therefore, it becomes one of “40”, “60”, “80”, “100”, and “200” (see the effect mode transition table in FIG. 43). That is, in the mode C, depending on the type of the “big hit”, the gaming state is “with a high probability of reduced working hours” (the “probable changing gaming state” and the “time saving gaming state”) in the range of 40 to 200 times. Become.

  In the mode C, if the selected predetermined number of time savings is less than 200 times, when the game of the mode C is started, first, the game is performed in the game state of “high probability time savings” for the predetermined number of time savings. Will be

  Then, when the game for the selected predetermined number of time savings ends, that is, when the “time saving game state” ends, the gaming state is “no high probability time saving” (“probable change game state” and “non-time saving game state”). State). In this case, the gaming state is substantially the same as the gaming state in mode B. Therefore, when the “time reduction gaming state” ends in mode C, the effect mode shifts to mode B as shown in FIG. In this case, in the mode B of the transition destination, a game is performed for the number of times of the change of the special symbol remaining in the mode C (200-time saving number).

  Further, in the mode C, if the number of times that the time saving game can be performed is 200 and the special symbol change display is performed 200 times but the “big hit” is not won, the “probable changing game state” And the "time reduction game state" are ended at the same time. In this case, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode as shown in FIG.

  In addition, when the "big hit" is won in the mode C, the effect mode shifts to the mode D after the end of the big hit game, as indicated by the shift type [5] in FIG. In the transition type [5], 200 time savings are set at the end of the big hit game irrespective of the type of the “big hit” (see the “high probability time saving” column in the effect mode transition table in FIG. 43). ). Further, when the effect mode shifts to the mode D in the transition mode of the transition type [5], the type of the liquid crystal pattern matching displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13 changes according to the type of the “big hit”. .

  Further, when the number of times of saving time is 200 times based on the “big hit” type which is a trigger for shifting to the mode C, the promotion lottery to the mode D is performed in the game of the mode C. Then, when the promotion lottery to the mode D is won, the effect mode shifts to the mode D as shown in FIG. In this case, in the mode D of the transition destination, the game corresponding to the number of times of the change of the special symbol remaining in the mode C (200-the number of time saving games consumed at the time of the promotion lottery) is performed in the gaming state of "high probability time saving".

[Mode D]
In the mode D, the game state controlled by the main CPU 71 is “there is a high probability reduction in time” (the “variable probability game state” and the “time reduction game state”). Then, when the production mode shifts to the mode D via the “big hit game”, in the mode D, both the “probable change game state” and the “time saving game state” are performed after the “big hit game” ends. It is maintained until a predetermined number of lotteries (special symbol change display) up to 200 times are performed.

  In the mode D, when the "big hit" is won, the mode D is continued after the end of the big hit game, as indicated by the transition type [5] in FIG. At this time, at the end of the big hit game, the number of times of lottery (the number of times of the change of the special symbol) is set again 200, and the number of times of saving 200 times is also set.

  Then, in the mode D, the special symbol change display (ST) is performed 200 times, but when the "big hit" is not won, that is, when the "probable change game state" is ended, the state is shown in FIG. Thus, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.

  In addition, in the transition mode at the time of the jackpot winning in each of the effect modes of the present embodiment, as described above, the transition of the effect mode is performed after the end of the jackpot game, but at this time, for example, at the start of the jackpot game, during the jackpot game Alternatively, at the end of the big hit game, the display device 13 or the like may notify that the effect mode is shifted. In this case, the type of the effect mode of the transition destination may be notified.

<Production operation in each production mode>
Next, an outline of various effect operations performed using the display device 13 under the control of the sub CPU 71 in each effect mode will be described. It should be noted that more specific processing contents of various effect operations will be described later with reference to various flowcharts described later.

[Normal pseudo continuous production: Common for each production mode]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a function of a pseudo continuous speed variation display effect that makes it appear as if the variation display of the special symbol is repeated a plurality of times during one variation display period of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, when a prefetch effect described later is not performed, a general pseudo continuous speed fluctuation display effect (hereinafter, referred to as a “normal pseudo continuous effect”) as in the related art, regardless of the type of the effect mode. I do.

  In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the ordinary pseudo continuous effect is determined by lottery based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol with reference to a fluctuation effect pattern table when there is no look-ahead effect described later (see FIG. 64 described later). It is determined. Whether or not to execute the normal pseudo continuous production is controlled by the value of the pseudo continuous production flag defined in a variable production table (no pre-reading) shown in FIG. 64 to be described later, and the value of the pseudo continuous production flag is “1”. In the case of, the ordinary pseudo continuous production is executed.

  FIG. 44 shows an operation example of a normal pseudo-sequence effect performed in the present embodiment. In the normal pseudo-sequence production of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, a liquid crystal pattern pattern consisting of three decorative patterns (numerals and / or characters) displayed in the display area 13 a of the display device 13 is provided. It is displayed fluctuating. In addition, the effect pattern of the ordinary pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 44 is an effect pattern such as the effect pattern “EN02” defined by a variable effect table (no pre-reading) shown in FIG.

  In the normal pseudo-sequence effect (effect pattern “EN02” or the like) shown in FIG. 44, first, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, it is stopped and displayed on the display area 13a of the display device 13 before the variation display starts. The aligned liquid crystal pattern (“234”) fluctuates. Next, in the display area 13a of the display device 13, after the liquid crystal pattern alignment changes for a predetermined period, the liquid crystal pattern alignment ("117") temporarily stops.

  In the temporary stop display in which the liquid crystal symbols are aligned, each symbol does not completely stop and is in a state of swinging along the direction of change. Then, after the temporary stop, the liquid crystal pattern alignment changes again, and after the remaining period of one special symbol change display period has elapsed (at the end of the special symbol change), the predetermined liquid crystal pattern alignment (“147”). )) Completely stops (actual stop display).

  In the normal pseudo continuous production shown in FIG. 44, as described above, the temporary stop display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment is performed once in one special symbol variation display period (variation time of the special symbol variation pattern). In the present specification, the number of times of temporary stop display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment performed in one special symbol variable display period (the number of repetitions of the variable display and temporary stop display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment) is referred to as “the number of pseudo consecutive runs”. . Therefore, the number of times of the pseudo consecutive stagings shown in FIG. 44 is one.

  Further, in this specification, the effect from the start of the fluctuation of the liquid crystal pattern alignment to the temporary stop display (hereinafter, also referred to as a sub-effect) is referred to as “pseudo continuous effect”, and after the temporary stop display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment, The sub-effect produced during the period up to the stop display is referred to as “reach effect”. Therefore, for example, the normal pseudo continuous production shown in FIG. 44 is a production made up of one “pseudo continuous production” and “reach production”.

  In the present embodiment, the effect period of various effects performed in one special symbol change display period is the change time (1) of the corresponding special symbol change pattern regardless of the type and content (pattern) of the effect. (Variable display period of special symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production period may be different from the fluctuation time of the corresponding special pattern fluctuation pattern (a period shorter than the fluctuation time) according to the content (pattern) of the production.

[Stock Simultaneous Production: Production in Normal Mode]
In the present embodiment, a special effect stage is provided in the normal mode. Then, in the special effect stage, a pseudo continuous change display effect called “stock pseudo continuous effect” is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the stock pseudo continuous effect is determined by lottery based on the change pattern of the special symbol, with reference to a variable effect pattern table for a special effect stage described later (see FIG. 69 described later). Is done. Whether or not to execute the stock pseudo continuous production is controlled by the value of a stock pseudo continuous production flag defined in a variable production table (special production stage) shown in FIG. If it is "1", a stock pseudo continuous effect is executed.

(1) Structure of stock pseudo continuous production The stock pseudo continuous production is performed before a predetermined number of “pseudo continuous production”, “reach production” performed after “pseudo continuous production”, and before “pseudo continuous production”. It consists of "stock production" (simultaneous production production).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 45a and FIG. 45b, the flow of the stock pseudo continuous production will be described more specifically. 45a and 45b are diagrams for further clarifying the difference between the above-described normal pseudo continuous production and the stock pseudo continuous production, and FIG. 45 shows the operation flow of the above normal pseudo continuous production described above. FIG. 45b shows an operation flow of the stock pseudo continuous production.

  Note that the “reach effect” performed in the normal pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 45a is the same as the “reach effect” performed in the stock pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 45b, and therefore, in FIG. 45a and FIG. The operation flow of the sub-effects up to the start of the "reach effect" is shown.

  The normal pseudo continuous production shown in FIG. 45A is an example of a normal pseudo continuous production corresponding to the production pattern “EN54” defined in a variable production table (without prefetching) shown in FIG. Specifically, in the normal pseudo continuous production shown in FIG. 45a, the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol is 45000 milliseconds, the number of pseudo repetitions is three, and the liquid crystal symbol alignment is 3 times. During the period (12000 milliseconds) from the first temporary stop (33,000 milliseconds after the start of the change) to the stop of the change (12000 milliseconds), a “reach effect” called “special effect D” is performed.

  During the period from the start of the change to 33000 milliseconds, the same operation as the change display and the temporary stop display of the liquid crystal pattern alignment described in FIG. 44 is repeated three times, and the first, second, and third operations are repeated. The first “simulated continuous production” is performed in periods of 10,000 milliseconds, 11000 milliseconds, and 12000 milliseconds, respectively.

  The stock pseudo continuous production shown in FIG. 45b is an example of a stock pseudo continuous production corresponding to the production pattern “EG54” defined in a variable production table (special production stage) shown in FIG. This is a stock pseudo continuous production when the number of times is 14. In this stock pseudo continuous production, as shown in FIG. 45b, after the start of the fluctuation, first, “stock production” is performed, and thereafter, 14 pseudo pseudo productions (“pseudo 1” to “pseudo 14”) are performed. Done. Next, after the fourteenth “simulated continuous effect”, a rush effect (“pseudo 15”) to the “reach effect” is performed.

  Then, after a rush effect to the “reach effect” (“pseudo 15”), an effect called “special effect D” is performed. Therefore, in the stock pseudo continuous production shown in FIG. 45b, a series of productions from the entry production to the "reach production" ("pseudo15") to the "special production D" is substantially a "reach production".

  In addition, in the operation example of the stock pseudo continuous production shown in FIG. 45B, the period from the start of the “stock production” to the end of the second “pseudo continuous production” (“pseudo 2”) is 10,000 milliseconds, and the third time. The period from the start of the “pseudo continuous production” (“pseudo 3”) to the end of the seventh “pseudo continuous production” (“pseudo 7”) is 11000 milliseconds, and the eighth “pseudo continuous production” ( The period of each sub-effect is set so that the period from the start of “simulation 8”) to the end of the entry effect to “reach effect” (“simulation 15”) is 12000 milliseconds. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the period of each sub-effect is appropriately changed according to, for example, a change display period of one special symbol, the number of “pseudo consecutive effects”, and the like.

(2) Content of “Stock Effect” Next, the content of “stock effect” performed at the start of the stock pseudo continuous effect will be described. In the “stock effect” of the present embodiment, an effect of causing three types of mascots (mascots A to C) to appear in the display area 13 a of the display device 13 is performed.

  The mascots A and B are given mascot points "1" and "5", respectively, and in the "stock effect", each time the effect (the second pseudo consecutive effect) in which the mascot A or B appears is executed. Is added (updated) to the mascot point (condition indicating whether or not the first pseudo consecutive production is performed). Then, during the period of the “stock effect”, when the mascot point becomes “5” or more (predetermined condition), the mascot C appears in the display area 13 a of the display device 13 (first pseudo consecutive effect). In the present embodiment, when the mascot C appears in the “stock effect”, the “pseudo continuous effect” is always performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of “pseudo consecutive productions” (the number of pseudo consecutive productions) performed when mascot C appears, is set to a value equal to or greater than the number of appearances of mascot C. It is determined by a lottery process using a pseudo-repeated-number determination table shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, as shown in a pseudo-repeated-number determination table shown in FIG. 70 described below, even if mascot C does not appear (the number of mascot C appearances is “0”), Depending on the type of pattern, “simulated continuous production” may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, in the “stock effect”, when the mascot C appears during the fluctuation display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment, a predetermined reach symbol is displayed as the liquid crystal symbol alignment, as shown in FIG. 45b. Thereafter, an effect is performed in which the mascot C destroys the reach symbol. Then, the first “simulated continuous production” (“simulated 1”) is started.

(3) Contents of rush production to “pseudo continuous production” and “reach production” In each “pseudo continuous production”, in the display area 13 a of the display device 13, as in the case of the above-mentioned normal pseudo continuous production, the liquid crystal symbols are aligned. Of the variable display and the temporary stop display are performed.

  At this time, in the present embodiment, in the display area 13a of the display device 13, the mascot C attacks and destroys each symbol of the changing liquid crystal symbol alignment, thereby temporarily stopping each symbol. Production is performed.

  In addition, in the entry effect to the “reach effect” (“pseudo 15”), an effect of stopping a predetermined reach symbol is performed. Specifically, in the entry effect to the “reach effect” (“pseudo 15”), an effect of stopping the reach symbol on the left symbol and the right symbol of the liquid crystal symbol alignment (the middle symbol is changing) is performed.

(4) Operation example 1 of stock pseudo continuous production
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, an operation example 1 of the stock pseudo continuous production (operation example in which “pseudo continuous production” is executed) in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an operation flow of an operation example 1 of the stock pseudo continuous production. In addition, in the operation example 1 of the stock pseudo continuous production shown in FIG. 46, for example, according to the mascot appearance number determination table shown in FIG. 71 described below, the appearance numbers of the mascots A, B, and C in “stock production” are each “4”. "," 2 "and" 2 "are examples of the operation of the stock pseudo continuous production.

  In the operation example 1 shown in FIG. 46, after the start of the change of the special symbol, “stock effect” is first started. In this “stock effect”, first, four mascots A appear continuously in the display area 13 a of the display device 13. At this time, each time the mascot A appears, the mascot point is incremented by “1”, and when four mascots A appear, the total of the mascot points becomes “4” points.

  Next, one mascot B appears. Thereby, "5" points are added to the mascot points, and the total of the mascot points becomes "9" points. That is, the appearance of the mascot B increases the mascot point to “5” points or more. As a result, next, one mascot C appears. As a result, the mascot point is cleared.

  After that, one mascot B appears again. Thereby, "5" points are added to the mascot points, and the total of the mascot points becomes "5" points. As a result, a second mascot C appears next. Then, the mascot point is cleared, and the "stock effect" ends.

  Next, the “pseudo consecutive production” of a predetermined number of times corresponding to the number of appearances of the mascot C is repeated. Specifically, first, a variation display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment is performed. Next, an effect of performing a mascot C attack on the changing symbol is performed. Then, after the symbol is destroyed, an effect is performed in which the alignment of the liquid crystal symbols is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, the series of production operations (“simulated consecutive production”) is repeated a predetermined number of times. That is, in the present embodiment, while the mascot C appears, the “pseudo continuous production” continues.

  After a predetermined number of “simulated consecutive effects” are completed, a predetermined “special reach effect” (for example, “special effect A” to “special effect A” defined in a fluctuation display table (special effect stage) in FIG. 69 described later) If it is decided to perform “special effect D” etc.), an effect of stopping the reach symbol on the left symbol and the right symbol of the liquid crystal symbol alignment (entry effect to “reach effect”) is performed, and thereafter, a predetermined effect is performed. "Special Reach Direction". Then, when the predetermined “special reach effect” ends, the stock pseudo continuous effect ends.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined “special reach effect” is not performed after the “pseudo continuous effect” of the predetermined number of times is completed, first, an effect in which the mascot C disappears in the display area 13a of the display device 13 is performed. Then, after the reach symbol stops on the left symbol and the right symbol of the aligned symbols, an effect of immediately stopping the loss symbol on the middle symbol is performed, and the stock pseudo continuous effect ends.

(5) Operation example 2 of stock pseudo continuous production
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a description will be given of an operation example 2 of the stock pseudo continuous production (operation example in which the “pseudo continuous production” is not executed) in the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an operation flow of an operation example 2 of the stock pseudo continuous production. In addition, in the operation example 2 of the stock pseudo continuous production shown in FIG. 47, for example, according to the mascot appearance number determination table shown in FIG. 71 described later, the number of appearances of the mascots A, B, and C in “stock production” is “4”. "," 0 "and" 0 "are examples of the operation of the stock pseudo continuous production.

  In the operation example 2 shown in FIG. 47, after the start of the change of the special symbol, four mascots A appear continuously in the display area 13a of the display device 13, and the “stock effect” ends. In this case, every time the mascot A appears, the mascot point is incremented by “1”, but when the four mascots A appear, the total of the mascot points is “4” points (less than “5” points). Because there is, mascot C does not appear. Therefore, in the operation example 2 shown in FIG. 47, the stock pseudo continuous production ends when the “stock production” ends.

(6) Processing Flow for Determining Contents of Stock Pseudo-Consecutive Effects Next, referring to FIG. 48, a processing procedure for determining the contents of the above-described stock pseudo-consecutive effects (the number of appearances of each mascot, the number of pseudo repetitions, etc.) Will be described. FIG. 48 is a diagram depicting a processing flow for determining the contents of the stock pseudo continuous production; The process of deciding the contents of the stock pseudo continuous production is performed by the sub CPU 201.

  In the present embodiment, first, the effect contents of “reach effect” are determined. Specifically, with reference to a fluctuating effect table (special effect stage) shown in FIG. 69 described later, the effect contents of “reach effect” (including the presence or absence of “reach effect”) are determined by lottery based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. To determine.

  Next, the number of repetitions (the number of pseudo repetitions) of the “pseudo repetition effect” is determined. Specifically, the number of simulated repeats is determined by lottery based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol with reference to a pseudo repeat number determination table shown in FIG. 70 described below. At this time, the number of pseudo-runs is selected such that the “pseudo-continuous production” falls within the time obtained by subtracting the time required for “reach production” from the fluctuation time of one special symbol.

  Next, the number of appearances of the mascot C in the “stock effect” is determined. Specifically, the number of appearances of the mascot C is determined with reference to a pseudo-number-of-repetitions determination table shown in FIG. 70 described later. In this case, in the present embodiment, the correspondence between the number of appearances of the mascot C and the number of pseudo runs is appropriately set such that the number of pseudo runs is equal to or greater than the number of appearances of the mascot C.

  Next, the number of appearances of the mascots A and B is determined. Specifically, the number of appearances of mascot A and the number of appearances of mascot B are determined based on the determined number of appearances of mascot C with reference to the mascot appearance number determination table shown in FIG. Then, when the number of appearances of the mascots A and B is determined, the process of determining the contents of the stock pseudo continuous production ends, and thereafter, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  As described above, in the stock pseudo consecutive production in the special production stage of the normal mode of the present embodiment, the number of times of performing the “pseudo consecutive production” (the number of pseudo consecutive productions) is set to a predetermined number of times equal to or more than the number of appearances of the mascot C. You. Therefore, based on the number of the mascots C that have appeared in the display area 13a of the display device 13, the player can grasp at least how many times the "simulated continuous production" is executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the pseudo continuous fluctuation display effect without deteriorating the good game performance of the pseudo continuous fluctuation display effect.

  Also, considering the general playability of the pseudo continuous fluctuation display effect, in which the larger the number of pseudo consecutive times, the greater the expectation of a big hit, the minimum pseudo “sequential continuous effect” like the stock pseudo consecutive effect of the present embodiment is considered. By reporting the information on the number of times of execution, it is possible to give the player a sense of security with respect to the pseudo continuous fluctuation display effect. Therefore, in the stock pseudo continuous production of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the pseudo continuous fluctuation display production. Note that, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the stock pseudo continuous production is more easily selected at the time of "big hit" than at the time of "losing" (see the variable production table (special production stage) in FIG. 69 described later). .

  In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which all mascot points are cleared when the mascot C appears, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a part of the mascot points may be cleared may be employed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 46, when the total of the mascot points becomes “9” points and the first mascot C appears, the minimum of the mascot points which is the appearance condition of the mascot C is calculated from the current total of the mascot points. Only the value (“5” points) may be subtracted from the total of the mascot points, and the “4” mascot points may be left without being cleared. In this case, since the player's expectation for the appearance of the mascot C can be further increased, the player's interest in the appearance production (stock production) of the mascot C and the “pseudo continuous production” performed thereafter is further improved. Can be enhanced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper limit of the points that can be added in one mascot point addition process is “5” points when mascot B appears (the minimum value of the mascot points that are the appearance conditions of mascot C). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect may be provided such that points larger than "5" points are added in one mascot point addition process. In this case, when the mascot C appears, only a part of the mascot points may be cleared as described above, or all the mascot points may be cleared as in the above-described embodiment. The combination of the mascot point addition processing and the clear processing can be appropriately set.

[Sensitivity Expectancy Information Production (Rank Production): Production in Mode A]
As described with reference to FIG. 43, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even in the case where the “small hit” is won in the normal mode and the mode shifts to the mode A, the normal mode before the “small hit” is won. If the game state of the game is “probable change game state” (“no high probability time saving”), the game state is maintained even after shifting to mode A, and even in mode A, the game state is changed to “latent probable game state” (“ No high probability of working hours ").

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only when the “big hit” is won in the normal mode but also when the “small hit” is won, the effect mode may be shifted to the mode B via the mode A. There is. Specifically, in the mode A, when the gaming state is the “latent gaming state” (“no high probability time saving”) and the promotion lottery to the mode B is won, the production mode is changed to the mode B. Transition. That is, in the present embodiment, even in the case of winning the “small hit” in the normal mode and shifting to the mode A, the game state of the mode A is “the latent game state” (“no high probability time saving”). In the case of, there is a case where the effect mode shifts to the mode B and a later-described latent-probability-number notification effect is performed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in mode A, the degree of expectation (hereinafter, referred to as “expected degree of latent probability”) in which the gaming state is “latent probability gaming state” (“no high probability time saving”) is displayed on the display device 13. A presentation effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a “rank effect”) that is displayed (notified) in the area 13a is provided.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49, the contents of the rank effect (latent reliability expectation notification effect) performed in mode A will be specifically described. In FIG. 49, not only the outline of the rank effect performed in the mode A but also the outline of the later-described latent number of times notification effect performed in the mode B are described together for convenience of explanation.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the latent expectation degree in mode A is divided into three stages. Specifically, as the stages indicating the latent expectation, the stage 1 whose latent expectation is “low”, the stage 2 whose latent expectation is “medium”, and the stage whose latent expectation is “high” Stage 3 is provided. Then, in the rank effect in mode A, when the stage rises to a stage with a higher degree of latent expectation, information indicating that the degree of latent expectation has been raised is notified ("stage transition effect" is performed).

  The state of the stage 3 is a state in which the gaming state is a “latent gaming state” (“no high probability time saving”) and the transition to the mode B is easy to be won in the lottery. When the lottery is won, a transition effect to mode B is performed. In the present embodiment, the stage transition effect described above and the transition effect to mode B are referred to as “rank-up effect”.

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 43, in the present embodiment, the end lottery of the mode A is performed in the mode A. When the end lottery in Mode A is won, information indicating that Mode A is ended is notified in the rank effect (“End Effect” is performed).

  In the rank effect (latent probability expectation notification effect), the selection of the effect type of “rank-up effect” and “end effect” refers to a rank effect table (not shown), for example, the current game state, the current stage, and the promotion. The selection is made based on conditions such as the result of the lottery or the end lottery. In the present embodiment, an example in which “rank-up effect” or “end effect” is performed as a rank effect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the rank effect, for example, an effect of lowering the rank or an effect specific to each stage may be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the stage of the latent expectation is divided into three stages has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stage of the latent expectation is divided into two stages or four or more stages. Is also good.

  Further, in the rank effect of the present embodiment, an effect of changing the stage by one stage or an effect of changing the stage by two stages may be performed during one special symbol change display period. In the latter effect, an effect may be performed such that the stage 1 changes to the stage 2 in one fluctuation period, and then the stage 2 changes to the stage 3, or in one fluctuation period, An effect in which the stage 1 directly changes to the stage 3 may be performed. Further, an effect may be provided such that the rank is directly improved from the stage 1 to the mode B.

  According to the latent probability expectation information presentation in the mode A described above, the player is given the impression that the gaming state has shifted to the “latently reliable gaming state” even after the small hit winning. Can be given. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest in the small hit game and the interest in the game in the “latently reliable game state” by the latent probability expectation notification effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the small hitting game is over, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has finished the game while the latent expectation degree information production is being performed is performed by another player who does not know the ending status. Starts a game, the player suspects that the gaming state is the “latent playing state”, and as a result, the player may be executed after the latent expectation degree informing effect described later. There is a possibility that the game will be continued until the “probability number notification effect” is completed. In this case, the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased.

[Survey of the number of latent times: production in mode B]
As described with reference to FIG. 43, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the gaming state in the mode B is the “probable gaming state”, for the player, whether the gaming state is the “probable gaming state” It is difficult to determine clearly. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the mode B, a latent number of times notification effect of displaying (notifying) information on the number of executions (ST) of the variable display of the remaining special symbols in the display area 13a of the display device 13 is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49, the contents of the latent number of times notification effect production will be specifically described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the number of times of performing the variable display of the remaining special symbols in mode B (hereinafter, referred to as “remaining latent number of times”) is divided into three stages. More specifically, as the stages indicating the remaining latent times, the stage A having the remaining latent times of 200 to 120, the stage B having the remaining latent times of 119 to 50, and the remaining latent times of 49 to 0 are provided. Stage C is provided. In the effect of informing the number of latent times in the mode B, a special effect is performed in each stage, and information on the current number of remaining latent times is reported to the player.

  It should be noted that the range of the number of remaining latent probabilities set for each of the stages A to C is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 49, and may be changed as appropriate according to, for example, the model. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the stage of the number of remaining latent times is divided into three stages has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stage of the remaining number of latent times is divided into two or four or more stages. Is also good.

[Time reduction notification effect: effect in mode C]
As described with reference to FIG. 43, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of time-saving games performed in mode C (the number of time-saving games) depends on the type of “big hit” that has triggered the transition to mode C. Different. Therefore, in the mode C, it is difficult for the player to clearly determine the remaining number of time savings.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the mode C, the information on the number of remaining time-saving games (hereinafter referred to as “remaining time-saving number”) is displayed (notified) in the display area 13 a of the display device 13, and a time-saving number notification effect is provided. Do.

  In the time saving number notification effect in the mode C, the number of time savings is simply subtracted from the number of time savings at the start of the mode C (the initial value of the remaining number of time savings) by "1" in the display area 13a of the display device 13 every time the time saving game is executed. Such an effect (notification) is basically not performed (such a simple effect may be performed depending on the notification pattern of the number of hours saved). In the present embodiment, the display area 13a of the display device 13 is notified of a provisional remaining time reduction number (hereinafter, referred to as the "number of times of notification") equal to or less than the actual number of times of remaining reduction of time, and the predetermined number of times while subtracting the number of times of notification At the timing, an effect (an “announcement effect” and a “continuation effect” to be described later) that temporarily increases the number of times of notification is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the content of the time reduction notification effect will be specifically described. FIG. 50 is an example of the time flow of the time reduction notification effect. In the example shown in FIG. 50, 200 time savings (the initial value of the remaining time savings) are set at the end of the big hit game according to the type of the “big hit” that triggers the transition to the mode C. It is an example of the time flow of the number-of-times-of-savings time information production effect when started.

  In the time reduction notification effect shown in FIG. 50, first, “60” is set as an initial value of the notification number (temporary remaining time reduction number). In addition, as an initial value of the number of times of notification (temporary number of remaining time savings), the number of times equal to or less than the actual number of remaining time savings (“200 times”) is set.

  After that, 40 time-saving games (special symbol fluctuation display) are consumed, and the special symbol fluctuation display at the time when the number of notifications becomes “20” (the actual remaining time reduction is “160”) is “ The notification number of “100 times” is added to the notification number. At this time, the number of times of notification to be added is set to a number of times equal to or less than the actual number of remaining working hours (“160”). In the present embodiment, information indicating that the number of time savings (number of times of notification) has been added to “100 times” is added to the display area 13a of the display device 13 during the fluctuation period of the special symbol at the time when the number of times of notification is added. A predetermined effect to be notified (hereinafter, referred to as “announcement effect”) is performed.

  Here, FIGS. 51 and 52 show an example of a notice effect. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flow of a notice effect, and FIG. 52 is a diagram showing one mode of a notice effect (liquid crystal pattern matching eyes) displayed on the display area 13 a of the display device 13. In the operation indicated by reference numerals "A" to "E" shown in FIG. 52, the display mode of the liquid crystal symbol alignment displayed on the display area 13a is changed to the display mode A to E of the liquid crystal symbol alignment in FIG. Corresponding.

  In the notice effect, when the change of the special symbol is started, three symbols (decorative symbols) are variably displayed in the display area 13a as shown in a display mode A in FIG. Next, as shown in a display mode B in FIG. 52, a symbol “?” Is displayed on each symbol. Thereafter, as shown in display modes C to E in FIG. 52, the symbol "?" Is destroyed in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and the number corresponding to the number of times of addition is sequentially displayed on each symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, the number of notifications is “100” added at the timing of the notice effect, so the numbers “1”, “0”, and “0” are displayed on the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively. Is done. Then, when the number of times of addition is displayed in the display area 13a as a liquid crystal symbol uniformity, the announcement effect ends.

  In the present embodiment, when the additional number of times of notification does not occur due to the change of the special symbol at the time of the notice effect, as shown in FIG. Is performed as a notice effect. In this “appearance”, “Kemuri” appears in the display area 13a of the display device 13 at the display timing of the right symbol in the display mode E in FIG. 52, and the information of the addition failure is notified to the player. You.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a special hit is won in the change of the special symbol at the time of the notice effect, an effect (“Atari character appearance” effect) that informs the effect is performed in the notice effect. For example, in this “appearing atari character appearance” effect, the characters “atari” are displayed in the display area 13a as the liquid crystal pattern alignment by the operation of the display modes C to E in FIG.

  Note that whether or not the above-described announcement effect is performed depends on the effect pattern (time-saving number notification pattern) determined when performing the time-saving notification effect. In the present embodiment, the number of time-saving times in which the advance effect is not performed is determined. A notification pattern is also prepared. In the case of performing a notice effect, the timing at which the notice effect is performed is set in advance for each notification pattern of the number of time savings determined when the time reduction notification effect is performed.

  Note that the content of the notice effect (effect mode) is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, and any effect mode can be adopted depending on the model or the like. For example, in the above-described example, an example in which one symbol “?” Is used as a symbol to be destroyed has been described. However, a plurality of types of symbols to be destroyed are provided. It may be changed.

  Here, returning to the description of the time reduction notification effect shown in FIG. 50 again, in the example shown in FIG. 50, when the notification frequency becomes “20” (the actual remaining time reduction becomes “160”). At the time), the notification frequency is added to “100”, and after the notification frequency is updated to “120”, the notification frequency displayed in the display area 13a is decremented by “1” every time the time saving game is executed. . When the number of times of notification becomes “0”, an effect called “continuous effect” is performed. In the present embodiment, an example in which the number of times of notification is subtracted by “1” for each change will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of “2 or more” is subtracted from the number of times of notification. Is also good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, at the time when the number of times of notification becomes “0” for the first time (timing for performing the continuous effect), the actual number of remaining working hours is still “40”. A continuous effect is performed in which the number of times equal to or less than the number of times is added to the number of times of notification. In the example shown in FIG. 50, at this point, a continuous effect of adding the number of notifications by "40" is performed.

  Here, FIG. 53 shows an example of the continuous effect. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flow of the continuous effect. First, with reference to FIG. 53, an operation for performing an effect of increasing the number of notifications (“addition number display” effect in FIG. 53) in the continuous effect will be described. First, in the mode C, when the continuous production is started, an image of the “door” appears in the display area 13a. Next, an image of a “button” for destroying the “door” is displayed in the display area 13a.

  Next, when the player performs an operation of repeatedly hitting the appearing "button" to destroy the "door", an image in which a crack is generated in the "door" is displayed. At this time, in the present embodiment, any one of four images (including an image in which no crack is generated in the “door”) with different levels of occurrence of cracks in the “door” is displayed. In the present embodiment, the higher the level of occurrence of cracks in the “door”, the higher the success rate of destruction of the “door”, and the higher the probability of adding the number of notifications.

  Then, when the “door” is destroyed by the repeated hitting operation of the “button” by the player (when the “door successful destruction” effect is performed), the number of times of notification is added (“40 times” in the example shown in FIG. 50). ) Is displayed in the display area 13a (“addition number display” effect).

  Note that, in the continuous effect of the present embodiment, the risk of ending the time-saving game is also notified. Specifically, three stages are provided in which the risk of ending a time-saving game at the time of a continuous production is different from each other, and the stage at which the risk of ending the current time-saving game is present is notified. Then, when performing the “additional number display” effect of the number of notifications at the time of the continuous production, together with the additional number display, the risk of ending the time-saving game does not change (“stage continuation” production) or the end of the time-saving game. Information indicating whether the degree of danger is reduced ("stage rank up" effect) is also displayed in the display area 13a.

  In addition, at the time of the continuous production, the notification of the risk of ending a time-saving game may be performed simultaneously with the display of the number of notifications, as in the present embodiment, or may be performed before or after the display of the number of additional notifications. You may. In addition, the division of the stage of the risk of ending a time-saving game is set based on the current value of the number of times of notification and the value of the number of times of remaining time-saving. In this case, the number of times of notification may be "0" in spite of a state where the number of remaining time savings is large (a stage where the risk of ending the time saving game is low), which may give a sense of discomfort to the player. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of notification becomes “0” in the stage where the risk of ending a time-saving game is low, control is performed so that the “additional number display” effect of the number of times of notification is easily executed. May be. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's uncomfortable feeling with respect to the continuous production, and it is possible to improve the interest and the playability of the player regarding the number of working hours.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 43, when 200 time savings are won based on the type of “big hit” which is a trigger to shift to the mode C, in the mode C, the mode D is changed to the mode D. Perform a promotion lottery. Then, in the special design fluctuation during the continuous production, when the promotion lottery to the mode D is won, in the continuous production, the “button” is repeatedly hit by the “button” by the player, and the “door” is destroyed. Transition effect is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 43, when the “big hit” is won in the mode C, the effect mode shifts to the mode D. And, in the special design fluctuation at the time of the continuous production, when the "big hit" is won, in the continuous production, the "button" is repeatedly hit by the player, the "door" is destroyed, and then the "big hit" A performance that informs the winner is performed. That is, in the mode C, when the number of notifications is added at the time of the continuous production, when the lottery transition to the mode D is won, or when the "big hit" is won, the "door destruction success" in FIG. The production of time is performed.

  On the other hand, in the continuous production, after the image of the “button” for destruction of the “door” is displayed in the display area 13a, if the continuous operation of the “button” is not performed, or the continuous operation of the “button” is performed. When the “door” is not destroyed, that is, when an effect of “failure to destroy the door” occurs, a transition effect to mode B is performed at the time of the continuous effect. This effect is performed when both the number of times of notification and the number of remaining time savings are “0”. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 50, at the time when the number of times of notification becomes “0” for the first time, the actual number of remaining time savings is “40”. No directing takes place.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 50, after the number of notifications is updated (added) to “40” by the continuous effect at the time when the number of notifications first becomes “0”, every time the time-saving game is executed, The number of notifications displayed in the display area 13a is decremented by "1".

  When the number of times of notification becomes “0”, the number of remaining time reductions becomes “0”, and the time reduction game ends. At this time, the effect at the time of “door destruction failure” described in the above-described continuous effect, that is, the effect of shifting to mode B is performed.

  The content of the continuous effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 53, and any content may be used as long as the corresponding relationship between the effect at the time of “successful door destruction” and the effect at the time of “failure of door destruction” is the same. An effect mode can be used.

  In the time-saving number notification effect in the mode C described above, the number of notifications, which is information on the remaining number of time savings, is not simply reduced (notified) as the time-saving game is exhausted, but is performed in the process of subtracting the number of notifications. At the timing of (1), an effect (“announcement effect” and “continuous effect”) in which the number of times of notification is once added can be performed. Therefore, in the time-saving number notification effect of the present embodiment, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the duration of the "time-saving game state". It is possible to continue the player's sense of expectation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the interest of the player in the “time saving game state” can be increased, and the interest of the player in the time saving number notification effect can also be improved.

[Probabilistic change number notification effect: effect in mode D]
In the mode D, the information about the number of times of change (ST) of the remaining special symbols is displayed (notified) in the display area 13a of the display device 13 to give a certain number of changes notification effect. This effect is performed in the same manner as the effect of informing the number of latent times in mode B.

<Direction specializing in pre-reading>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol variable display (reserved ball) is suspended during the special symbol fluctuating display, various prefetch effects are performed based on the information on the reserved ball. Here, among these various look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect called “a look-ahead specialized zone effect” will be described.

[Outline of special look-ahead zone production]
In the special look-ahead zone effect, if it is determined that the special look-ahead zone effect is to be performed when a predetermined reserved ball is generated, a series of effects are performed over the fluctuations of all the reserved balls at that time. In addition, the change display of the special symbol (currently changing) which is executed when it is determined to perform the look-ahead specialization zone effect, and the predetermined reserved ball determined to perform the look-ahead specialization zone effect The fluctuation period of the reserve ball that occurs later does not participate in the production of the look-ahead specialization zone.

  The look-ahead special zone effect mainly includes an effect before the look-ahead special zone, an effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone, and an effect in the look-ahead special zone. In the look-ahead specialization zone effect, basically, the effect before the look-ahead specialization zone, the effect at the start of the look-ahead specialization zone, and the effect in the look-ahead specialization zone are executed in this order.

  In addition, when the look-ahead special zone effect is performed over the fluctuation period of a plurality of reserved balls, in the fluctuation period of each reserved ball, the effect before the pre-read specialization zone, the effect at the start of the pre-read specialization zone, and One of the effects in the special look-ahead zone is performed. The assignment of this effect is determined when it is determined to perform the look-ahead specialized zone effect.

  At this time, a look-ahead special zone start flag is registered in the predetermined reserved ball to which the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is assigned (the value of the look-ahead special zone start flag is set to “1”). . In addition, for each reserved ball from the reserved ball next to the predetermined reserved ball to which the effect at the start of the look-ahead specialization zone is allocated to the reserved ball for which the look-ahead special zone end flag is registered, a look-ahead special zone special flag is set. Is registered (the value of the prefetch specialization zone flag is set to “1”). Note that these flags for the special look-ahead zone are not set for the reserved ball to which the effect before the start of the special look-ahead zone is assigned (the value of each flag for the special look-ahead zone is set to “0”). Set). Further, in the present embodiment, among the reserved balls involved in the prefetch specialization zone production, the prefetch specialization zone end flag is registered in the reserved ball determined to perform the prefetch specialization zone production (prefetching). The value of the specialized zone end flag is set to “1”.

  In the fluctuation display period of the reserved ball assigned to the effect in front of the special look-ahead zone, an effect that encourages entry into the special look-ahead zone is performed. In addition, during the fluctuation display period of the reserved ball assigned to the effect at the start of the pre-read specialization zone, an advance notice effect to enter the specialization zone and an effect of zone entry are performed. In the present embodiment, in the effect before the special look-ahead zone and the effect at the start of the special look-ahead zone, the effect performed by the decorative symbol displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13 (hereinafter, “symbol effect”). ) And / or an effect performed with the background design (hereinafter, referred to as “background effect”). The type (system) of the design effect (first effect) and / or the background effect (second effect) performed in the effect before the special look-ahead zone or the effect at the start of the special look-ahead zone is the effect before the special look-ahead zone. Alternatively, it is determined according to the type of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of the fluctuation of the reserved ball to which the effect at the start of the pre-read specialization zone is assigned (see the fluctuation effect table in FIGS. 66 and 67 described later).

  In addition, in the effect in the special look-ahead zone, a predetermined effect (third effect) is performed such that the degree of expectation of the transition to the jackpot game is higher than the effect (symbol effect or background effect) before the special feature in the pre-read special zone. Will be In other words, in the special look-ahead zone production, from the production in front of the special look-ahead special zone to a series of productions in the special look-ahead special zone, a production is performed in which the expectation of the transition to the jackpot game gradually increases. Will be In addition, the content of the effect in the special look-ahead zone is determined according to the type of the change pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of the change of the reserved ball to which the effect in the special look-ahead zone is assigned (see FIG. 68 fluctuation effect table).

[Operation example of special look-ahead zone production]
Here, an operation example of the prefetch specialization zone effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 54A to 54C. FIGS. 54a to 54c are diagrams illustrating the operation flow of the prefetch specialization zone effect. In the example shown in FIG. 54a to FIG. 54c, in a state where three reserved balls already exist, a start-up prize is generated (a fourth reserved ball is generated), and a special look-ahead zone effect is performed at that time. It is an example of various operations of look-ahead specialization zone production in the case where is determined.

  In this case, the fluctuation period of the three reserved balls that are suspended at the time when the fourth retained ball is generated, and the fluctuation period of the fourth retained ball that is determined to perform the look-ahead specialized zone effect Over there, a series of prefetching effects are performed.

  The operation example of the look-ahead specialization zone effect shown in FIG. 54a sets an effect at the start of the look-ahead specialization zone for the first reserved ball, and performs the look-ahead for the second to fourth reserved balls. It is an operation example when an effect in the specialization zone is set. That is, in the example of the special look-ahead zone effect shown in FIG. 54a, the effect before the special look-ahead zone is not performed.

  In this case, first, when the change display of the first reserved ball is started, an effect at the start of the pre-read specialization zone (an advance announcement effect to the specialization zone and an effect of entering the zone) are performed. Next, in each variation period of the second to fourth reserved balls, an effect in the pre-read specialization zone is performed. In addition, the effect content of each reserve ball in the variation period is determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of the variation of each reserve ball.

  In the operation example of the look-ahead special zone effect shown in FIG. 54b, the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone is set for the first reserved ball, and when the look-ahead specialized zone is started for the second reserved ball. Is an operation example in the case where an effect in the pre-read specialization zone is set for the third and fourth reserved balls. In this case, first, when the change display of the first reserved ball is started, an effect before the start of the look-ahead specialization zone is performed so as to encourage the entry into the look-ahead specialization zone. Next, when the change display of the second reserved ball is started, effects at the start of the pre-read specialization zone (effects of a notice of entry into the specialization zone and effects of entering the zone) are performed. Then, in each of the fluctuation periods of the third and fourth reserved balls, an effect in the pre-read specialization zone is performed. In addition, the effect content of each reserve ball in the variation period is determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of the variation of each reserve ball.

  In the operation example of the look-ahead special zone effect shown in FIG. 54c, the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone is set for the first and second reserved balls, and the look-ahead is performed for the third reserved ball. This is an operation example in the case where an effect at the start of the specialization zone is set, and an effect in the prefetch specialization zone is set for the fourth reserved ball. In this case, first, during the fluctuation period of each of the first and second reserved balls, an effect before the start of the look-ahead specialization zone is performed so as to encourage entry into the look-ahead specialization zone. Next, when the change display of the third reserved ball is started, effects at the start of the pre-read specialization zone (effects of a notice of entry into the specialization zone and effects of entering the zone) are performed. Then, in each variation display of the fourth reserved ball, an effect in the pre-read specialization zone is performed. In addition, the effect content of each reserve ball in the variation period is determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of the variation of each reserve ball.

[Operation example of production at the start of special look-ahead zone]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, an operation example of the effect at the start of the prefetch specialization zone will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the operation flow of the effect at the start of the prefetch specialization zone.

  In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display of the reserved ball in which the effect at the start of the pre-read specialization zone is set is started, first, a symbol effect and a background effect of the same system are displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13. At the same time, a rush notice effect to the specialization zone (“Zone shift notice combined success” effect) is performed. For example, the symbol effect A and the background effect A are performed simultaneously. Next, a predetermined zone entry effect (a special look-ahead zone start effect) is performed. By this series of effects at the start of the special look-ahead special zone, the player is notified that the player has entered the special pre-read special zone in which the expectation of the shift to the big hit game is higher.

  It should be noted that in the rush announcement effect to enter the specialization zone, an effect of simultaneously executing a symbol effect and a background effect of different systems is not performed. For example, an effect that simultaneously performs a symbol effect A and a background effect (background effect B or C) having a different system from the symbol effect A, or a symbol effect (a symbol effect B or C) having a different system from the background effect A and the background effect A ) Is not performed at the same time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the pre-reading effect, if the design effect and the background effect of the same system occur at the same time, the player enters the pre-read specialization zone, the transition to the jackpot game It can be recognized that the degree of expectation is higher.

  Here, in the operation example of the look-ahead specialization zone effect shown in FIG. 54c, an example of a change in the effect content from the effect before the start of the look-ahead specialization zone to the effect in the look-ahead specialization zone will be described.

  In the operation example of the look-ahead specialization zone effect shown in FIG. 54c, for example, in the fluctuation period of the first and second reserve balls, for example, the symbol effect A is performed twice consecutively as the effect before the start of the look-ahead specialization zone. And perform an effect that encourages entry into the pre-read specialization zone. Next, in the fluctuation period of the third reserved ball, a symbol effect A and a background effect A are simultaneously generated as an effect at the start of the pre-read specialization zone, and thereafter, a predetermined effect of entering the zone is performed. Then, during the fluctuation period of the fourth reserved ball, an effect is performed in a predetermined look-ahead special zone having a high degree of expectation of shifting to the jackpot game from the symbol effect A (the effect before the start of the special look-ahead special zone).

  In the operation example of the look-ahead special zone effect shown in FIG. 54c, for example, in the fluctuating period of the first hold ball, the symbol effect A is executed as the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone, and the second hold ball is performed. During the fluctuation period of, the symbol effect A may be executed, and a tilt effect of entering a predetermined look-ahead specialization zone may be added. In this case, the effect before the start of the pre-read specialization zone can further produce an effect that further stimulates the entry into the pre-read specialization zone.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the prefetch specialization zone effect, a series of prefetch effects is performed over the fluctuation period of the plurality of reserved balls. Then, in the look-ahead specialized zone effect, an effect is performed in which the degree of expectation of the transition to the jackpot game gradually increases. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the pre-reading effect, the degree of expectation of the player for the big hit game can be improved, and the interest of the player in the pre-reading effect itself can be improved.

[Configuration of Data Table Stored in Main ROM]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Big hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the first opening)]
First, the big hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the first starting opening) will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit random number determination table (at the time of the first starting mouth winning) is based on the big hit determining random number value obtained when the game ball enters (wins) the first starting mouth 44, and the "big hit", "small hit" And a table that is referred to when any one of “miss” and “loss” is determined by lottery.

  In addition, the random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value for determining a lottery result performed at the time of starting opening prize, and more specifically, a lottery of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). This is a random value indicating the result. In the present embodiment, the random number for jackpot determination is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 44, one of "big hit", "small hit" and "losing" is determined by lottery. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56, in the jackpot random number determination table (at the time of winning the first opening), the value of the probability change flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”) is set to “ The range of the random numbers for the jackpot determination for which the winning of "big hit", "small hit" and "losing" is determined, and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "small hit judgment value data" And any one of “loss determination value data”).

  The probable change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether the game state is the “probable change game state”. When the game state is the “probable change game state”, the probable change flag is “1”.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, when the first starting port 44 wins, when the probability variable flag is “0” and the random number for jackpot determination is any one of “777” to “943”, , "Big hit" is won, and "big hit determination value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 167/65536.

  If the probability variable flag is “0” and the big hit determination random number is any one of “1” to “300” when the first starting port 44 wins, “small hit” is won, and “ Small hit determination value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 300/65536.

  Further, when the first starting port 44 wins, if the probability variable flag is “0” and the random number value for jackpot determination is not any of “1” to “300” or “777” to “943”, “losing” is performed. "Is won, and" losing determination value data "is determined.

  On the other hand, at the time of winning the first starting opening 44, if the probability change flag is “1” and the random number for jackpot determination is any of “777” to “1273”, as shown in FIG. "Is won, and" big hit determination value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 497/65536, which is higher than that in the case where the probability change flag is “0”.

  In addition, when the first starting port 44 wins, if the probability variable flag is “1” and the random number for jackpot determination is any of “1” to “300”, “small hit” is won, and “ Small hit determination value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 300/65536, which is the same as that when the probability change flag is “0”.

  Furthermore, if the probability change flag is “1” and the big hit determination random number is not any of “1” to “300” or “777” to “1273” at the time of winning the first starting port 44, “losing” ”Is won, and“ losing determination value data ”is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 44, the jackpot probability varies depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “probable change game state”. Specifically, the probability of a big hit when a gaming ball is won at the first starting port 44 when the gaming state is the “probable-variable gaming state” is about three times that when the gaming state is not the “probable-variable gaming state”. Get higher.

[Big hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the second opening)]
Next, the big hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the second starting opening) will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the second starting opening) is a lottery based on the big hit determining random value acquired when the game ball enters (wins) the second starting opening 45. This is a table that is referred to when performing.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 45, one of "big hit" and "losing" is determined by lottery. If a game ball has won the second starting port 45, "small hit" is not won.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 57, in the jackpot random number determination table (at the time of winning the second starting opening), for each value of the probability change flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”), “ Relationship between the range of the random number for jackpot determination for which each of the "big hit" and "losing" is determined and the corresponding determination value data (either "big hit determination value data" or "losing determination value data") Is defined.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, when the second starting opening 45 wins, when the probability variable flag is “0” and the random number for jackpot determination is any one of “777” to “943”, , "Big hit" is won, and "big hit determination value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 167/65536.

  If the probability variable flag is “0” and the big hit determination random value is not any of “777” to “943” at the time of winning the second starting opening 45, “losing” is won, and “losing determination” is performed. Value data "is determined.

  On the other hand, at the time of winning the second starting port 45, if the probability variable flag is “1” and the random number for jackpot determination is any of “777” to “1273”, as shown in FIG. "Is won, and" big hit determination value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 497/65536, which is higher than that in the case where the probability change flag is “0”.

  If the probability change flag is “1” and the big hit determination random number is not any one of “777” to “1273” at the time of winning the second starting opening 45, the result is “losing” and “losing determination value data”. Is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when a game ball wins in the second starting port 45, the jackpot probability fluctuates depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “probable change game state”. . Specifically, similarly to the first starting port 44 winning, even when the second starting port 45 winning, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 45 when the gaming state is the “probable changing game state”. The jackpot probability is about three times higher than when the gaming state is not the “probable changing gaming state”.

[Big hit symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the first opening)]
Next, the big hit symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the first starting opening) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when a "big hit" is determined by a lottery based on the random number for big hit determination performed when a game ball has won the first starting port 44, a big hit symbol random value is obtained, and the big hit symbol is obtained. A big hit symbol is selected based on the random number value.

  The big hit symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the first opening) is a table that is referred to when the big hit symbol is selected. The big hit symbol random value is a random value for determining the big hit symbol when “big hit” is determined, and is selected from 0 to 99 (100 types).

  As shown in FIG. 58, in the big hit symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the first starting opening), a symbol designation command (“z0” to “z16”) for designating a big hit symbol and the symbol designation command are selected. The relationship with the big hit symbol random value to be performed is defined. In addition, the probability (selection rate) that each symbol designating command is selected is also defined in the big hit symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the first opening).

  For example, in the jackpot symbol selection process, if the jackpot symbol random number is any of “77” to “96”, the symbol designation command “z13” is selected as shown in FIG. Becomes 20/100.

[Big hit symbol random number judgment table (at the time of winning the second opening)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the big hit symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the second opening) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, when the "big hit" is determined from the lottery based on the random number for big hit determination performed when the game ball has won the second starting port 45, the big hit symbol random value is also obtained, The big hit symbol is selected based on the big hit random number value. The big hit symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the second starting opening) is a table that is referred to when the big hit symbol is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the jackpot symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the second starting opening) includes a symbol designation command (“z17”) for designating a jackpot symbol and a jackpot symbol for which the symbol designation command is selected. The relationship with the random number (any of 0 to 99) is defined. In addition, the probability (selection rate) that each symbol designating command is selected is defined in the big hit symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the second starting opening).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, when "big hit" is determined at the time of winning the second starting opening 45, in the big hit symbol selection processing, the symbol designating command is always performed regardless of the big hit symbol random number value. “Z17” is selected (selection rate = 100/100).

[Big hit type determination table]
Next, the big hit type determination table will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, when the symbol designation command (any one of “z0” to “z17”) is determined with reference to the big hit symbol random number determination tables (see FIGS. 58 and 59), the determined symbol designation is performed. Based on the command, the type of “big hit” (the content of the big hit game) is determined. The big hit type determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the type of “big hit” (contents of the big hit game) based on the symbol designating command.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the big hit type determination table defines the relationship between the symbol designating commands (“z0” to “z17”) and various parameters for determining the type of “big hit”. Various parameters for determining the type of “big hit” (contents of big hit game) include the upper limit of the number of rounds in the big hit game, the number of rounds in which the payout (prize ball) is relatively easy to obtain in the big hit game, and the opening in the big hit game The type of the special winning opening to be performed, the number of prize balls, and the time reduction flag and the number of times reduced in the game state of the transition destination are defined.

  The “number of rounds in which the payout is relatively easy to obtain” defined in the big hit type determination table means the number of rounds in which the opening time of the big winning opening is relatively long in the big hit game.

  For example, when the upper limit of the number of rounds is 16 and the number of rounds in which a ball (prize ball) is relatively easy to obtain is 6 rounds, in the first to sixth round games of the jackpot game, the special winning opening is 30. Seconds, and the opening time of the special winning opening is 0.1 second in the remaining seventh to sixteenth round games.

  In this way, by changing the number of rounds in which a payout (prize ball) is relatively easy to obtain in accordance with the type of the big hit symbol (symbol designating command), even if the upper limit of the number of rounds is the same, the big hit symbol Depending on the type of the (symbol designating command), a difference can be given to the total number of payouts finally obtained in the big hit game.

  The type “1” of the special winning opening to be opened, defined in the jackpot type determination table, corresponds to the first special winning opening 53, and the type “2” corresponds to the second special winning opening 54. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the first special winning opening 53 is "10" balls, and the number of prize balls at the time of winning the second special winning opening 54 is "15" balls (see FIG. 60).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by changing the type of the special winning opening to be opened at the time of winning the big winning, even if the number of winning in the special winning opening in one big hit game is the same, the total number of winning balls is reduced. Can be changed.

  As shown in the big hit type determination table in FIG. 60, the value of the time saving flag (“1” (on) or “0” (off)) and the number of time savings to be given are defined for each gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. Is done. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the "big hit" is determined in the gaming state of "low probability time saving", when the "big hit" is determined in the gaming state of "high probability time saving", and In each of the cases where the "big hit" is determined in the gaming state of "high probability time saving", the value of the time saving flag and the number of time savings are separately defined.

  The time reduction flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “time reduction gaming state”. When the game state is the "time reduction game state", the time reduction flag is set to "1 (on)".

  Note that “low probability time saving no” shown in FIG. 60 is a gaming state in which the “normal gaming state” and the “non-time saving gaming state” occur at the same time, so that the value of the probability change flag is “0 (off)”. And the value of the time reduction flag is “0 (off)”.

  Also, since "high probability no time saving" is a game state in which the "probable change game state" and the "non-time saving game state" occur at the same time ("latent probability game state"), the value of the probability change flag is "1 ( ON), and the value of the time reduction flag is “0 (off)”.

  In addition, since “high probability time saving” is a game state in which the “probable change game state” and the “time reduction game state” occur at the same time, the value of the probability change flag is “1 (on)” and the time saving This is a gaming state in which the value of the flag is “1 (ON)”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the presence or absence of the time reduction game and the number of the time reduction can be changed in accordance with the game state at the time of winning the big hit. That is, in the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the big hit game can be changed according to the game state at the time of the big hit winning.

  For example, when the symbol designating command is “z9”, as shown in FIG. 60, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of rounds is determined as various parameters for determining the type (content) of the “big hit”. The upper limit value "16", the number of rounds "6" that are relatively easy to obtain a ball, the type of a special winning opening to be opened at the time of a big hit game "1", and the number of prize balls "10" are acquired.

  However, in this case, when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is "no low probability time saving", the time saving flag "0" and the number of time savings "0" are selected, and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is "high probability no time saving". , The time-saving flag “1” and the number of time savings “100” are selected, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is “with high probability time savings”, the time-saving flag “1” and the number of time savings “200” are selected. You.

  In the present embodiment, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state always becomes the “probable changing game state”. Therefore, in the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. Is not specified. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the probable change flag may be defined for the symbol designation command (big hit symbol) in the big hit type determination table.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the gaming state always becomes the “probably changed gaming state” after the end of the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be provided with a type of "big hit" so that the game state does not shift to the "probable change game state", or it may be determined whether or not the game state shifts to the "probable change game state" according to the type of the "big hit". A configuration may be adopted. In this case, in the big hit type determination table, the value of the probability change flag is specified for the symbol designating command (big hit symbol).

[Prize winning pattern determination table]
Next, the winning pattern determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 71) determines a winning type ("big hit", "small hit" or "losing") determined at the time of winning (at the time of starting opening winning) and a symbol designating command. Then, a winning pattern (information for specifying winning contents) is determined, and the winning pattern is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) as a winning command. The winning pattern determination table is a table that is referred to when determining a winning pattern based on the winning type and the symbol designating command determined at the time of winning.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the winning pattern determination table defines the relationship between the types of winning patterns ("NS00" to "NS19"), the symbol designating command, and various parameters indicating winning details. As the various parameters indicating the winning contents, the winning type, the value of the time reduction flag and the number of time reductions set in the game state of the transition destination are defined. The information on the winning type defined in the winning pattern determination table corresponds to the determination value data defined in the big hit random number determination tables shown in FIGS. 56 and 57.

  In the winning pattern determination table shown in FIG. 61, the value of the time reduction flag (“1” (on) or “0” (off)) and the number of times of reduction are defined for each gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. Specifically, when "big hit" is determined in the game state of "low probability time saving", "big hit" is determined in the game state of "high probability time saving", and "high probability time saving is In each of the cases where "big hit" is determined in the gaming state of "", the value of the time reduction flag and the number of times of reduction are separately defined.

  In the present embodiment, since the symbol designating command is information for designating a big hit symbol, in the winning pattern determination table, the information of the symbol designating command is not defined for the winning types “losing” and “small hit”. . If the winning type is “losing” or “small hit”, the game does not shift to the time reduction gaming state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, so the winning types “losing” and “small” are displayed in the winning pattern determination table. Neither the value of the time reduction flag nor the information on the number of time reductions is defined for “hit”.

[Variation pattern determination table]
Next, the variation pattern determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 71), at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, obtains information such as a winning type ("big hit", "small hit" or "losing"), a symbol designating command, and a variable time. , A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the variation pattern is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) as a variation command.

  The variation pattern determination table is a table that is referred to when a variation pattern is determined based on information such as a winning type, a symbol designation command, and a variation time at the start of variation of a special symbol. The change pattern of the special symbol determined by the change pattern determination table also serves as information for designating the effect pattern of the effect performed during the change display period of the special symbol, as described later.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the variation pattern determination table includes the types of variation patterns (“HN00” to “HN27”) and information (symbol designating command, variation time and winning type) to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern. ) Is defined. In the variation pattern determination table, the value of the time reduction flag and the number of time reductions corresponding to each variation pattern are also defined.

  Note that the value of the time reduction flag and the number of time reductions are defined for each gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. Specifically, when "big hit" is determined in the game state of "low probability time saving", "big hit" is determined in the game state of "high probability time saving", and "high probability time saving is In the case where "big hit" is determined in the gaming state of "", the value of the time reduction flag and the number of time reductions are defined respectively.

[Configuration of Data Table Stored in Program ROM]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Read-ahead effect flag table]
First, the look-ahead effect flag table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) changes the content of the variable display of the retained special symbol. A predetermined look-ahead effect (including a look-ahead specialized zone effect) is performed according to (contents of the reserved ball). At this time, the execution of the prefetch effect is controlled by management information (various flags) of the prefetch effect.

  The look-ahead effect flag table shown in FIG. 63 is a table that is referred to when setting the management information (various flags) of the look-ahead effect. The management information (various flags) of the prefetch effect is determined based on the information of the winning pattern included in the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub-control circuit 200 at the time of starting opening winning.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the look-ahead effect flag table, the types of the winning patterns (“NS00” to “NS19”), random numbers for determining the look-ahead effect management information (various flags), and the random number values The correspondence relationship between the value of the variable look-ahead flag, the value of the look-ahead specialized zone flag, and the management information set of the look-ahead specialized zone effect pattern, which is determined by the following formula, is defined.

  The prefetching effect flag table also defines the selection rate of each management information set and the winning type ("big hit", "small hit" or "losing") corresponding to each winning pattern. The information of the winning type defined in the look-ahead effect flag table corresponds to the determination value data defined in the jackpot random number determination tables shown in FIGS. 56 and 57.

  The random number value specified in the look-ahead effect flag table is a random number value obtained at the time of winning the starting opening, and is any one of “0” to “999” (1000 types).

  The variable look-ahead flag specified in the look-ahead effect flag table is a flag for determining whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect. When a look-ahead effect is performed, “1 (ON)” is set to the value of the variable look-ahead flag. Set. Further, the look-ahead specialization zone flag is a flag that determines whether or not to perform the above-described look-ahead specialization zone effect as a look-ahead specialization effect. Is set to "1 (ON)". Note that the variable prefetch flag and the prefetch specialization zone flag are set in a prefetch effect flag determination process described later (see FIG. 87 described later).

  Furthermore, the look-ahead special zone effect pattern defined in the look-ahead effect flag table is information indicating a system of a look-ahead effect that is executed until the effect of entering the effect of the special look-ahead zone. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, three types of prefetch specialization zone effect patterns (“pattern A”, “pattern B”, and “pattern C”) are prepared, and the value of the prefetch specialization zone flag is set. When it is “1”, a predetermined pattern is selected.

  For example, the winning pattern determined at the time of winning is “NS08”, and the random number value acquired at the time of winning to set the management information (various flags and the like) of the prefetch effect is any one of “100” to “999”. If the value is a value, "0" is set in the variable prefetch flag, "1" is set in the prefetch special zone flag, and "pattern A" is selected as the prefetch special zone effect pattern.

[Variable production table]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201), various effects are executed during the variable display of the special symbol.

  At this time, the content of the effect performed (effect pattern) is based on the information on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol included in the fluctuation command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub-control circuit 200 at the time of starting the fluctuation display of the special symbol. Is determined.

  The various variation effect tables described below are referred to when determining the content of the effect (effect pattern) based on information on the variation pattern and the like. In the present embodiment, separate variable effect tables are prepared according to various conditions such as presence / absence and type of pre-reading effect and presence / absence of stock pseudo continuous effect.

  (1) Variable production table (no pre-reading)

  First, the fluctuation effect table (without prefetching) will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation effect table (without pre-reading) indicates a case where the pre-reading effect is not performed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol, that is, a case where both the value of the variable pre-read flag and the value of the pre-read specialization zone flag are “0”. This is a table which is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the effect during the variable display of the special symbol, which is performed when the mode is the special effect stage of the normal mode).

  As shown in FIG. 64, in the fluctuation effect table (without pre-reading), the type of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (“HN00” to “HN27”) and the effect pattern (“EN00” to “EN54”) are selected (determined). ) Is defined, and the correspondence between the effect pattern determined by the random value and the data set of the value of the pseudo consecutive effect flag is defined.

  In addition, in the fluctuation effect table (no pre-reading), the fluctuation time (variation display period of the special symbol) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of each special symbol, the winning type ("big hit", "small hit" or "losing") and the symbol are displayed. The designation command, the selectivity of each effect pattern, and the effect contents are also defined.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation effect table (no pre-reading) is substantially the same as the effect time of the corresponding effect pattern. Further, the random number value specified in the fluctuation effect table (no pre-reading) is a random number value acquired at the time of starting opening winning, and is any one of “0” to “999” (1000 types).

  The pseudo consecutive production flag defined in the variable production table (without pre-reading) is a flag for determining whether or not to perform the normal pseudo consecutive production described in FIGS. 44 and 45. In this case, "1 (on)" is set to the value of the pseudo consecutive effect flag.

  For example, it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not to be executed, and the change pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of the change display of the special symbol is “HN10”, and is acquired at the time of winning to select the effect pattern. If the random number is any value from "500" to "999", "EN20" is selected as the effect pattern, and "1" is set in the pseudo consecutive effect flag.

  In this case, during the variable display period of the special symbol (25000 milliseconds), a normal pseudo continuous effect is performed. Specifically, first, a “pseudo consecutive effect” is performed for a predetermined number of pseudo consecutive times, and then a “reach effect” called “normal reach effect A” is performed. Then, at the end of the “normal reach effect A”, the “big hit” mode is displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, and the special symbol stops changing.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the “normal reach effect A”, the “reach effect” includes an effect called “special effect A” or “special effect D”, and the “non-reach effect” includes “normal fluctuation”. There is an effect called “effect A”. As the “reach effect”, an effect corresponding to a variation pattern of a special symbol (or identification information, an identification symbol, a normal symbol, or the like) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, and the lightning role 80, The logo role 210 and the door role 420 are driven.

  In addition, in order to notify that the result of the production is a “big hit”, the lightning role 80 and the logo role 210 are driven (or moved, operated, movable, etc.) as shown in FIG. When there is an effect that shifts (or changes, develops, promotes, etc.) from “reach effect” to “normal reach effect A”, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 are driven as shown in FIG. Alternatively, the effect transition may be notified.

  (2) Fluctuating effect table (pre-reading)

  Next, the fluctuation effect table (with pre-reading) will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation effect table (with pre-reading) indicates that the value of the fluctuation pre-reading flag is “1” when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be performed at the time of displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, that is, when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. It is a table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the effect during the variable display of the special symbol, which is performed when the value of the pre-read specialization zone flag is “0”.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the variation effect table (with pre-reading), the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol (“HN00” to “HN27”) and the effect pattern (“ES00” to “ES55”) are selected (determined). ) Is defined, and the correspondence between the effect pattern determined by the random number value and the data set of the contents of the look-ahead effect (the type of the symbol effect and the background effect) is defined.

  In the present embodiment, in the prefetching effect, a symbol effect (effect performed with a decorative pattern) and / or a background effect (effect performed with a background pattern) are performed. In the present embodiment, three types of symbol effects, “Symbol effect A”, “Symbol effect B”, and “Symbol effect C” are prepared, and the background effects are “Background effect A” and “Background effect B”. ”And“ background effect C ”are prepared. In the present embodiment, the system (type) of the content of “symbol effect A” is the same as that of “background effect A”, and the system (type) of the content of “symbol effect B” is “background effect B”. It is assumed that the system (type) of the content of “symbol effect C” is the same as that of “background effect C”.

  In addition, in the fluctuation effect table (with pre-reading), the fluctuation time (variation display period of the special symbol) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the winning type ("big hit", "small hit" or "losing"), and each effect The pattern selectivity and the effect contents are also defined.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation effect table (with pre-reading) is substantially the same as the effect time of the corresponding effect pattern. The random number value specified in the fluctuation effect table (prefetched) is a random number value obtained at the time of starting opening winning and is any one of “0” to “999” (1000 types).

  For example, the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined, the change pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of the change display of the special symbol is “HN00”, and the random number value acquired at the time of winning to select the effect pattern Is any value from "0" to "499", "ES00" is selected as the effect pattern, and "symbol effect A" is selected in the look-ahead effect. In this case, during the fluctuation display period (5000 milliseconds) of the special symbol, first, the pre-reading effect of “symbol effect A” is performed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation, and after the pre-reading effect ends, “normal fluctuation effect A” is displayed. A so-called effect is performed. Then, at the end of the effect called “normal fluctuation effect A”, the “losing” mode is displayed on the display area 13 a of the display device 13, and the special symbol stops changing.

  Note that the variable effect table (with pre-reading) shown in FIG. 65 may be used when the pre-reading effect is not performed. That is, the variable effect table (with pre-reading) shown in FIG. 65 may be used as the variable effect table (without pre-reading). In this case, an effect similar to the case where the execution of the prefetch effect is determined can be performed even during the normal special symbol change display period in which the prefetch effect is not performed.

  (3) Fluctuating effect table (before the special look-ahead zone starts)

  Next, the fluctuation effect table (before the start of the prefetch specialization zone) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in a state where a plurality of special symbols are variably displayed (a state where a plurality of spheres are held) and when the shift to the prefetch specialization zone is determined, that is, a change in the special symbols At the start, when the value of the variable look-ahead flag is “0” and the value of the look-ahead special zone flag is “1”, a look-ahead special zone effect is performed. At this time, as described above, the effect before the start of the special look-ahead zone, the effect at the start of the special look-ahead zone, and the effect in the special look-ahead zone are executed at the time of the fluctuation display of the corresponding reserved ball.

  The fluctuation effect table (before the start of the special look-ahead zone) shown in FIG. 66 determines the effect pattern of the effect performed during the fluctuation display period of the reserve ball when the change of the reserve ball that performs the effect before the start of the special look-ahead zone starts. This is a table that is referred to when performing the operation.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the variation effect table (before the start of the prefetch specialization zone) is determined by the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol (“HN00” to “HN04”) and the look-ahead effect flag table shown in FIG. A special look-ahead special zone effect pattern, a random number value for selecting (determining) a special effect pattern (“EX00” to “EX13”), a direct effect pattern determined by the random number value, and an effect before the start of the special look-ahead special zone. (The type of the symbol effect and the background effect) with the data set is defined. That is, the contents of the effect before the start of the prefetch specialization zone are determined based on the prefetch specialization zone effect pattern and the type of the variation pattern (“HN00” to “HN04”).

  When determining the effect pattern with reference to the variable effect table (before the start of the prefetch specialization zone), either the symbol effect or the background effect is selected as the prefetch effect. In addition, the fluctuating effect table (before the start of the pre-reading specialization zone) includes the fluctuating time (special symbol fluctuating display period) and winning type ("losing") corresponding to each fluctuating pattern, and the selectivity of each effect pattern. Stipulated.

  In the look-ahead specialization zone effect, for the first time in the effect in the look-ahead specialization zone, the "big hit" mode or the "small hit" mode is displayed on the display area 13a of the display device 13, and the special symbol fluctuates and stops. That is, in the effect before the start of the pre-read specialization zone and at the start of the start of the pre-read specialization zone, the display in the display area 13a of the display device 13 is performed in a “losing” mode, and the special symbol fluctuates and stops. Therefore, in the variable effect table (before the start of the special look-ahead zone) and the variable effect table (at the start of the special look-ahead zone) shown in FIG. Various data corresponding to the winning type of "small hit" and "big hit" are not defined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the variation time specified in the variation effect table (before the start of the pre-read specialization zone) is substantially the same as the effect time of the corresponding effect pattern. Further, the random number value specified in the fluctuation effect table (before the start of the special look-ahead special zone) is a random number value obtained at the time of winning the starting opening, and is any one of “0” to “999” (1000 types). .

  For example, the execution of the effect before the start of the special look-ahead special zone is determined, the change pattern determined at the start of the special symbol change display is “HN00”, and the special look-ahead special zone effect pattern determined at the time of winning is “ If the random number value obtained at the time of winning to select the effect pattern is any value from “0” to “499”, “EX00” is selected as the effect pattern and the prefetching is performed. “Symbol effect A” is selected as the effect before the start of the specialization zone. In this case, during the special symbol change display period (5000 milliseconds), first, when the special symbol change display is started, “symbol effect A” is performed as a prefetch effect, and after the prefetch effect ends. Then, the display of the "losing" mode is performed on the display area 13a of the display device 13, and the special symbol stops changing.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of the effect pattern of the effect before the start of the look-ahead specialization zone, not only a predetermined design effect or a predetermined background effect, but also the entry into the special look-ahead special zone may be further encouraged. There is also a case where a directing effect is performed.

  (4) Fluctuating effect table (at the start of special-reading special zone)

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a description will be given of the fluctuation effect table (at the start of the prefetch specialization zone).

  The fluctuating effect table (at the start of special look-ahead zone) shown in FIG. 67 shows the effect of the effect performed during the fluctuating display period of the reserved ball at the start of the fluctuating effect of the reserved ball at the start of the special look-ahead special zone (at the time of entry). It is a table that is referred to when determining an effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the variation effect table (at the start of the prefetch specialization zone) is determined by the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol (“HN00” to “HN04”) and the look-ahead effect flag table shown in FIG. A special look-ahead special zone effect pattern, a random number value for selecting (determining) a special effect pattern (“EZ00” to “EZ20”), an effect pattern determined by the random number value, and an effect at the start of the pre-read special zone. (The type of the symbol effect and the background effect) with the data set is defined. In other words, the content of the effect at the start of the prefetch specialization zone is determined based on the prefetch specialization zone effect pattern and the type of the variation pattern (“HN00” to “HN04”).

  In the production at the start of the special look-ahead zone, as described above, first, as a rush announcement production to the specialization zone (“combination of advance notice of zone transition” production), the design production and the background production of the same system at the same time are performed simultaneously. Done. Therefore, in each effect pattern in the fluctuating effect table (at the start of the special look-ahead special zone), data of the symbol effect and the background effect of the same system are defined. For example, in the effect pattern “EZ00”, “symbol effect A” and “background effect A” are defined as prefetch effects.

  In addition, the fluctuation effect table (at the start of the pre-read specialization zone) includes the fluctuation time (variation display period of special symbols) and the winning type ("losing") corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and the selectivity of each effect pattern. Stipulated. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation effect table (at the start of the special look-ahead specialized zone) is substantially the same as the effect time of the corresponding effect pattern. Further, the random number value specified in the fluctuation effect table (at the time of starting the pre-read specialization zone) is a random number value obtained at the time of starting opening winning, and is any one of “0” to “999” (1000 types). .

  For example, the execution of the effect at the start of the special look-ahead special zone is determined, the change pattern determined at the start of the special symbol change display is “HN00”, and the special look-ahead special zone effect pattern determined at the time of winning. Is “Pattern A”, “EZ00” is selected as the effect pattern at the start of the prefetch specialization zone, and “Symbol effect A” and “Symbol effect A” "Background effect A" is selected. In this case, in the special symbol change display period (5000 milliseconds), first, when the special symbol change display is started, the "symbol effect A" and the "background effect A" are given as "Zone shift notice composite success" effect. Are performed at the same time, and after the effect is finished, a predetermined zone entry effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern is performed. Then, after the end of the predetermined zone entry effect, the display of the “losing” mode is performed on the display area 13 a of the display device 13, and the special symbol stops changing.

  (5) Fluctuating effect table (in the pre-read specialization zone)

  Next, the fluctuation effect table (in the pre-read specialization zone) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The fluctuation effect table (in the pre-read specialization zone) shown in FIG. 68 is used when determining the effect pattern of the effect performed during the fluctuation display period of the reserved ball at the start of the fluctuation of the reserved ball performing the effect in the pre-read specialization zone. It is a table referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the variation effect table (in the pre-read specialization zone) indicates the types of variation patterns of special symbols (“HN00” to “HN27”) and the effect patterns (“ET00” to “ET52”). The correspondence between the random number for selection (determination) and the data set of the effect pattern and the effect content determined by the random value is defined. In other words, the content of the effect in the pre-read specialization zone is determined based on the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol (“HN00” to “HN27”).

  In addition, the fluctuation effect table (in the pre-read specialization zone) includes a fluctuation time (variation display period of a special symbol) and a winning type ("loss", "small hit" and "big hit") corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and Also, the selectivity of each effect pattern is defined. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation effect table (in the pre-read specialization zone) is substantially the same as the effect time of the corresponding effect pattern. Further, the random number value specified in the fluctuation effect table (during the start of the special look-ahead zone) is a random number value obtained at the time of winning the starting opening, and is any one of “0” to “999” (1000 types). .

  For example, the execution of the effect during the start of the pre-read specialization zone is determined, the variation pattern of the special symbol is “HN00”, and the random number value acquired at the time of winning to select the effect pattern is “0”. If the value is any one of the values of “” to “899”, “ET00” is selected as the effect pattern in the special look-ahead special zone. The look-ahead effect of "effect A" is selected. In this case, in the special symbol variable display period (5000 milliseconds), when the special symbol variable display is first started, a prefetch effect corresponding to the "prefetch special zone special effect A" is performed. After the pre-reading effect has been completed, a “losing” mode is displayed on the display area 13 a of the display device 13, and the special symbol stops changing.

  Although the type of the pre-read specialization zone will not be described in detail here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of pre-read specialization zones are prepared, and a predetermined pre-read specialization zone is appropriately determined according to the type of the pre-read specialization zone. The effect pattern at the start of the zone and the effect in the effect in the pre-read specialization zone are associated with each other. For example, if the effect at the start of the look-ahead specialization zone is a rush effect to the "read-ahead specialization zone A", the effect during the start of the look-ahead specialization zone may be the "system A for the look-ahead specialization zone" of the same system. Is selected. Further, for example, when the effect at the start of the pre-read specialization zone is a rush effect to the "pre-read specialization zone B", the effect during the start of the pre-read specialization zone is the same type of "pre-read specialization zone effect". B "is selected. That is, the system of effects at the start of the special look-ahead zone is the same as the system of effects at the start of the special look-ahead zone. For example, the effect at the start of the special look-ahead zone is a rush effect to the "special look-ahead zone A". In the case of, the effect during the start of the special look-ahead zone does not select a different system of “effect B in the special look-ahead zone”.

  When a plurality of types of special-purpose pre-reading zones are provided, the type of the special-purpose pre-reading zone may be associated with a transition probability to a gaming state advantageous to the player. For example, the transition probability to the gaming state advantageous to the player corresponding to “special look-ahead zone B” may be set to be higher than that corresponding to “special look-ahead zone A”. In this case, by performing a look-ahead effect corresponding to the “special look-ahead zone B”, the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be further increased. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation of the player for the special look-ahead zone effect can be changed according to the content of the effect, so that the interest in the special look-ahead special zone effect can be improved.

  (6) Variable production table (special production stage)

  Next, the fluctuation effect table (special effect stage) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the special effect stage is selected in the “normal mode”, the stock pseudo continuous effect is performed. The fluctuating effect table (special effect stage) shown in FIG. 69 is a table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the stock pseudo continuous effect performed during the fluctuating display period of the special symbol in the special effect stage.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the variation pattern type (“HN00” to “HN27”) and the variation patterns (“EG00” to “EG54”) are selected in the variation effect table (special effect stage) (see FIG. 69). The correspondence relationship between the random number value to be determined), the effect pattern determined by the random number value, and the data set of the stock pseudo continuous effect flag is defined. That is, the production content of the stock pseudo continuous production is determined based on the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol (“HN00” to “HN27”).

  In addition, in the fluctuation effect table (special effect stage), the fluctuation time (variation display period of the special symbol) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern and the winning type ("losing", "small hit" and "big hit"), and each The selectivity of the effect pattern and the effect contents are also specified. The effect of the effect contents defined in the variable effect table (special effect stage) is the above-mentioned “reach effect”, and when the stock pseudo consecutive effect is performed, the predetermined pseudo consecutive This is executed after the “simulated continuous production” ends.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the variation time specified in the variation effect table (special effect stage) is substantially the same as the effect time of the corresponding effect pattern. The random number value specified in the fluctuation effect table (special effect stage) is a random number value obtained at the time of winning the starting opening, and is any one of “0” to “999” (1000 types). Further, the stock pseudo continuous production flag defined in the variable production table (special production stage) is a flag for determining whether or not to perform the stock pseudo continuous production. “1 (ON)” is set to the value of the pseudo consecutive effect flag.

  For example, in the special effect stage of the normal mode, the change pattern determined at the start of the special pattern change display is “HN27”, and the random number values acquired at the time of winning to select the effect pattern are “100” to “999”. "Is selected as the effect pattern of the stock pseudo continuous production, and" 1 "is set in the stock pseudo continuous production flag.

  In this case, during the special symbol fluctuation display period (45000 milliseconds), first, a predetermined “stock effect” (an effect in which various mascots appear) is performed, and thereafter, a “pseudo consecutive effect” of a predetermined number of pseudo repetitions is performed. Is performed. Then, after the “simulated consecutive production” of a predetermined number of pseudo consecutive times is completed, a “reach production” called “special production D” is performed. For the contents of the “stock effect” and the “pseudo consecutive effect” performed at this time, refer to a pseudo consecutive number determination table (see FIG. 70 described later) and a mascot appearance number determination table (see FIG. 71 described later). Is determined.

[Dummy run count determination table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a description will be given of the pseudo consecutive number determination table.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of pseudo-runs in the stock pseudo continuous production is the number (the number of appearances) of “mascot C” (mascot points) appearing in “stock production” performed at the start of the stock pseudo continuous production. It changes according to. The pseudo repetition number determination table is a table that is referred to when the number of pseudo repetitions and the number of appearances of the mascot C are determined when the execution of the stock pseudo consecutive production is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the pseudo repetition number determination table includes the types of the variation patterns of the special symbols (“HN00” to “HN27”), a random number for selecting (determining) the repetition number, and the random number. The correspondence between the number of pseudo runs determined by numerical values and the data set of the number of appearances of the mascot C is defined. In addition, in the pseudo repetition number determination table, the fluctuation time (variation display period of the special symbol) and the winning type ("losing", "small hit" and "big hit") corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and the The selectivity is also specified.

  For example, in the special effect stage of the normal mode, it has been determined that the stock pseudo continuous effect is to be performed, and the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display is “HN27”. If the random number value obtained at the time of winning is any value of “900” to “999”, the number of pseudo runs in the stock pseudo continuous production is “15”, and the number of appearances of the mascot C is “3”. Become. In this case, “EG54” is selected as the effect pattern, as described in the above-described variable effect table (special effect stage).

  Therefore, in this case, during the special symbol fluctuation display period (45000 milliseconds) in which the stock pseudo continuous production is performed, first, the production is performed such that three mascots C appear in the "stock production", and then. , 15 “simulated consecutive productions” are performed. After the fifteen “simulated continuous productions” are completed, a “reach production” called “special production D” is performed.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, as described above, the number of appearances of the mascot C is the minimum number of executions of the “pseudo consecutive production”, and therefore is not shown in the pseudo consecutive number determination table of FIG. 70. However, for example, even when the number of appearances of the mascot C is “1”, the case where “simulated consecutive staging” is performed in the range of the number of pseudo repeated times of “1” to “15” is also specified. Further, since the number of appearances of the mascot C is the minimum number of executions of the “pseudo continuous production”, the number of mascots C that have appeared in the display area 13a of the display device 13 indicates the minimum number of executions of the “pseudo continuous production”. Will be.

[Mascot appearance number determination table]
Next, the mascot appearance number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.
As described above, in the “stock effect” performed at the start of the stock pseudo continuous effect, the mascot point is changed by the appearance of “mascot A” (mascot point “1”) and / or “mascot B” (mascot point “5”). "Mascot C" appears when the mascot points are added and the mascot points become 5 points or more. Therefore, there may be a plurality of combinations of the number of appearances of "mascot A" and the number of appearances of "mascot B" for causing a predetermined number of "mascot C" to appear. The mascot appearance number determination table is a combination of the number of appearances of “mascot A” and the number of appearances of “mascot B” according to the number of appearances of mascot C determined by the above-described pseudo-repetition number determination table (see FIG. 70). Is a table that is referred to when deciding.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the number of appearances of “mascot C”, the number of appearances of “mascot A”, and the number of appearances of “mascot A” are determined in the mascot appearance number determination table as shown in FIG. The correspondence between the random number for selecting (determining) the combination of the number of appearances of “mascot B” and the combination data of the number of appearances of “mascot A” and the number of appearances of “mascot B” determined by the random number is Stipulated. In the mascot appearance number determination table, the selection rate of each combination data is also specified.

  For example, the number of appearances of “mascot C” determined by lottery with reference to the pseudo-number-of-runs determination table shown in FIG. 70 is “2”, and a combination of the number of appearances of “mascot A” and the number of appearances of “mascot B” If the random number value acquired at the time of winning to select (determine) is any value from “800” to “899”, the number of appearances of “mascot A” is “4” and “mascot B” Is "2". In this case, the appearance order (appearance pattern) of “mascot A” and “mascot B” in the “stock effect” can be arbitrarily set as long as two “mascot C” appear.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the number of pseudo runs and the number of appearances of “mascot C” are uniquely determined according to the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not done. The number of appearances of “mascot C” is determined by lottery independently of the fluctuation pattern, and then, according to the number of appearances of “mascot C” determined, the number of appearances of “mascot A” and “mascot B” are determined by lottery. May be determined. Also, in this case, the number of appearances of each mascot may be determined by lottery in consideration of the fluctuation time set for each fluctuation pattern.

[Description of operation of main control circuit]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control main processing]
First, the main control main process under the control of the main CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main control main process in the present embodiment.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, first, the main CPU 71 performs an initial setting process (S1). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs processes such as permitting access to the main RAM 73, restoring a backup, and initializing a work area. Next, the main CPU 71 performs an update process of the initial value random number (S2). In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the initial random number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process (S3). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a predetermined control process regarding the progress of the special symbol game and the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) displayed on the special symbol display device 61. The details of the special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol control process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a predetermined control process related to the progress of the normal symbol game and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 62. The details of the ordinary symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs control processing of the symbol display device (S5). In this processing, the main CPU 71 changes the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and the normal symbol based on the execution results of the special symbol control process (S3) and the ordinary symbol control process (S4). Controls display.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a game information data generation process (S6). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates game information data to be transmitted to a hall computer or the like of the game store, and stores the game information data in the main RAM 73.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a storage / game state data generation process (S7). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probable change flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 73.

  Then, after the processing in S7, the main CPU 71 returns the processing to the processing in S2, and repeats the processing in S2 and thereafter.

[Special symbol control processing]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S3 in the main control main process (see FIG. 72) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol control process in the present embodiment. Numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses below the reference numerals of the respective processing steps shown in FIG. 73 indicate the values of the control status flags. Stored in the storage area. The main CPU 71 advances the special symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  First, the main CPU 71 loads a control state flag (S11). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73.

  The main CPU 71 determines, based on the value of the control state flag loaded in S11, whether to execute various processes in S12 to S20 described below. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any one of S12 to S20 to be executed.

  Further, the main CPU 71 executes the processing of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each processing of S12 to S20. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing the processing of each step. Of course, a system timer interrupt process described later (see FIG. 81 described later) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Then, when the processing of S11 ends, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol storage check processing (S12).

  In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of held special display variable displays, and if the number of held symbols is not “0”. In the case where there is a reserved ball, processing such as hit determination, determination of a special symbol, and determination of a variation pattern of the special symbol are performed.

  In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating a special symbol variation time management process (S13) described later, and corresponds to the variation pattern determined in the current process. Set the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S12 is set, the special symbol fluctuation time management processing described later is executed.

  On the other hand, when the reserved number is “0” (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 71 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. The details of the special symbol storage check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol variation time management process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, displays the special symbol display described later in the control status flag. The value ("02") indicating the time management process (S14) is set, and the wait time after determination is set in the wait time timer.

  That is, by this processing, the special symbol display time management processing described later is set to be executed after the elapse of the waiting time after determination set in the processing of S13. The details of the special symbol fluctuation time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol display time management process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and that if the waiting time after determination set in the process of S13 has elapsed, the result of the hit determination is determined. Is "big hit" or "small hit".

  When the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“03”) indicating a big hit start interval management process (S15) described later in the control state flag, The time corresponding to the big hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of S14 has elapsed, the big hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process (S20) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that a special symbol game end process described later is executed. The details of the special symbol display time management processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78 described later.

  Next, when the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit” in S14, the main CPU 71 performs a big hit start interval management process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to the value indicating the big hit start interval management process (“03”), and if the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of S14 has elapsed, the main CPU 71 executes the first process. In order to open the special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54, the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 72.

  In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating the processing for opening a special winning opening (S16), which will be described later, and sets a maximum opening time of the special winning opening (for example, 30 seconds). ) Is set to the special winning opening time timer. In other words, the processing is set so that the processing for opening the special winning opening described later is executed. The details of the jackpot start interval management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 41 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special winning opening opening process (S16). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the special winning opening processing, the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and It is determined whether one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied).

  In S16, if one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the predetermined special winning opening (the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening). I do.

  Then, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“05”) indicating the later-described winning prize opening ball surveillance process (S17) described later in the control state flag, and also sets the monitoring time of the remaining sphere in the winning prize opening to a waiting time timer. . That is, by this processing, after the remaining ball monitoring time in the special winning opening set in S17 elapses, it is set so that the processing for monitoring the remaining ball in the special winning opening described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (S17). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the process of monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening, and when the monitoring time of the remaining balls in the special winning opening has elapsed, the main CPU 71 sets the number of times of opening the special winning opening counter. It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied.

  In S17, when the main CPU 71 determines that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets a value ("06") indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets a time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, it is set so that the waiting time management processing before reopening of the special winning opening described later is executed.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S17 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets a value indicating the big hit end interval processing (“07”) in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the big hit end interval. (Big hit end interval time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the big hit end interval set in S17 elapses, the big hit end interval processing described later is set to be executed.

  Next, in S17, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the special winning opening release frequency counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 71 performs a special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management process ( S18).

  In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to the value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the special winning opening, and opens the special winning opening when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The value of the number-of-times counter is stored and updated so as to increase by "1".

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during the opening of the special winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 71 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening time timer. That is, by this processing, the setting is made so that the above-described large winning opening processing (S16) is executed again after the processing of S18.

  In S17, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the special winning opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the special opening opening number, the main CPU 71 performs a big hit end interval process (S19).

  In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value indicating the big hit end interval processing (“07”), and when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval elapses, the value indicating the special symbol game end processing (““ 08 ”) is set in the control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the special symbol game ending process described later is executed after the process of S19. The details of the big hit end interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

  Then, the main CPU 71 performs control to shift the gaming state to the probable variable gaming state when the big hit symbol is the probable variable symbol, and shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state when the big hit symbol is the non-probable variable game pattern. Is performed. When the big hit symbol is a symbol corresponding to "small hit", the main CPU 71 performs control to maintain the gaming state.

  Next, when the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state ends, or when "losing" is won, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol game ending process (S20).

  In this process, when the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“08”), the main CPU 71 updates the data indicating the number of held items (starting storage information) by “1”. I do. Further, the main CPU 71 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next change display of the special symbol.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the special symbol storage check process (S12) is executed after the process of S20.

  After the processing in S20, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol control processing, and shifts the processing to S4 of the main control main processing (see FIG. 72).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is neither the big hitting gaming state nor the small hitting gaming state and the result of the hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”. , "02", and "08".

  Accordingly, the main CPU 71 performs the special symbol memory check process (S12), the special symbol variation time management process (S13), the special symbol display time management process (S14), and the special symbol game end process (S20) in this order. Execute at a predetermined timing.

  The main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to “00” or “00” when the gaming state is neither the big hitting gaming state nor the small hitting gaming state and the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”. 01, 02, and 03.

  Accordingly, the main CPU 71 performs the special symbol storage check process (S12), the special symbol variation time management process (S13), the special symbol display time management process (S14), and the big hit start interval management process (S15) in this order. The control is executed at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed.

  Further, when the transition control to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “06”. Accordingly, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described processing during opening of the special winning opening (S16), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (S17), and the waiting time management processing before reopening of the special winning opening (S18) in this order at a predetermined timing. To execute a big hit game or a small hit game.

  When the big hit game state end condition is satisfied during the big hit game, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, and “08”. Accordingly, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described processing for opening the special winning opening (S16), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (S17), the processing for ending the big hit (S19), and the processing for ending the special symbol game (S20) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state ends.

  As described above, in the special symbol control processing, the processing flow is branched according to the status. Also, in the normal symbol control process of S4 in the main control main process shown in FIG. 72 (see FIG. 81 described later), the process flow is branched according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process, as described later. .

  The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the process is branched according to the status. As a result, compared to the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing, the present embodiment can reduce the capacity of the program.

[Special design memory check process]
Next, the special symbol storage check process performed in S12 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol storage check process in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("00") indicating a special symbol storage check process (S31). In S31, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not “00” (NO in S31), the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process, and executes the special symbol control process (FIG. 73). Back to see).

  On the other hand, in S31, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is “00” (if S31 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the second starting opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) is to be performed. It is determined whether or not the suspended number (the second start stored number) is “0” (S32).

  In S32, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of held second starting opening winnings is not “0” (NO in S32), the main CPU 71 sets the second starting opening corresponding to the number of held second starting opening winning. “1” is subtracted from the value of the start storage number (S33).

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73. It is determined whether or not there is a memory for starting the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being changed or held.

  In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the changing second special symbol is stored as start memory. In the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol held for four times. Is stored as start-up memory.

  The data included in the start memory stored in each of the second special symbol start storage areas is, for example, data such as a big hit determination random number and a big hit symbol random value acquired at the time of winning the second start opening 45. .

  After the process of S33, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the winning of the second starting opening (S34). In this process, the main CPU 71 transfers (stores) the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. Then, after the processing of S34, the main CPU 71 performs the processing of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, in S32, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of retained second starting opening winnings is “0” (in the case of YES determination in S32), the main CPU 71 determines the first starting opening winning (first special symbol). It is determined whether or not the reserved number (first start storage number) of “variable display” is “0” (S35).

  In S35, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of first winning opening winnings is "0" (YES in S35), the main CPU 71 performs a demo display process (S36). Then, after the process of S36, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

  In the demonstration display process of S36, the main CPU 71 sets a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 73. In other words, the main CPU 71 determines that the state in which the number of retained first start-port winning and the second starting-port winning is “0” (the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game is “0”) is a predetermined time (for example, If it is maintained for 30 seconds, a predetermined value is set as the demonstration display permission value.

  When the demonstration display permission value is the predetermined value in the demonstration display processing of S36, the main CPU 71 sets the demonstration display command data in the main RAM 73. The demonstration display command data is transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. Upon receiving the demonstration display command data, the sub-control circuit 200 displays a demonstration screen on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  On the other hand, in S35, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of retained first opening winnings is not “0” (NO in S35), the main CPU 71 corresponds to the number of retained first winning opening. "1" is subtracted from the value of the first start storage number (S37).

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73. It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol game start memory corresponding to the variable display of the fluctuating or pending first special symbol.

  In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the changing first special symbol is stored as start memory. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol for four times being held. Is stored as start-up memory.

  The data included in the start memory stored in each first special symbol start storage area is, for example, data such as a random number for a jackpot determination and a random number for a jackpot symbol acquired at the time of winning the first starting port 44. .

  After the process of S37, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first winning opening winning (S38). In this process, the main CPU 71 transfers (stores) the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. Then, after the processing in S38, the main CPU 71 performs the processing in S39 described later.

  Next, after the processing of S34 or S38, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management processing in the control state flag (S39).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a big hit determination process (S40). In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts the random number for jackpot determination extracted at the time of winning the starting opening and set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is obtained with reference to the big hit random number judgment table (FIG. 56 or FIG. 57) corresponding to the type of the winning opening. Then, the main CPU 71 determines (winning determination) which of “big hit”, “small hit” and “loss” has been won based on the acquired determination value data.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol determination process (S41). In this process, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 71 determines a big hit symbol as a special symbol.

  At this time, the main CPU 71 reads the jackpot symbol random number value extracted at the time of the start winning, determines a special symbol based on the jackpot symbol random value and the result of the hit determination, and stores data indicating the special symbol in the main CPU 71. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 73.

  Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 71 determines the big hit symbol as a special symbol, and when the result of the hit determination is "small hit" or "losing", A predetermined symbol set for each of "small hit" and "losing" is determined as a special symbol. At this time, when the special symbol is determined as a special display mode (a display mode in which the big hit symbol is a probable variable symbol), the main CPU 71 performs control to shift to the probable variable game state.

  The data indicating the special symbol stored in this way is supplied to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol display device 61 derives and displays the special symbol. The data indicating the special symbol stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a derived symbol designation command.

  Thereby, in the sub-control circuit 200, the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13. The details of the special symbol determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines the type of the game state (probable change, time saving and normal), the result of the hit determination (winning type: “big hit”, “small hit” or “losing”), the number of special symbols variably displayed (startup) A variation pattern determination process is performed based on the stored number) and a special symbol (big hit symbol or the like) (S42).

  In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a random number for effect condition selection. The main CPU 71 refers to the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 60) for determining the variation pattern based on the special symbols (big hit symbols and the like) determined as described above.

  Then, the main CPU 71 determines a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the effect condition selection random number value extracted from the effect condition selection random number counter and the big hit type determination table, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 determines a special symbol variation display mode (variable display time and the like) based on the data indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol.

  The stored data indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol is supplied to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol display device 61 variably displays the special symbol in the determined variation pattern.

  The stored data indicating the special pattern change pattern is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a change command (change pattern designation command). Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect display with the effect pattern corresponding to the received fluctuation command.

  After the processing of S42, the main CPU 71 sets a fluctuation time corresponding to the determined special pattern fluctuation pattern in the waiting time timer (S43). Next, the main CPU 71 clears information (data) of the storage area used for the current fluctuation display (S44). After the process of S44, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

[Special design decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the special symbol determination process performed in S41 during the special symbol storage check process (see FIG. 74) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol determination process in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination performed in the process of S40 during the special symbol storage check process is “big hit” (S51).

  In S51, when the main CPU 71 determines that the result of the hit determination is “big hit” (if S51 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines the big hit symbol based on the big hit symbol determination random number (S52). ).

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets the data of the determined big hit symbol (S53). Then, after the processing of S53, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol determination processing, and shifts the processing to S42 in the special symbol storage check processing (see FIG. 74).

  In the process of S52, the main CPU 71 supplies the big hit symbol data to the special symbol display device 61. Thereby, the special symbol display device 61 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a mode based on the big hit symbol data.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets a jackpot symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and transmits the command to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a derived symbol designation command. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the large hit mode of the identification symbol to be derived and displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  On the other hand, in S51, when the main CPU 71 determines that the result of the hit determination is not “big hit” (if S51 is NO), the main CPU 71 determines whether the result of the hit determination is “small hit”. It is determined (S54).

  In S54, when the main CPU 71 determines that the result of the hit determination is “small hit” (if S54 is YES), the main CPU 71 executes a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) corresponding to “small hit”. ) Is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 (S55). Then, after the processing of S55, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol determination processing, and shifts the processing to S42 in the special symbol storage check processing (see FIG. 74).

  In the process of S55, the main CPU 71 supplies small hit symbol data to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol display device 61 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a mode based on the small hit symbol data.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets a small hit symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and transmits the command to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a derived symbol designation command. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 derives and displays the small hit mode of the identification symbol in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  On the other hand, in S54, when the main CPU 71 determines that the result of the hit determination is not “small hit” (NO in S54), the main CPU 71 determines a predetermined special symbol (losing symbol) corresponding to “losing”. Is set (S56). After the processing of S56, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol determination processing, and shifts the processing to S42 in the special symbol storage check processing (see FIG. 74).

  In the process of S56, the main CPU 71 supplies the lost symbol data to the special symbol display device 61. Thereby, the special symbol display device 61 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a form based on the lost symbol data.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and transmits the lost symbol command to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a derived symbol designation command. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 derives and displays the loss pattern of the identification symbol on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a description will be given of the special symbol variation time management process performed in S13 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73). FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation time management process in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management processing (S61). In S61, if the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not the value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process (if S61 is NO), the main CPU 71 executes the special symbol variation time management process. The process ends, and the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, in S61, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management processing (if S61 is YES), the main CPU 71 sets the waiting time timer to It is determined whether the value is "0" (S62). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the waiting time timer has been consumed.

  In S62, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in S62), the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol fluctuation time management process, and executes the special symbol control process. (See FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, in S62, if the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (if S62 is YES), the main CPU 71 indicates a special symbol display time management process in the state control flag. The value ("02") is set (S63).

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets a symbol stop command in the main RAM 73 (S64). The symbol stop command set in the main RAM 73 is transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When receiving the symbol stop command, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes that the special symbol is stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets a waiting time (for example, 10 milliseconds) after the change is determined in the waiting time timer (S65). The waiting time after the change is determined (the change start waiting time) is a waiting time from the end of the change display of the special symbol to the start of the change display of the next special symbol. Then, after the processing of S65, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol fluctuation time management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

[Special symbol display time management processing]
Next, the special symbol display time management processing performed in S14 during the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 77 and FIG. 78 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special symbol display time management processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (if S71 is NO), the main CPU 71 executes the special symbol display time management processing. The process ends, and the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management processing (“02”) (if S71 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines whether the waiting time timer It is determined whether or not the value (waiting time) is “0” (S72). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time after the change set in the waiting time timer (change starting waiting time) has been consumed.

  In S72, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in S72), the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process, and executes the special symbol control process. (See FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, in S72, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (if S72 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol game is “big hit”. It is determined (S73).

  In S73, when the main CPU 71 determines that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (if S73 is YES), the main CPU 71 performs a process of S85 described later. On the other hand, in S73, when the main CPU 71 determines that the special symbol game is not “big hit” (NO in S73), the main CPU 71 sets a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“08”) in the control state flag. ) Is set (S74).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the number-of-time-save-state-change counter is “0” (S75).

  In S75, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time reduction state change frequency counter is “0” (if S75 is YES), the main CPU 71 performs the processing of S77 described later. On the other hand, in S75, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time reduction state change frequency counter is not “0” (if S75 is NO), the main CPU 71 subtracts “1” from the value of the time reduction state change frequency counter. (S76).

  After the processing of S76 or in the case of YES determination in S75, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the probability change state variation counter is “0” (S77).

  In S77, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability change state change number counter is “0” (if S77 is YES), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S79 described later.

  On the other hand, in S77, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability change state variation counter is not “0” (if S77 is NO), the main CPU 71 subtracts “1” from the value of the probability variation state variation counter. (S78).

  After the process of S78, or when the determination of S77 is YES, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the number-of-time-save-state-change number counter is “0” (S79).

  In S79, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time saving state change frequency counter is not “0” (when S79 is NO), the main CPU 71 determines whether the value of the probability change state change frequency counter is “0”. It is determined whether or not it is (S80).

  In S80, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability variation state change counter is not “0” (NO in S80), the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process, and executes the special symbol control. Return to the processing (see FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, in S80, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability variation state change counter is “0” (if S80 is YES), the main CPU 71 clears the gaming state flag (S81).

  Specifically, the main CPU 71 clears the probability change flag. Next, the main CPU 71 sets a gaming state command corresponding to the gaming state of “low probability of reduced working hours” (the “normal gaming state” and the “reduced working hours” state) (S82). Then, after the processing of S82, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

  In S79, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time reduction state change frequency counter is “0” (if S79 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the positive change state change frequency counter is “0”. It is determined whether it is (S83).

  In S83, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability change state variation counter is not “0” (NO in S83), the main CPU 71 clears the gaming state flag (S84).

  Specifically, the main CPU 71 clears the time reduction flag. Next, the main CPU 71 sets a gaming state command corresponding to the gaming state of “no high probability time saving” (the state of “probably changing gaming state” and “non-time saving gaming state”) (S85). Then, after the processing of S85, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, in S83, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability change state variation counter is “0” (YES in S83), the main CPU 71 clears the gaming state flag (S86). Specifically, the main CPU 71 clears the time reduction flag and the probability change flag.

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets a game state command corresponding to the game state of “no low probability time saving” (the state of “normal game state” and “non-time saving game state”) (S87). After the processing of S87, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

  Here, returning to the processing of S73, the processing performed when S73 is YES is described. When S73 is YES, the main CPU 71 sets the big hit flag to the ON state (S88). The big hit flag is a flag indicating whether or not to play a big hit game.

  Next, the main CPU 71 clears the value of the special winning opening counter, the value of the game state flag, and the value of the time reduction state change frequency counter (S89). Next, the main CPU 71 sets a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control status flag (S90).

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets a big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 milliseconds) corresponding to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (S91). Next, the main CPU 71 sets a big hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 73 (S92).

  Next, the main CPU 71 refers to the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 60) and sets the round number upper limit value (big winning opening opening frequency upper limit value) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designating command) in the main RAM 73. (S93).

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets the round number display LED pattern flag to the ON state (S94). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not the remaining round number is displayed in a predetermined pattern. Then, after the processing of S94, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

[Big hit start interval management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a description will be given of the jackpot start interval management process performed in S15 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73). FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot start interval management process in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management processing (S101).

  In S101, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not the value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management processing (if S101 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the big hit start interval management processing. , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, in S101, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is the value indicating the big hit start interval management processing (“03”) (if S101 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines the value of the waiting time timer. Is determined to be "0" (S102). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the big hit start interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted.

  In S102, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in S102), the main CPU 71 ends the big hit start interval management process, and executes the special symbol control process ( Return to FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, in S102, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (if S102 is YES), the main CPU 71 sets the large winning opening opening display command data in the main RAM 73. (S103).

  Note that the special winning opening open command data set in the main RAM 73 in this process is transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing for opening the special winning opening to the control state flag (S104). Next, the main CPU 71 clears the special winning opening winning counter (S105). Next, the main CPU 71 sets the special winning opening time to a waiting time timer (S106).

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets the large winning opening opening data (S107). The special winning opening opening data is data indicating that the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54 is being opened.

  In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the variables located in the main RAM 73 based on the data read from the main ROM 72 in order to open the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54.

  By updating the variables in this manner, the solenoid actuators related to the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54 are driven to open the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54. Then, after the processing of S107, the main CPU 71 ends the big hit start interval management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

[Big hit end interval processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the big hit end interval processing performed in S19 in the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end interval process in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating the big hit end interval processing (S111).

  In S111, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not the value indicating the jackpot end interval processing (“07”) (NO in S111), the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval processing, and Is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, in S111, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is the value indicating the big hit end interval processing (“07”) (if S111 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is It is determined whether it is "0" (S112). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted.

  In S112, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in S112), the main CPU 71 ends the big hit end interval processing, and executes the special symbol control processing (FIG. 73). On the other hand, in S112, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (if S112 is YES), the main CPU 71 clears the round number display LED pattern flag (S113).

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end processing in the control state flag (S114). Next, the main CPU 71 clears the gaming state flag (S115).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the probable change flag is “1” (whether or not the probable change flag is on) (S116). As described above, in the present embodiment, after the big hit game is over, the game state becomes the “probable change game state”, so the value of the probable change flag is also “1”.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, normally, S116 is determined as YES. In the case of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 60, if the value of the probability change flag is specified for the symbol designation command (big hit symbol), the main CPU 71 refers to the big hit type determination table in S116, It is determined whether or not the value of the probability change flag is “1” according to the type of the big hit symbol (symbol designating command) determined by the special symbol determination process.

  In S116, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability change flag is not “1” (NO in S116), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S119 described later. On the other hand, in S116, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability change flag is “1” (if S116 is YES), the main CPU 71 sets the gaming state flag (S117). Specifically, the main CPU 71 sets a probability change flag. Next, the main CPU 71 sets “200” to the value of the probability change state variation counter (S118).

  Then, after the processing of S118, or when S116 is NO, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction flag is “1” (whether the time reduction flag is on) (S119).

  In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the big hit type determination table, and sets the value of the time reduction flag according to the type of the big hit symbol (symbol designating command) determined by the special symbol determination process and the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning. Is determined to be “1”.

  In S119, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time reduction flag is “1” (if S119 is YES), the main CPU 71 sets the “time reduction game state” to the game state flag (S120). .

  Specifically, the main CPU 71 sets a time reduction flag. Next, the main CPU 71 refers to the big hit type determination table, and according to the type of the big hit symbol (symbol designating command) determined by the special symbol determination process and the game state at the time of the big hit winning, the value of the corresponding number of times of shortening. Is set in the time-saving state change frequency counter (S121). Then, after the processing in S121, the main CPU 71 ends the big hit end interval processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, in S119, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time reduction flag is not “1” (if S119 is NO), the main CPU 71 sets the game state flag to “non-time reduction game state” ( S122). Then, after the processing of S122, the main CPU 71 ends the big hit end interval processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

[Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the ordinary symbol control process performed in S4 in the main control main process (see FIG. 72) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol control process in the present embodiment.

  Numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses below the reference numerals of the respective processing steps in the flowchart shown in FIG. 81 indicate a normal symbol control state flag. It is stored in a predetermined storage area in the RAM 73. The main CPU 71 advances the normal symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  First, the main CPU 71 loads a normal symbol control state flag (S131). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads out the ordinary symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 73.

  The main CPU 71 determines, based on the value of the ordinary symbol control state flag loaded in S131, whether to execute various processes in S132 to S136 described below. The normal control control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any of the processes of S132 to S136.

  Further, the main CPU 71 executes the processing of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each processing of S132 to S136. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing the processing of each step. Of course, a system timer interrupt process described later (see FIG. 82 described later) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Then, when the process of S131 is completed, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol storage check process (S132).

  In this process, when the ordinary symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the ordinary symbol memory check process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of suspended symbols for variable display of ordinary symbols, and the number of symbols retained is “0”. If not, a process such as a hit determination is performed.

  Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“01”) indicating the later-described ordinary symbol variation time monitoring process (S133) in the ordinary symbol control state flag, and sets the variation time determined in this process. Set the wait time timer. That is, by this processing, after the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol determined in the processing of S132 elapses, the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring processing described later is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol variation time monitoring process (S133). In this processing, the main CPU 71 sets the ordinary symbol control status flag to a value (“01”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation time monitoring process, and sets the ordinary symbol control status flag to the later-described symbol when the variation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed. A value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (S134) is set, and the wait time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the wait time timer.

  That is, by this process, after the elapse of the waiting time after determination set in the process of S133, it is set so that the later-described ordinary symbol display time monitoring process is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (S134). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and determines that a hit has occurred when the waiting time after determination set in the process of S133 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the result is “hit”.

  Then, if the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 71 performs a normal electric accessory opening setting process, and sets a value indicating the later-described normal electric accessory opening process (S135) in the normal symbol control state flag (S135). "03") is set. That is, the processing is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening processing described later is executed by this processing.

  On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not “hit”, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (S136) described later in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that a later-described ordinary symbol game ending process is executed.

  Next, when it is determined in S134 that the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 71 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (S135). In this process, when the ordinary symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the ordinary electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 71 has won a predetermined number of start winnings while the ordinary electric accessory 46 is being opened. It is determined whether one of the condition described above and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 has elapsed (the ordinary electric opening time timer is “0”) has been satisfied.

  In S135, when one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the blade member, which is the ordinary electric accessory 46. Then, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (S136) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that a later-described ordinary symbol game ending process is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol game end process (S136). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 71 reduces the data indicating the number of variable symbols to be held for variable display by “1”. Is updated.

  Further, the main CPU 71 updates the ordinary symbol storage area in order to perform the next variable display of the ordinary symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the above-described ordinary symbol storage check process (S132) is executed after the process of S136.

  Then, after the processing of S136, the main CPU 71 ends the ordinary symbol control processing, and shifts the processing to S5 of the main control main processing (FIG. 72).

[System timer interrupt processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 interrupts the main process at a predetermined cycle and executes a system timer interrupt process even during the execution of the main process. Specifically, the main CPU 71 executes a system timer interrupt process according to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit 74.

  Here, the system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the system timer interrupt processing according to the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 saves the data (information) of each register (S141). Next, the main CPU 71 performs a random number update process (S142). In this process, the main CPU 71 updates various random numbers extracted from the big hit determination counter, the symbol determination counter, the hit determination counter, the fall determination counter, the variation pattern determination counter, the effect pattern determination counter, and the like. .

  It should be noted that the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter lack fairness if the counter value update timing is indefinite. Therefore, the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter are updated at a predetermined timing every 2 milliseconds in order to ensure fairness.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a switch input detection process (S143). In this process, the main CPU 71 detects a winning or passing to various starting ports, various winning ports, and the ball passing detector 43. The details of the switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a timer update process (S144). Specifically, the main CPU 71 includes various timers such as a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 70 and the sub control circuit 200, and a special winning opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening. Update processing.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a command output process (S145). In this process, the main CPU 71 outputs various commands such as a winning command and a fluctuation command to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a game information output process (S146). In this process, the main CPU 71 outputs various kinds of information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 123, and the like to a hall computer or the like of the game store.

  Next, the main CPU 71 restores the data of each register saved in S141 (S147). Then, after the processing of S147, the main CPU 71 ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[Switch input detection processing]
Next, the switch input detection processing performed in S143 during the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch input detection process in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 performs a start opening passage detection process (S151). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45.

  That is, the main CPU 71 detects whether or not the winning of the game ball is detected by the first starting opening winning ball sensor 44a or the second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a. It should be noted that the details of the starting port passage detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (S152). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 51 or 52. That is, the main CPU 71 detects whether or not the winning of the game ball is detected by the general winning ball sensor 51a or 52a. Then, when a winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 51 or 52 is detected, the main CPU 71 performs various predetermined processes corresponding to the winning.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (S153). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54.

  That is, the main CPU 71 detects whether or not the winning of the game ball is detected by the first winning port solenoid 53b or the second winning port solenoid 54b. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the first big winning opening 53 or the second big winning opening 54 is detected, the main CPU 71 performs various predetermined processes corresponding to the winning.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a gate passage detection process (S154). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether the game ball has passed the ball passage detector 43 or not. That is, the main CPU 71 detects whether or not the passing of the game ball is detected by the passing ball sensor 43a.

  Then, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the ball passage detector 43, the main CPU 71 performs various predetermined processes corresponding to the passage. Then, after the processing of S154, the main CPU 71 ends the switch input detection processing, and moves the processing to S144 of the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 81).

[Starting port passage detection processing]
Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 84, of the starting-port passage detection processing performed in S151 in the switch input detection processing (see FIG. 83). FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting-port passage detection processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not winning of a game ball to the first starting port 44 is detected based on the output signal of the first starting port winning ball sensor 44a (S161).

  In S161, when the main CPU 71 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 44 has not been detected (NO in S161), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S167 described later.

  On the other hand, in S161, when the main CPU 71 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 44 is detected (in the case of YES determination in S161), the main CPU 71 determines the payout information corresponding to the first starting port winning. Is set in the main RAM 73 (S162). In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first starting port 44, three game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the process of S162, payout information of three game balls is set.

  After the processing of S162, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of reserves (the number of reserve balls) of the first starting opening winning (variable display of the first special symbol) is less than “4” (S163).

  In S163, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of retained first starting opening winnings is not less than “4” (if S163 is NO), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S167 described later. On the other hand, in S163, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of pending first opening openings is less than “4” (if S163 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines the number of retained first opening openings. A process of adding “1” is performed (S164).

  After the processing of S164, the main CPU 71 acquires various random numbers used for the lottery, and stores the acquired various random values in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 (S165). Specifically, the main CPU 71 acquires a big hit determination random number value and a big hit symbol random number value.

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets the number-of-first-start-port-winning-reserve-number increase command data in the main RAM 73 (S166). Note that the command data for increasing the number of first start-up winnings set in the main RAM 73 in this process is transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200.

  After the process of S166, or in the case of NO determination in S161 or S163, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 45 is detected based on the output signal of the second starting port winning ball sensor 45a. It is determined whether or not it is (S167).

  In S167, when the main CPU 71 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 45 has not been detected (NO in S167), the main CPU 71 ends the starting port passage detection processing, and To S152 of the switch input detection process (see FIG. 83).

  On the other hand, in S167, when the main CPU 71 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 45 has been detected (YES in S167), the main CPU 71 determines the payout information corresponding to the second starting port winning. Is set in the main RAM 73 (S168). In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 45, three game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the process of S168, payout information of three game balls is set.

  After the processing of S168, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of reserves (the number of reserve balls) of the second starting opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) is less than “4” (S169).

  In S169, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of held second starting opening winnings is not less than “4” (NO in S169), the main CPU 71 ends the starting opening passage detection processing, and switches the processing. The process moves to S152 of the input detection process (FIG. 83).

  On the other hand, in S169, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of retained second starting opening prizes is less than “4” (if S169 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines the number of retained second starting opening prizes. A process of adding “1” is performed (S170).

  After the processing of S170, the main CPU 71 acquires various random numbers used for the lottery, and stores the acquired various random numbers in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 (S171). Specifically, the main CPU 71 acquires a big hit determination random number value and a big hit symbol random number value.

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets the number-of-reserved-number-of-second-start-port winning command data in the main RAM 73 (S172). In this process, the command data for increasing the number of retained second winning openings set in the main RAM 73 is transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. Then, after the processing in S172, the main CPU 71 ends the starting port passage detection processing, and moves the processing to S152 in the switch input detection processing (FIG. 83).

  As described above, in the starting opening passage detection processing, when a starting opening winning is generated during the special symbol fluctuation display period, a lottery result (various random numbers) performed at the time of the winning is stored as a holding ball, and this processing is performed. Is executed by the main control circuit 70.

  In other words, the main control circuit 70 also serves as a means for storing, as a reserved ball, a lottery result performed at the time of the winning when a starting mouth winning is generated during the special symbol fluctuation display period (reserved ball storage means).

[Description of operation of sub-control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The sub-control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and performs various processes based on the various commands.

[Sub-control main processing]
First, the sub-control main process under the control of the sub-CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-control main process in the present embodiment. The sub-control main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

  First, the sub CPU 201 performs an initialization process (S181). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs various initial setting processes such as an access permission process of the work RAM 203 and a process of initializing a work area of the work RAM 203, for example.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a random number update process (S182). In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the random number stored in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a command analysis process (S183). In this process, the sub CPU 201 analyzes the contents of the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203. The details of the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs an effect process (S184). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 sets (registers) various data required for executing the various notification effects and the pre-read specialization zone effects in each of the above-described effect modes. The registration (setting) process of various effects performed in the process of S184 will be separately described for each effect with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a display control process (S185). In this process, first, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying a predetermined effect image to the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 to the display control circuit 205.

  Next, based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201, a VDP (Video Display Processor) provided in the display control circuit 205 converts various image data such as decorative design data, background image data, and effect image data into image data. Read from data ROM. Then, the VDP superimposes the read various image data and displays a predetermined effect image on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a voice control process (S186). In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the sound control circuit 206 to perform a process of controlling sound generated from the speaker 11. Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a lamp control process (S187).

  In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the lamp control circuit 207 to control the light emission of the lamp 18. Then, after the processing of S187, the sub CPU 201 returns the processing to the processing of S182, and repeats the processing of S182 and thereafter.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the various effects described above are executed by the sub-control circuit 200 by the series of effect control processes of S184 to S187. That is, the sub-control circuit 200 performs, for example, a means for performing an effect before the start of the prefetch specialization zone described above, an effect at the start of the prefetch specialization zone, and the like (first pre-production effect control means), It also serves as a means for executing the middle production (second preliminary production control means). In addition, the sub-control circuit 200 controls the operation of the latent-expected-degree notification effect performed in the mode A described above (expected-degree notifying unit), and the unit that controls the operation of the latent-number-of-expected information notification performed in the mode B described above. (First lottery number notification means) and means for controlling the operation of the time saving number notification effect performed in the mode C described above (second lottery number notification means) are also used. Further, the sub-control circuit 200 controls the operation of the “stock effect” in the stock pseudo consecutive effect performed in the special effect stage of the normal mode described above (pseudo consecutive effect means), and the “pseudo consecutive effect”. It also serves as a means for controlling the operation (pseudo continuous production means).

[Command analysis processing]
Next, the command analysis processing performed in S183 in the sub-control main processing (see FIG. 85) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the command analysis processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a command received in a later-described sub-control circuit interrupt process (see FIG. 92 described later) (S191). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S191 that there is no received command (NO in step S191), the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process and proceeds to step S184 of the sub control main process (see FIG. 85). Move.

  On the other hand, in S191, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command (YES in S191), the sub CPU 201 reads the received command and analyzes the contents of the received command (S192).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a variation command (a command for specifying the content of the variation pattern of the special symbol) based on the analysis result of the received command in S192 (S193).

  In S193, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a winning command (if S193 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs prefetch effect flag determination processing (S194). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 refers to the look-ahead effect flag table (see FIG. 63), and based on the winning pattern, performs lottery by lottery to set each value (“0” or “1”) of the variable look-ahead flag and the look-ahead specialized zone flag. ) And set it. The details of the prefetch effect flag determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later. Then, after the processing of S194, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing, and moves the processing to S184 of the sub-control main processing (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, in S193, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the winning command (NO in S193), the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a fluctuation command (the content of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol). Command) (S195).

  In S193, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a fluctuation command (if S193 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs a fluctuation effect pattern determination process (S194). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines various fluctuation effect patterns of the special symbol (including the effect pattern of the special look-ahead special zone effect and the stock pseudo continuous effect) based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. The details of the variable effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89 described later. Then, after the processing of S196, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing, and moves the processing to S184 of the sub-control main processing (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, in S195, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a variable command (if S195 is NO), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the received command is a derived symbol designating command ( S195).

  In S197, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the derived symbol designating command (if S197 is YES), the sub CPU 201 determines the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the derived symbol designating command. The decorative symbol to be derived and displayed is determined (S198). Then, after the processing of S196, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing, and moves the processing to S184 of the sub-control main processing (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, in S197, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the derived symbol designating command (if S197 is NO), the sub CPU 201 sets effect control data corresponding to the received command (S199). Then, after the processing in S199, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing, and moves the processing to S184 of the sub-control main processing (see FIG. 85).

[Prefetch effect flag determination processing]
Next, the look-ahead effect flag determination process performed in S194 during the command analysis process (see FIG. 86) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch effect flag determination process in the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 refers to the look-ahead effect flag table (see FIG. 63), and based on the winning command (the winning pattern obtained by the analysis result of the received command), sets each value of the variable look-ahead flag and the look-ahead special zone flag. ("0" or "1") is selected (S201). In the present embodiment, the values of the variable look-ahead flag and the look-ahead specialized zone flag are determined by lottery based on the winning command. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The values of the variable prefetch flag and the prefetch specialization zone flag may be uniquely determined accordingly.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 registers the value of the selected variable prefetch flag in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 (S202). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the selected pre-read specialization zone flag is “1” (S203).

  In S203, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the prefetch specialization zone flag is not “1” (NO in S203), the sub CPU 201 ends the prefetch effect flag determination process and executes the command analysis process ( 86 is ended. On the other hand, in S203, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the prefetch specialized zone flag is “1” (in the case of YES determination in S203), the sub CPU 201 stores the value of the prefetch specialized zone flag in the work RAM 203. It is registered in a predetermined area (S204).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 registers a pre-read specialization zone start flag for the variable display of the predetermined special symbol (reserved ball) from the variable display of the reserved special symbol (reserved ball) (S205). In this process, the variable display (reserved ball) of the special symbol for which the pre-read specialization zone start flag is set is determined by the lottery process. With this process, the pre-read specialization zone is started from the variable display of the predetermined special symbol in which the pre-read special zone start flag is registered.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 selects a special display variable zone (reserved ball) for which the shift to the special look-ahead special zone has been determined from the special symbol variable display (reserved ball) for which the special symbol is reserved. An end flag is registered (S206). Note that the pre-read specialization zone end flag is a flag indicating whether or not to end the pre-read specialization zone production. If the value of the pre-read specialization zone completion flag is “1”, the pre-read specialization special zone production is performed. Is completed, and if the value of the prefetch specialization zone end flag is “0”, the prefetch specialization zone effect is continued. In other words, the value of the pre-read specialization zone end flag is “0” in the reserved sphere related to the pre-read specialization zone effect other than the variable display (reserved sphere) of the special symbol determined to shift to the pre-read specialization zone.

  Then, after the process of S206, the sub CPU 201 ends the prefetch effect flag determination process and also ends the command analysis process (see FIG. 86).

  As described above, in the look-ahead effect flag determination process, it is determined whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect (advance effect) based on the content of the winning pattern (contents of the reserved ball) acquired at the time of starting opening winning. The processing is executed by the sub control circuit 200. That is, the sub-control circuit 200 also serves as a means (preliminary effect determination means) for determining whether or not to execute a prefetch effect (preliminary effect).

[Variation effect pattern determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 89, a description will be given of the variable effect pattern determination processing performed in S196 during the command analysis processing (see FIG. 86). FIG. 88 and FIG. 89 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the variable effect pattern determination processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current production mode is the normal mode and whether the production stage is a special production stage for performing a stock pseudo continuous production (S211). During the normal mode, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift the production stage to a special production stage for performing a stock pseudo continuous production.

  In S211, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the production mode is the normal mode and the production stage is the special production stage for performing the stock pseudo continuous production (when S211 is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the processing in S218 described later. Perform processing. On the other hand, in S211, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the production mode is the normal mode and the production stage is not the special production stage for performing the stock pseudo continuous production (if S211 is NO), the sub CPU 201 performs the pre-read specialization. It is determined whether or not the value of the zone flag is “1” (ON state) (S212).

  In S212, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the special look-ahead zone flag is “1” (if S212 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs a special look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination process (S217). . The details of the look-ahead specialized zone effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S217, the sub CPU 201 ends the variable effect pattern determination process and also ends the command analysis process (see FIG. 86).

  On the other hand, in S212, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-read specialization zone flag is not “1” (when S212 is NO), the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the variable pre-read flag to “1” (ON state). ) Is determined (S213).

  In S213, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the variable prefetch flag is not “1” (if S213 is NO), the sub CPU 201 refers to the fluctuation effect table (No prefetch) of FIG. Based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the (fluctuation command), the fluctuation effect pattern when there is no pre-reading effect is determined by lottery (S214).

  Specifically, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern and a pseudo continuous effect flag defined in the change effect table (no pre-reading) in FIG. 64 based on the change pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores the determined variation effect pattern in the work RAM 203. Then, after the process of S214, the sub CPU 201 ends the variable effect pattern determination process and also ends the command analysis process (see FIG. 86).

  On the other hand, in S213, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the variable look-ahead flag is “1” (in the case of YES determination in S213), the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation effect table (pre-read) with reference to FIG. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the received command (fluctuation command), the fluctuation effect pattern when there is a pre-reading effect is determined by lottery (S215). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern defined in the change effect table (with pre-reading) in FIG. 65 and a pattern effect and / or a background effect based on the change pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores the determined variation effect pattern in the work RAM 203.

  After the processing in S215, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the variable prefetch flag to “0” (S216). After the process of S216, the sub CPU 201 ends the variable effect pattern determination process and also ends the command analysis process (see FIG. 86).

  Here, returning to the description of the processing of S211 again, the processing performed when S211 is determined to be YES will be described. If the determination in S211 is YES, the sub CPU 201 determines the fluctuation effect pattern in the special effect stage by lottery based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the fluctuation effect table (special effect stage) of FIG. 69 (S218). . Specifically, the sub CPU 201 is defined by a lottery in the fluctuation effect table (special effect stage) of FIG. 69 based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the received command (fluctuation command). An effect pattern and a stock pseudo continuous effect flag are selected. Then, the sub CPU 201 stores the determined variation effect pattern in the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the stock pseudo consecutive effect flag is “1” (S219). In S219, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the stock pseudo continuous production flag is not “1” (if S219 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the variable production pattern determination processing and executes the command analysis processing ( 86 is ended.

  On the other hand, in S219, when sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the stock pseudo continuous production flag is “1” (in the case of YES determination in S219), sub CPU 201 performs a stock pseudo continuous production pattern determination process (S220). ). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines, for example, the number of pseudo-runs in the stock pseudo-continuous production, the appearance of various mascots, and the like. The details of the stock pseudo continuous effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later. Then, after the process of S220, the sub CPU 201 ends the variable effect pattern determination process and also ends the command analysis process (see FIG. 86).

[Prefetch specialization zone effect pattern determination processing]
Next, the look-ahead specialized zone effect pattern determination process performed in S217 in the variable effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch specialization zone effect pattern determination process in the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the pre-read specialization zone start flag set at the time of acquiring the winning pattern is “1” (ON state) (S231). That is, in this determination processing, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current variable display of the special symbol is the variable display of the special symbol that performs an effect at the start of the prefetch specialization zone.

  In S231, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the prefetch specialization zone start flag is “1” (in the case of YES determination in S231), that is, at the time of starting the prefetch specialization zone in the current special symbol variation display. The sub CPU 201 refers to the variation effect table (at the start of the special look-ahead zone) of FIG. 67 and performs a prefetch by lottery based on the variation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the received command. The variable effect pattern in the effect at the start of the specialization zone is determined (S232). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern defined in the change effect table (at the start of the pre-reading specialization zone) in FIG. 67, and a pattern effect and a background effect based on the change pattern of the special symbol. .

  After the process of S232, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the pre-read specialization zone start flag to “0” (S233). Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the pre-read specialization zone flag to “1” (S234). Then, after the process of S234, the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S238 described later.

  On the other hand, in S231, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the prefetch specialization zone start flag is not “1” (if S231 is NO), the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the prefetch specialization special zone flag to “1”. (ON state) (S235). In other words, in this determination process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current special symbol variation display is a special symbol variation display that performs an effect in the pre-read specialization zone. The value of the pre-read specialization zone flag is set to “1” (on state) when the fluctuation effect pattern of the effect at the start of the pre-read specialization zone is determined, as described in the processing of S234. You.

  In S235, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the prefetch specialization zone flag is “1” (in the case of YES determination in S235), that is, in the current special symbol variation display, the subreading specialization zone is not displayed. When performing an effect, the sub CPU 201 refers to the fluctuation effect table (in the pre-read specialization zone) of FIG. 68 and performs specialization of pre-read by lottery based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the received command. The variable effect pattern in the effect in the zone is determined (S236). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern defined in the change effect table (in the pre-read specialization zone) of FIG. 68 based on the change pattern of the special symbol. Then, after the processing of S236, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S238 described later.

  On the other hand, in S235, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-read specialization zone flag is not “1” (in the case of NO determination in S235), that is, in the current special symbol variation display, the pre-read specialization zone starts. When performing the previous effect, the sub CPU 201 refers to the fluctuation effect table (before the start of the special look-ahead zone) of FIG. 66, and draws a lottery based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol obtained based on the analysis result of the received command. A variable effect pattern in the effect before the start of the pre-read specialization zone is determined (S237). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern defined in the change effect table (before the start of the pre-reading specialization zone) in FIG. 66 and a pattern effect or a background effect based on the change pattern of the special symbol. . Then, after the processing in S237, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing in S238 described later.

  After the processing of S234, S236 or S237, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the pre-read specialization zone end flag set at the time of winning pattern acquisition is “1” (ON state) (S238). That is, in this processing, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current variable display of the special symbol is the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball for which the shift to the prefetch specialization zone has been determined.

  In S238, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-read specialization zone end flag is not “1” (if S238 is NO), that is, if the pre-read specialization zone effect is continued, the sub CPU 201 At the same time as ending the look-ahead specialized zone effect pattern determination process, the variable effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89) also ends.

  On the other hand, in S238, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the prefetch specialization zone end flag is “1” (if S238 is YES), that is, if the prefetch specialization zone effect is to be ended, the sub CPU 201 Sets the value of the prefetch specialization zone flag to "0" (S239). Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the pre-read specializing zone flag to “0” (S240). Then, after the process of S240, the sub CPU 201 ends the pre-read specialization zone effect pattern determination process and also ends the variable effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89).

[Stock pseudo continuous production pattern determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a description will be given of the stock pseudo consecutive effect pattern determination process performed in S220 in the variable effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89). FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the stock pseudo continuous effect pattern determination process in the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 refers to the pseudo-run count determination table of FIG. 70, and determines the pseudo-run count by lottery based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the received command (S251). Then, the sub CPU 201 stores the determined number of pseudo runs in the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines the number of appearances of the mascot C based on the number of pseudo runs determined in S251 with reference to the pseudo run count determination table of FIG. 70 (S252). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 may determine the number of appearances of the mascot C by lottery based on the number of pseudo runs. Then, the sub CPU 201 stores the determined number of appearances of the mascot C in the work RAM 203. In the present embodiment, as shown in the pseudo-repeating-number determination table of FIG. 70, the pseudo-repeating number and the mascot C appearance number in the stock pseudo-repeated production can be determined at the same time based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this case, the processes of S251 and S252 may be performed simultaneously.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 refers to the mascot appearance number determination table of FIG. 71 and determines the mascot A appearance number and the mascot B appearance number by lottery based on the mascot C appearance number determined in S252 (S253). Then, the sub CPU 201 stores the determined number of appearances of the mascot A and the number of appearances of the mascot B in the work RAM 203.

  Next, based on the number of appearances of mascot A and the number of appearances of mascot B determined in S253, the sub CPU 201 determines the appearance of mascot A and mascot B in the stock pseudo continuous production (for example, the timing at which each mascot appears, each mascot). Are determined (S254). Then, after the process of S254, the sub CPU 201 ends the stock pseudo continuous effect pattern determination process and also ends the variable effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89).

  As described above, in S252 of the stock pseudo continuous production pattern determination process, the number of appearances of the mascot C (the number of executions of the appearance production of the mascot C) is determined based on the number of pseudo continuous productions. Is executed by That is, the sub-control circuit 200 also functions as a means for determining the number of appearances of the mascot C based on the number of pseudo runs (first effect number determination means). In S253 of the stock pseudo continuous production pattern determination process, the number of appearances of mascots A and B (the number of executions of appearance productions of mascots A and B) is determined based on the number of appearances of mascot C. This is executed by the control circuit 200. That is, the sub-control circuit 200 also functions as a means for determining the number of appearances of the mascots A and B based on the number of appearances of the mascot C (second effect number determination means).

[Sub-control circuit interrupt processing]
In pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, sub CPU 201 interrupts the sub-control main process and executes the interrupt process at a predetermined cycle even during the execution of the sub-control main process. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 executes an interrupt process according to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) in the sub control circuit 200. .

  Here, the sub-control circuit interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-control circuit interrupt processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 performs a random number update process (S261). In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the random number stored in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. At this time, the sub CPU 201 performs a random number updating process so as to increase the value of the effect pattern determination counter by “1”.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a command receiving process (S262). In this process, the sub CPU 201 receives various commands transmitted from various control circuits (the main control circuit 70, the display control circuit 205, the audio control circuit 206, the lamp control circuit 207, etc.) to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a timer update process (S263). In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates various timers stored in the work RAM 203 for counting various processing times.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a command output process (S264). In this process, the sub CPU 201 outputs various commands to various control circuits (the display control circuit 205, the audio control circuit 206, the lamp control circuit 207, and the like).

  Then, after the processing of S264, the sub CPU 201 ends the sub control circuit interrupt processing. As a result, the address of the processing program returns to the address before the occurrence of the interrupt processing.

<Various notification processing by sub-control circuit>
Next, registration processing of various notification effects (set processing of various data necessary for execution of effects) performed in the effect process (S184) in the sub-control main process described with reference to FIG. 85 will be described. More specifically, registration processing of a latent-expected-degree-reporting effect performed in the mode A described in FIGS. The details of the number-of-probable-numbers notification process) and the process of registering the time-saving number notification effect performed in the mode C (time-saving number notification process) will be described. In addition, the processing order of the latent expectation degree informing process, the latent number of times informing process, and the time saving number informing process in the rendering process (S184) can be arbitrarily set.

[Sensitivity expectation notification process]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the effect mode is the mode A, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation of a latent reliability is performed (see FIG. 49). Here, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of a latent-expected-degree notification process (a rank effect registration process) performed by the sub CPU 201 in the mode A. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latent probability expectation degree notifying process in the present embodiment.

  In the processing shown in FIG. 93, mainly the processing for determining the effect at the time of fluctuation in mode A and the processing for determining whether to change the effect mode of mode A (notification mode of the latent expectation degree) are performed. . In mode A, even when there is no fluctuation, the latent expectation degree is reported on the background or the like at the time of non-variation displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13. In the process shown in FIG. Based on the lottery result, it is determined by lottery whether or not to change the mode of presentation of mode A (the mode of reporting the degree of latent expectation) displayed before the change (when there is no change).

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current effect mode is mode A (S271).

  In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is provided with flags (normal mode selection flag, mode A selection flag to mode D selection flag) for managing the type of the effect mode currently being executed. In the process of S271, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect mode is the mode A by referring to the value (“0” or “1”) of the mode A selection flag stored in the work RAM 203. I do. When the value of the mode A selection flag is “1”, it indicates that the effect of mode A is being executed.

  In S271, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the current production mode is not the mode A (when S271 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the latent expectation degree informing process, and executes the sub control main process (FIG. 85). On the other hand, in S271, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the current production mode is the mode A (when S271 is YES), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the “probable changing gaming state”. (S272).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, various commands are transmitted from the main CPU 71 to the sub CPU 201 at the timing of, for example, changing the display of a special symbol, updating the gaming state flag, or each predetermined time. Includes information on the game state controlled by the main CPU 71 (for example, the value of the time saving flag, the value of the probability change flag, and the like).

  Therefore, in the process of S272, the sub CPU 201 refers to the information on the gaming state (the value of the probable change flag) included in the various commands transmitted from the main CPU 71 and determines whether or not the gaming state is the “probable changing game state”. Is determined.

  In S272, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the game state is the “probable change game state” (if S272 is YES), the sub CPU 201 refers to the probable change state rank effect table (not shown) and An effect is selected (S273). On the other hand, in S272, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the game state is not the “probable change game state” (if S272 is NO), the sub CPU 201 refers to the normal state rank effect table (not shown) and Is selected (S274). Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the selection probability of the rank-up effect in the rank effect table for the probable state is set to be higher than the selection probability of the rank-up effect in the rank effect table for the normal state.

  After the processing of S273 or S274, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the selected effect is a rank-up effect (S275).

  In S275, when sub CPU 201 determines that the selected effect is a rank-up effect (when S275 is YES), sub CPU 201 determines whether the current effect stage is stage 3 (S275). S276).

  In S276, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the present stage is not stage 3 (NO in S276), the sub CPU 201 sets a stage transition effect (S277). In the stage shift effect, information indicating that the effect stage is shifted to an effect stage having a higher degree of latent expectancy than the current effect stage is displayed (notified) in the display area 13a of the display device 13. For example, when the current stage is stage 1, information indicating that the stage is to be shifted to stage 2 is displayed (notified) in the display area 13 a of the display device 13. Then, after the process of S277, the sub CPU 201 ends the latent probability expectation notification process, and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, in S276, when sub CPU 201 determines that the present stage is stage 3 (when S276 is YES), sub CPU 201 sets a transition effect to mode B (S278). Note that in the transition effect to the mode B, information indicating that the effect mode switches from the mode A to the mode B is displayed (notified) in the display area 13a of the display device 13. Then, after the process of S278, the sub CPU 201 ends the latent probability expectation notification process, and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

  Here, returning to the description of the process of S275 again, in S275, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected effect is not a rank-up effect (when S275 is NO), the sub CPU 201 selects the effect. It is determined whether or not the effect is an end effect of mode A (S279).

  In S279, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected effect is the end effect of mode A (if S279 is YES), the sub CPU 201 sets the effect to shift to the normal mode (S280). In the transition effect to the normal mode, information indicating that the transition from the mode A to the normal mode is displayed (notified) in the display area 13a of the display device 13. Then, after the processing of S280, the sub CPU 201 ends the latent probability expectation notification processing, and returns the processing to the sub control main processing (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, in S279, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected effect is not the end effect of the mode A (NO in S279), the sub CPU 201 ends the latent probability expectation notification process, and proceeds to the sub process. Return to the control main process (see FIG. 85). At this time (when neither “Rank Up Effect” nor “End Effect” is selected), the sub CPU 201 sets the effect selected from the normal or probable variation rank table, and then reports the latent expectation degree. The process ends.

  If the rank effect table has a configuration in which, for example, an effect to rank down or an effect specific to a stage can be selected in addition to the “rank up effect” and the “end effect”, S279 is NO. At the time of determination, the sub CPU 201 sets a predetermined effect corresponding to, for example, an effect to rank down, an effect unique to the stage, and the like.

[Uncertain count notification process]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the effect mode is the mode B, an effect (notification of the number of latent times) in which the remaining number of latent times is reported in three stages (stages A to C). Effect) (see FIG. 49). Here, with reference to FIG. 94, a description will be given of the number-of-latitudes notification processing executed by the sub CPU 201 in mode B. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latent number of times notification process according to the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect mode is the mode B (S291). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect mode is mode B with reference to the value of the mode B selection flag (“0” or “1”) stored in the work RAM 203. In the present embodiment, if any of the following three conditions is satisfied, the determination in S291 is YES.
(1) When the gaming state is the “latent gaming state” and the promotion lottery is won in the stage 3 of the mode A.
(2) When a "big hit" is won in the non-time-saving gaming state.
(3) When the mode B is being executed.

  In S291, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the effect mode is not the mode B (when S291 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the number-of-latitudes informing process and performs the sub-control main process (see FIG. 85). Return to On the other hand, in S291, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the effect mode is the mode B (in the case of YES determination in S291), the sub CPU 201 has the number of remaining latent probabilities within the range of 200 to 120 times. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S292). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the sub control circuit 200 is provided with a dedicated counter for separately counting the number of remaining latent times managed by the main control circuit 70. Then, in the process of S292, the sub CPU 201 determines the number of remaining latent probabilities based on the value of the dedicated counter for counting the number of remaining latent probabilities.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 every time the remaining latent count is updated in the main control circuit 70, and the sub control circuit 200 The value of the dedicated counter for counting the number of remaining latent times is updated based on the command of (1). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining latent times managed by the main control circuit 70 and the number of remaining latent times managed by the sub-control circuit 200 are updated in synchronization. At this time, the sub CPU 201 may update the value of the dedicated counter for counting the number of remaining latent times based on the reception of the predetermined command. Further, when the predetermined command includes information on the remaining number of times of latent concealment, the sub CPU 201 determines the number of remaining times of latent guess by referring to the information on the number of remaining times of latent guess in the process of S292. Is also good.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S <b> 292 that the number of remaining latent times is within the range of 200 to 120 times (YES in step S <b> 292), the sub CPU 201 displays the stage in the display area 13 a of the display device 13. Data for displaying (notifying) information about A is set (S293). Then, after the processing of S293, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S297 described later.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines in step S292 that the remaining latent count (the remaining ST count) is not within the range of 200 to 120 times (NO in S292), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether the number of times is within the range of 119 to 50 times (S294).

  In S294, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining latent times is within the range of 119 to 50 (in the case of YES in S294), the sub CPU 201 displays the stage in the display area 13a of the display device 13. Data for displaying (notifying) information about B is set (S295). After the processing of S295, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S297 described later.

  On the other hand, in S294, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining latent times is not in the range of 119 to 50 (NO in S294), the sub CPU 201 displays the display area 13a of the display device 13. Data for displaying (notifying) information on the stage C is set (S296). After the processing of S296, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S297 described later.

  After the processing of S293, S295 or S296, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of remaining latent probabilities is 0 (S297).

  In S297, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the remaining number of latent times is not 0 (NO in S297), the sub CPU 201 ends the latent number of times notification process, and executes the sub control main process (FIG. 85). Back to see). On the other hand, in S297, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining latent probabilities is 0 (if S297 is YES), the sub CPU 201 shifts the effect mode from the mode B to the normal mode (S298). Then, after the processing of S298, the sub CPU 201 ends the latent number of times notification processing, and returns the processing to the sub control main processing (see FIG. 85).

[Time reduction notification process]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the effect mode is the mode C, the time-saving number notification effect is performed (see FIG. 50). Here, with reference to FIG. 95, a description will be given of the time saving number notification process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the mode C. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the number-of-times-savings notification process according to the present embodiment. As described with reference to FIG. 53, at the time of the continuous effect (the number of times of notification = 0), in addition to the notification effect of the remaining number of times saved (additional number display effect), a big hit effect, a transition effect to mode D, and a mode B effect 95, the description of these effect processing (notification processing) other than the notification effect of the number of remaining time savings is omitted in FIG. 95 for convenience of explanation, and the notification of the remaining number of time savings is omitted. 4 shows a flowchart specialized for processing.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming state is in the “big hit gaming state” (S301). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the “big hit gaming state” by referring to the information on the gaming state included in the predetermined command transmitted from the main CPU 71. The predetermined command is transmitted from the main CPU 71 to the sub CPU 201 at a timing, for example, every time a special symbol is fluctuated, when information on a game state is updated, or every predetermined time.

  In S301, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is not in the "big hit gaming state" (if S301 is NO), the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S305 described later. On the other hand, in S301, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is in the “big hit gaming state” (if S301 is YES), the sub CPU 201 sets the type of the “big hit” in the “big hit gaming state” to “ It is determined whether it is a "big hit with time reduction" (S302). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the type of “big hit” is a type to which the number of times of saving is added based on the result of the command analysis process (S183) in the sub-control main process shown in FIG. Determine.

  In S302, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the type of "big hit" is not "big hit with time saving" (when S302 is NO), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S305 described later.

  On the other hand, in S302, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the type of the "big hit" is "big hit with time saving" (in the case of YES determination in S302), the sub CPU 201 outputs the notification pattern of the preset number of time savings. It is set in the work RAM 203 (S303). Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the first remaining short notice number (initial notice number) in the work RAM 203 (S304). That is, in the present embodiment, the notification pattern of the number of times reduced and the initial notification number are determined during the big hit game before the effect mode shifts to the mode C. At this time, the number of initial notifications is set to a value equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of time savings set for each type of “big hit” (symbol designating command). For example, in the example described with reference to FIG. 50, the upper limit of the number of time savings is 200 times, and the number of initial notifications is 60 times.

  In the present embodiment, although not shown, the sub-control circuit 200 is provided with a dedicated counter for counting the number of times of notification of the remaining time-saving game. Then, at the start of the time-saving game (when the effect mode shifts to the mode C), the initial notification count is set to the dedicated counter for counting the notification count.

  Then, after the processing of S304, or when S301 or S302 is NO, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the "time reduction gaming state" (S305).

  In S305, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is not the “time saving gaming state” (if S305 is NO), the sub CPU 201 terminates the time saving notification process and proceeds to the sub-control main process (see FIG. 85). ). On the other hand, in S305, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the "time reduction gaming state" (when the determination in S305 is YES), the sub CPU 201 acquires the current number of remaining time reductions (S306). In this process, the sub CPU 201 also performs a process of updating the number of notifications. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 subtracts “1” from the value of the dedicated counter for counting the number of times of notification.

  In the present embodiment, although not shown, the sub-control circuit 200 is provided with a dedicated counter for separately counting the number of remaining time-saving times (the number of time-saving games executed) managed by the main control circuit 70. Then, in the process of S306, the sub CPU 201 performs the process of determining the number of remaining time savings based on the value of the dedicated counter for counting the number of remaining time savings. In the present embodiment, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub-control circuit 200 every time the main control circuit 70 updates the number of remaining time savings, and the sub-control circuit 200 The value of the dedicated counter for counting the number of remaining time savings is updated based on the command.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining time reduction managed by the main control circuit 70 and the remaining time reduction managed by the sub-control circuit 200 are updated in synchronization. At this time, the sub CPU 201 may update the value of the dedicated counter for counting the number of remaining time savings based on the reception of the predetermined command. When the predetermined command includes information on the number of remaining time reductions, the sub CPU 201 may determine the number of remaining time reductions by referring to the information on the number of remaining time reductions in the process of S306.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the number of notifications is “0” (S307). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times of notification is “0” with reference to the value of the dedicated counter for counting the number of times of notification.

  In S307, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of times of notification is “0” (when S307 is YES), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of remaining time savings is “0” (S308). .

  In S308, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining time savings is “0” (if S308 is YES), the sub CPU 201 sets notification information of the end of time saving (S309). Then, after the processing of S309, the sub CPU 201 ends the time saving number notification processing, and returns the processing to the sub control main processing (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining time savings is not “0” in S308 (NO in S308), the sub CPU 201 sets a continuous effect of the time saving game (S310).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs an additional update process of the number of notifications (S311). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 newly sets the number of times equal to or less than the current number of remaining time savings as the number of times of notification (adds the number of times of notification). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 50, in the process of S311, the notification number of 40 times is added. The number of times of notification added at this time may be a predetermined number (however, the number of times equal to or less than the current number of remaining hours saved) or the number of information added by lottery based on the current number of remaining hours reduced. The number of times may be determined. Then, after the process of S311, the sub CPU 201 ends the time saving number notification process, and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

  The processing when the number of times of notification is “0” and the number of remaining time savings is not “0” is not limited to the processing of S310 and S311. For example, when the transition to the effect mode to the mode D has been determined at this time, not only the processing of S310 and S311 but also the effect of transition to the mode D may be performed at the same time.

  Here, returning to the description of the processing of S307 again, in S307, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of notifications is not “0” (when S307 is NO), the sub CPU 201 is set in S303. Based on the notification pattern, it is determined whether or not the notification pattern of the number of time savings being executed is a notification pattern for performing a notice effect (notification notice) (S312).

  In S312, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the notification pattern of the number of time savings being executed is not the notification pattern for performing a notice effect (NO in S312), the sub CPU 201 ends the time saving number notification processing and performs the processing. Return to the sub-control main processing (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, in S312, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the notification pattern of the number of time savings being executed is a notification pattern for performing a notice effect (YES in S312), the sub CPU 201 sets the notification pattern set in S303. It is determined whether or not the current special symbol change display is the timing for performing the notice effect (S313). In addition, the timing of giving a notice effect may be determined by lottery for each change display of the special symbol during the time reduction game. In addition, when the notification pattern for performing the announcement effect is set (the process of S303), a predetermined timing (for example, the number of times of the fluctuation display) may be determined as the timing of the announcement effect.

  In S313, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the current variation display of the special symbol is not the timing to perform the announcement effect (NO in S313), the sub CPU 201 ends the time saving number notification process and executes the sub control. Return to the main processing (see FIG. 85). On the other hand, in S313, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the current variable display of the special symbol is the timing for performing a notice effect (if S313 is YES), the sub CPU 201 sets the notice effect of the remaining number of times reduced. (S314).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs an additional update process of the number of notifications (S315). In this process, the sub CPU 201 adds the number of times equal to or less than the current number of remaining working hours to the current number of notifications (adds the number of notifications). The number of times of notification added at this time may be a predetermined number (however, the number of times equal to or less than the current number of remaining hours saved) or the number of information added by lottery based on the current number of remaining hours reduced. The number of times may be determined. Then, after the process of S315, the sub CPU 201 ends the time saving number notification process, and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

  As described above, in S311 and S315 during the time saving number notification process, an additional update process of the number of notifications is performed at the execution timing of the continuous effect and the announcement effect, respectively, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 200. That is, the sub-control circuit 200 also serves as a means for updating the number of times of notification at a predetermined timing (notification number updating means).

<Various modifications and application examples>
Various effect operations in the pachinko gaming machine of the present invention are not limited to the effect operation examples of the above-described embodiment, and various modified examples and application examples can be considered. Hereinafter, various modifications and application examples will be described.

[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, when the “small hit” is won in the state where the production mode is the normal mode, the game state is shifted to the mode B via the mode A, and the game state is “the latent game state”. In the mode B described above, an example has been described in which an effect of notifying the number of remaining latent probabilities is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the "small hit" is won in the normal mode, the effect mode may directly shift to the mode B, and the remaining execution number of the special symbol change display in the shifted mode B may be notified. . Modification Example 1 describes such a configuration example.

(1) Mode Transition Between Normal Mode and Mode B First, a mode transition between the normal mode and mode B in Modification 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 shows an outline of a mode transition mode between the normal mode and the mode B and the notification operation performed in the mode B in the first modification.

  In the first modification, when the "big hit" is won in the normal mode (game state without time saving), the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed 200 times at the end of the big hit game, similarly to the above embodiment (ST). Is set, and then the effect mode shifts to mode B.

  In the first modification, as shown in FIG. 96, in the normal mode, “small hit” is won, and after the small hit game is completed, the effect mode shifts to mode B. In this case, the effect mode transition mode includes, as in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the effect mode transitions to mode B immediately after the end of the small hit game, and a predetermined number of times in the normal mode again after the end of the small hit game. There is a mode in which the effect mode shifts to mode B after the special symbol change display is performed. In addition, also in the first modification, the gaming state does not shift at the time of the small hit irrespective of the shift mode to the mode B, similarly to the above embodiment.

  Therefore, in the first modification, when the game mode shifts from the normal mode to the mode B via the small hitting game state, if the game state at the time of the small hit winning in the normal mode is “no low probability time saving”, the state after the shift is changed. In the mode B, the gaming state of “no low probability time saving” is continued. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning in the normal mode is “no high probability time saving”, the gaming state of “no high probability time saving” is continued even in mode B after the transition. That is, in the first modification, the game state in the mode B is “no high-probability time reduction” (the latent game state) or “low-probability time reduction”.

  In this example, when the game state of the mode B is the “latent game state”, when the latent game ends, the effect mode shifts from the mode B to the normal mode.

  On the other hand, in this example, when the gaming state of the mode B is “no low probability time saving”, the remaining number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol in the mode B (the remaining number of stays described later) becomes “0”. , The end lottery of the mode B is performed. Then, when the end lottery in Mode B is won, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode. However, if the end lottery in Mode B is not won, the initial value of the remaining number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol (the remaining number of stays described later) is set again in Mode B, and Mode B is continued. You.

(2) Outline of notification effect in mode B Next, an outline of the notification effect in mode B will be described. In the first modification as well, in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment, the number of executions of the variable display of the remaining special symbols is displayed in the mode B.

  In the first modification, as described above, when the effect mode shifts to the mode B via the small hit game, the game state is not “the latent game state” (no high probability time saving) but “low probability”. No time savings ". Therefore, in the first modification, an effect of displaying the execution number of the variable display of the remaining special symbols as the “remaining number of stays” is performed in the mode B in consideration of both game states. Note that the number of remaining stays here includes the number of remaining latent probabilities, and when the game state of the mode B is “latently probable game state” (no high probability time saving), the number of remaining stays is the remaining It becomes the number of latents. Further, when the gaming state of the mode B is “no low probability working hours”, a predetermined number of stays (initial value) is set when the effect mode shifts to the mode B.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in the first modification, the number of remaining stays in mode B is notified in three stages. Specifically, as the stages indicating the number of remaining stays, stage A where the number of remaining stays is 200 to 120, stage B where the number of remaining stays is 119 to 50, and stage where the number of remaining stays is 49 to 0 C is provided. In the notification effect of the remaining number of stays in mode B, a unique effect is performed in each stage, and information on the current number of remaining stays is notified to the player.

  The range of the number of remaining stays set for each of stages A to C is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 96, and may be changed as appropriate according to, for example, the model. Further, in this example, an example in which the stage of the number of remaining stays is divided into three stages has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stage of the number of remaining stays may be divided into two or four or more stages.

  Here, FIG. 97a and FIG. 97b show an example of an operation flow of the notification effect of the remaining number of stays performed in mode B.

  FIG. 97a is an operation flow of the notification effect of the remaining number of stays when the effect mode shifts to the mode B via the small hit game and the game state of the mode B is “no low probability time saving”. In this operation example, first, after the small hitting game ends, an initial value (80 times in the operation example of FIG. 97a) of the number of stays (the number of executions of the special symbol) in the mode B is set. The initial value of the number of stays is appropriately selected from the range of 0 to 200 times.

  In the operation example of FIG. 97a, after transition to mode B, first, a stay number notification effect of stage B is performed, and thereafter, the remaining number of stays decreases for each special symbol change display. Next, when the remaining number of stays becomes 49 or less, the stay number notification effect is switched to the stage C stay number notification effect. Thereafter, a stay number notification effect of stage C is performed until the remaining stay number becomes zero.

  Then, when the end lottery of the mode B, which is performed when the remaining number of stays becomes zero, is not won, the initial value of the number of stays in the mode B is set again, and the number-of-stays notification effect in the mode B is repeated. It is. On the other hand, when the end lottery in Mode B is won, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.

  FIG. 97b shows that the time-saving game ends in mode C in which the game state is “high-probability time-saving”, the effect mode shifts from mode C to mode B, and the remaining number of latent probabilities at the time of the shift is “80”. It is an operation flow of a notification effect of the remaining number of stays performed when the number of times is "time".

  In the operation example of FIG. 97b, after transition to mode B, a stay number of stage B notification effect is first performed, and thereafter, the remaining stay number decreases each time the latent game is consumed. Next, when the number of remaining stays (remaining latent number of times) becomes 49 or less, the stay number notification effect is switched to the stage C stay number notification effect. After that, the stay number notification effect of stage C is performed until the remaining stay number (remaining latent probability number) becomes zero. At this time, if the "big hit" is not won before the remaining stay count (remaining latent probability count) becomes zero, that is, if the probable change game state ends, the remaining stay count becomes zero. After that, the production mode shifts to the normal mode.

  As shown in FIG. 97a and FIG. 97b, in the stay number notification effect of Modification 1, even if the game state of mode B is “probable change game state”, it is “normal game state” (non-probability change game state). A similar effect is performed. In this case, it is difficult to determine whether or not the game state is the “probable game state”.

  Therefore, in the configuration of this example, when a player who can determine whether or not a "small hit" has occurred is playing a game with the same pachinko game machine, the game state is set to "Sensitive game" in mode B. It is possible to determine whether the state is “state”. However, when another player (the next player) plays a game with the gaming machine after shifting to the mode B, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the “latently reliable gaming state”. Becomes very difficult. Further, in this example, in order to make it more difficult to distinguish between “small hit” and “big hit”, a type of “big hit” having an opening mode similar to the opening mode of the big winning opening at the time of a small hit may be provided. Good.

(3) Content of Stay Number Notification Process Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a registration process (stay number notification process) of the stay number notification effect performed by the sub CPU 201 in mode B will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a stay count notification process in the first modification. The stay number notification process in the first modification is performed in the effect process (S184) in the sub-control main process described with reference to FIG. 85, similarly to the latent number notification process in the above embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the mode B selection flag is “1” (S321). That is, in this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current effect mode is mode B.

  In S321, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the mode B selection flag is “1” (when S321 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S327 described later. On the other hand, in S321, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the mode B selection flag is not “1” (when S321 is NO), the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the mode B initial processing flag is “1”. It is determined whether or not there is (S322).

The mode B initial processing flag is a flag stored in the work RAM 203, and is a flag indicating whether or not the effect mode has just been shifted to the mode B. Then, when the effect mode has just been shifted to the mode B, the value of the mode B initial processing flag is set to “1”. The value of the mode B initial processing flag is set to “1” at the following timings (A) to (C).
(A) Immediately after the end of the small hit game.
(B) Immediately after the end of the small hit game, immediately after the effect mode shifts to the mode B after the predetermined number of special symbols are changed and displayed in the normal mode again.
(C) Immediately after the "big hit" is won in the "non-time-saving gaming state" and the big hit game ends.

  In S322, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the mode B initial processing flag is not “1” (NO in S322), the sub CPU 201 ends the stay number notification process, and executes the sub control main process. (See FIG. 85). On the other hand, in S322, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the mode B initial processing flag is “1” (if S322 is YES), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming state is the “probable changing gaming state”. It is determined whether or not it is (S323).

  In S323, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the game state is the “probable change game state” (if S323 is YES), the sub CPU 201 sets an initial value of the remaining stay count in mode B (S324). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the number of remaining probable changes (the number of remaining latent probabilities) at the time of shifting to the mode B as an initial value of the number of remaining stays, and stores the set remaining number of stays in the work RAM 203. After the processing of S324, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S326 described later.

  On the other hand, in S323, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the game state is not the “probable change game state” (in the case of NO determination in S323), that is, immediately after the effect mode has shifted to the mode B via the small hit game, and When the gaming state is the “normal gaming state”, the sub CPU 201 sets the initial value of the remaining stay count in the mode B to a predetermined value within a range of 0 to 200 times (S325). At this time, the sub CPU 201 may determine the initial value of the number of remaining stays by lottery, or may set a predetermined number of times set in advance as the initial value of the number of remaining stays. In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores the set initial value of the number of remaining stays in the work RAM 203. Then, after the processing of S325, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S326 described later.

  After the processing of S324 or S325, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the mode B selection flag to “1” (S326).

  Then, after the process of S326 or in the case of YES determination in S321, the sub CPU 201 updates the value of the remaining number of stays (S327). In this process, the sub CPU 201 subtracts “1” from the value of the number of remaining stays for each change display of the special symbol, and stores the subtracted number of remaining stays (update value) in the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the remaining stay count updated in S327 is “0” (S328).

  In S328, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the number of remaining stays is not “0” (NO in S328), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S335 described later. On the other hand, in S328, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the remaining stay count is “0” (if S328 is YES), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the “probable change game state”. Is determined (S329).

  If the sub CPU 201 determines in S329 that it is the end timing of the “probable change game state” (if S329 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S332 described later. On the other hand, in S329, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the timing is not the end timing of the “probable change game state” (if S329 is NO), the sub CPU 201 performs a mode B end lottery (S330). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the mode B end lottery has been won (S331).

  In S331, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the end lottery in Mode B has been won (if S331 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S332 described later.

  When the determination in S329 or S331 is YES, the sub CPU 201 ends the mode B and shifts the effect mode to the normal mode (S332). Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the mode B selection flag to “0” (S333). Then, after the processing of S333, the sub CPU 201 ends the stay number notification processing, and returns the processing to the sub control main processing (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, in S331, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery in the mode B has not been won (in the case of NO determination in S331), the sub CPU 201 again executes the remaining in the mode B in the same manner as the process of S325. The initial value of the number of stays is set to a predetermined value within the range of 0 to 200 times (S334). In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores the set initial value of the number of remaining stays in the work RAM 203.

  After the processing of S334, or when the determination of S328 is NO, the sub CPU 201 selects a stage of the number of stays (any one of the stages A to C) according to the remaining number of stays (S335). Then, after the process of S335, the sub CPU 201 ends the stay number notification process, and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

[Modification 2]
In the time reduction notification process according to the above-described embodiment described with reference to FIG. 95, an example of a process of setting a notification pattern of the number of time reductions and an initial notification frequency (the number of times of the first remaining time reduction) set in advance in S303 and S304 will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the notification pattern of the number of times saved and the initial notification number may be determined by lottery.

  In Modification 2, an example of a time saving notification pattern table used when determining the notification pattern of the number of time savings and the initial notification number by lottery will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the time saving notification pattern table.

  The time saving notification pattern table of this example includes a symbol designating command (“z1” to “z17”), a notification pattern type (“JT00” to “JT32”), and a notification pattern type for the number of time savings. The correspondence relationship between the random number value and various parameters of the notification pattern determined by the random number value is defined. The random number value specified in the time saving notification pattern table is a random number value acquired at the time of winning, and is any one of “0” to “999” (1000 types).

  In the time saving notification pattern table of this example, the value of the advance notification flag, the initial notification frequency, and the number of time reductions are defined as various parameters of the notification pattern of the number of time reductions. The notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not the notification pattern of the number of times saved is a notification pattern for performing a notification effect. If the notification pattern is a notification pattern for performing a notification effect, the value of the notification flag is set to “1”. (ON) "is set.

  In the lottery process using the time saving notification pattern table shown in FIG. 99, the notification pattern of the number of time savings and various parameters thereof are determined based on the type of the symbol designation command (big hit symbol). For example, if the symbol designating command is “z2” and the random number value for determining the notification pattern of the number of time savings is any one of “500” to “999”, “JT02” is the notification pattern of the number of time savings. Are set, and as the various parameters of the notification pattern, the value of the advance notification flag is set to “1”, the number of initial notifications is set to “40”, and the number of time savings is set to “60”.

[Modification 3]
In the look-ahead special zone effect of the above-described embodiment described with reference to FIG. 54a to FIG. 54c, when the change of the reserved ball held next to the reserved ball to which the effect at the start of the look-ahead specialized zone is assigned, Although the example of performing the middle production has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the fluctuation period of one reserved ball, both the effect at the start of the pre-read specialization zone and the effect in the pre-read specialization zone may be performed. In this case, even when the reserved ball does not exist before the variable display (reserved ball) of the special symbol determined to perform the prefetch specialized zone effect, the prefetch specialized zone effect can be performed.

  Also, in the effect at the start of the pre-read specialization zone in the above-described embodiment, an example in which a symbol effect and a background effect are simultaneously generated in a rush advance notice effect to the specialize zone (“combined zone notice notice success” effect) is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol effect and the background effect may be generated at different timings.

  In the third modification, both the effect at the start of the special look-ahead zone and the effect in the special-purpose look-ahead zone are performed during the fluctuation period of one reserved ball, and the symbol effect and the background effect are performed in the advance notice effect for entering the special purpose zone. An operation example of the look-ahead specialization zone effect in which the above-mentioned is generated at different timings will be described.

(1) Operation example of special look-ahead zone effect First, an example of a special look-ahead special zone effect in Modification 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the operation flow of the prefetch specialization zone effect in this example.

  In the example shown in FIG. 100, when three reserved balls are already present, a start-up prize is newly generated (a fourth reserve sphere is generated), and a special look-ahead zone effect is performed at the time of the start-up prize. It is an operation example of the look-ahead specialized zone effect when it is determined. In this case, similarly to the above-described embodiment, when the fourth reserved ball is generated, it is determined that the fluctuation display of the three reserved balls already reserved and the special look-ahead zone effect are performed. A series of pre-reading effects is performed by the fluctuation display of the first reserved ball.

  In this example, at the time of each change of the first to third reserved balls, an effect before the start of the pre-read specialization zone is performed, and an effect is performed to encourage entry into the pre-read specialization zone. In this example, in the effect before the start of the special look-ahead zone, a symbol effect (symbol look-ahead) or a background effect (a background look-ahead) is performed as in the above embodiment. One of the symbol effect and the background effect is performed in the first half of the change period of the pending ball performing the previous effect, and the other of the symbol effect and the background effect is performed in the middle of the change period.

  At the time of the fourth change of the reserve ball, first, an effect at the start of the look-ahead specialization zone (a notice of entry into the specialization zone and an effect of a zone entry) are performed. The production in the chemical zone is performed. In this case, in this example, in the advance announcement effect to the specialization zone, one of the symbol effect and the background effect of the predetermined system is performed in the first half of the fluctuation period, and the symbol effect and the background effect of the predetermined system are performed in the middle of the fluctuation period. Do the other of

(1) Fluctuating effect table (at the beginning of the pre-read specialization zone)
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a description will be given of the fluctuation effect table (at the start of the prefetch specialization zone) used in this example.

  The fluctuation effect table (at the start of the special look-ahead zone) shown in FIG. It is a table which is referred when determining the effect pattern of the symbol change display period.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the variation effect table (at the start of the prefetch specialization zone) of this example includes the types of variation patterns of special symbols (“HN00” to “HN27”) and the look-ahead effect flag table shown in FIG. , The random number value for selecting (determining) the effect pattern (“EZ00” to “EZ45”), the effect pattern determined by the random number value, and the content of the look-ahead effect ( The correspondence relationship between the symbol effect and the type of background effect) and the data set of the pre-read specialization zone flag is defined. In the variation effect table (at the start of the prefetch specialization zone) in this example, in the effect pattern in which the value of the prefetch specialization zone inside flag is “1”, the prefetch specialization starts from the above-described effect at the start of the prefetch specialization zone. A series of performances up to the performance in the zone is performed in the fluctuation period of one reserved ball.

  Further, in the variation effect table (at the start of the pre-read specialization zone) of this example, the variation time (variable display period of the special symbol) and the winning type ("losing") corresponding to each variation pattern are stored in the same manner as in the above embodiment. , "Small hit" and "big hit"), and the selectivity of each effect pattern. Note that the random number value specified in the fluctuation effect table (at the start of the special look-ahead zone) is a random number value obtained at the time of starting opening prize, and is one of “0” to “999” (1000 types). .

  For example, the execution of the effect at the start of the special look-ahead zone is determined, the change pattern determined at the start of the special symbol change display is “HN01”, and the special look-ahead zone effect pattern determined at the time of winning is “ If the random number value is any one of “0” to “499”, “EZ03” is selected as the effect pattern at the start of the special look-ahead special zone, and “Symbol effect” A "and" background effect A "are selected, and" 1 "is set in the pre-read specialization zone flag.

  In this case, one of “symbol effect A” and “background effect A” is performed in the first half of the special symbol fluctuation period (10000 milliseconds), and “symbol effect A” and “background effect A” are performed in the middle of the fluctuation period. Is performed. Next, a zone entry effect corresponding to the effect pattern of "EZ03" is performed, and a display corresponding to "losing" (winning type) is performed on the display area 13a of the display device 13. Thereafter, an effect in a predetermined pre-read specialization zone determined based on the fluctuation pattern “HN01” is performed, and thereafter, the special symbol stops changing.

(1) Details of Prefetching Specialized Zone Effect Pattern Determination Process Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the prefetching specialized zone effect pattern determining process in Modification 3 will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch specialization zone effect pattern determination process in this example. Note that the look-ahead specialized zone effect pattern determination processing of this example is performed in S217 during the variable effect pattern determination processing shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, as in the above embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the pre-read specialization zone start flag set at the time of obtaining the winning pattern is “1” (ON state) (S341). In this determination process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current special symbol variation display is a special symbol variation display in which an effect at the start of the pre-read specialization zone is performed.

  In S341, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the prefetch specialization zone start flag is “1” (when S341 is YES), that is, at the start of the prefetch specialization zone in the current special symbol variation display. The sub CPU 201 refers to the fluctuation effect table (at the start of the special look-ahead zone) of FIG. 101 and performs a prefetch by lottery based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the received command. The variable effect pattern in the effect at the start of the specialization zone is determined (S342). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect pattern, the symbol effect and the background effect, and the look-ahead effect specified in the change effect table (at the start of the pre-read specialization zone) in FIG. 101 based on the change pattern of the special symbol. The value (“0” or “1”) of the in-zone flag is selected.

  After the processing in S342, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the prefetch specialization zone start flag to “0” (S343). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the pre-read special zone flag is “1” (S344).

  In S344, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-read special zone flag is “1” (if S344 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S347 described later. On the other hand, in S344, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-read special zone flag is not “1” (if S344 is NO), the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the pre-read special zone flag to “1”. (S345). Then, after the processing of S345, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S349 described later.

  Here, returning to the description of the processing of S341 again, in S341, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-read specialization zone start flag is not “1” (if S341 is NO), the sub CPU 201 Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the pre-read specialization zone flag is “1” (ON state) (S346). If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that the value of the pre-read specialization zone flag is “1” (YES in step S346), the sub CPU 201 performs the process in step S347 described below.

  When S344 or S346 is YES, that is, as in Modification 3, a series of effects from the effect at the start of the pre-read specialization zone to the effect in the pre-read specialization zone are performed in the current special symbol fluctuation display period. When performing, or when the variation display of the current special symbol is the variation display of the special symbol that performs only the effect during the start of the special look-ahead special zone, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the variation display table of FIG. ), Based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the received command, the fluctuation effect pattern in the effect in the special zone for pre-reading is determined by lottery (S347). Then, after the processing of S347, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S349 described later.

  On the other hand, in S346, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-read specialization zone flag is not “1” (in the case of NO determination in S346), that is, the pre-read specialization zone effect in the current special symbol variation display. When performing the previous effect, the sub CPU 201 refers to the fluctuation effect table (before the start of the special look-ahead zone) of FIG. 66, and draws a lottery based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol obtained based on the analysis result of the received command. The variable effect pattern in the effect before the start of the pre-read specialization zone is determined (S348). Then, after the processing of S348, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S349 described later.

  After the processing of S345, S347 or S348, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the pre-read specialization zone end flag set at the time of winning pattern acquisition is “1” (ON state) (S349). That is, in this processing, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current variable display of the special symbol is the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball for which the shift to the prefetch specialization zone has been determined.

  In S349, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the prefetch specialization zone end flag is not “1” (when S349 is NO), that is, when the prefetch specialization zone effect is continued, the sub CPU 201 At the same time as ending the look-ahead specialized zone effect pattern determination process, the variable effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89) also ends.

  On the other hand, in S349, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the prefetch specialization zone end flag is “1” (when S349 is YES), that is, when ending the prefetch specialization zone effect, the sub CPU 201 Sets the value of the prefetch specialization zone flag to "0" (S350). Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the pre-read specialization zone flag to “0” (S351). Then, after the process of S351, the sub CPU 201 ends the pre-read specialization zone effect pattern determination process and also ends the variable effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89).

[Various notification processing by payout control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Power on process]
First, the power-on process by the payout CPU 301 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the power-on process according to the present embodiment. The power-on process is a process that is started when the power is turned on. When the power-on process is started, the payout CPU 301 first sets a stack pointer, an interrupt mode, and an interrupt vector.

  First, the payout CPU 301 performs an input / output port setting process (S401). Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the power interruption is detected (S402). In this process, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the power interruption detection signal is at H level (high level).

  In S402, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power interruption detection signal is at the H level (YES in S402), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power interruption detection state is established, and performs the process of S402.

  On the other hand, in S402, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power interruption detection signal is not at the H level (NO in S402), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power interruption detection state is not present, and executes the write permission process of the RAM 303. Perform (S403).

  In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs various initial setting processes such as a process of initializing a work area of the RAM 303, in addition to the process of permitting writing in the RAM 303.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, that is, whether the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 41) is on (S404).

  In S404, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is ON (when S404 is YES), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S410 described later.

  On the other hand, in S404, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not turned on (NO in S404), the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not there is a power-off detection flag (S405). In this process, the payout CPU 301 checks the power interruption detection flag.

  In S405, when the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no power interruption detection flag (when S405 is NO), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S410 described later. On the other hand, in S405, when the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a power interruption detection flag (in the case of YES determination in S405), the payout CPU 301 calculates a work damage check value (S406). In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a damage check on the work area in the RAM 303 and calculates a work damage check value.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 executes an error detection process such as a parity check or a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check), and sets a checksum obtained as an execution result as a work damage check value.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the work damage check value is normal (S407). In S407, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the work damage check value is not normal (NO in S405), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S410 described later.

  On the other hand, in S407, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the work damage check value is normal (when S407 is YES), the payout CPU 301 performs an initial process at the time of power restoration (S408).

  That is, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not turned on, the power interruption detection flag is present, and the work damage check value is normal, the payout CPU 301 returns to the state before the power was turned off. It is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be returned to the user at a later time, and based on the data stored in the RAM 303, an initial setting process at the time of power recovery is performed.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a security ball monitoring initial setting process (S409). In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs an initial setting for determining whether 15 game balls are secured in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B, respectively.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B, respectively. In the present embodiment, assuming that the falling time of one game ball is 130 ms, the first and second secured ball counters 305A correspond to 1950 times corresponding to 1950 ms (= 130 ms × 15) of the falling time of 15 game balls, 305B is an initial value.

  Further, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B, respectively. In the present embodiment, based on the fall time 1950 ms (1950 times) of the 15 game balls, 2000 ms is set as the time assumed to complete the security of the 15 game balls by the first and second security ball timers 306A. , 306B.

  After the processing of S409, the payout CPU 301 returns the value of the program counter to the address before the power interruption. More specifically, the payout CPU 301 ends the power-on process, and continues to execute the program that was being executed when the power-on process was executed.

  If S404 is YES, S405 is NO, or S407 is NO, the payout CPU 301 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be returned to the state before the power was turned off. Executes the processing when is input.

  More specifically, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303 (S410), and performs an initial process when the power is turned on (S411). In this process, the payout CPU 301 resets the cause of the overpayment and the stoppage of the payout motor abnormality. At this time, the overpayment prescribed number (10) retry count described later is also initialized.

  In addition, in a state where a stop factor due to a ball shortage occurs, a display by a payout state notification display device 178 described later is turned off for two seconds so as not to be influenced by the accumulation state of the secured balls in the ball supply passage 171.

  More specifically, when a predetermined initialization operation is performed when the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped due to the above-described stop factor, the payout state notification display device 178 performs two steps until the determination of the out of ball is completed. During the second, the result of the determination is not displayed.

  Thus, for example, it is determined that the ball has run out after a predetermined initialization operation, and when it is determined that the ball is normal, the notification by the payout state notification display device 178 can be prevented from being performed. As a result, unnecessary notification can be eliminated. Here, the predetermined initialization operation means, for example, that the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed.

  In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpays, or the work area of the error information portion without turning on the power again. The work area including one, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs the above-described security ball monitoring initial setting process (S412), and executes the main process (S413).

  When the power is turned off as compared with the above-described power-on, the use register, the interrupt state, and the stack pointer are saved, the excitation data of the payout motor 174 is forcibly set to 0, and the current is switched to a low current.

  If the power is cut during the payout operation, it is possible to assume that the game data may not be at the origin (the number of steps is a multiple of 4). To prevent Alternatively, the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of power interruption.

  When the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of power failure, the power failure process may be waited for or interrupted for the time required for the game ball to fall, or the execution period may be extended.

  Further, instead of forcibly dropping the game ball, control may be performed so that the game ball falls freely. In this case, in order to take a sufficient time required to detect a free-falling game ball, the power interruption processing may be waited or interrupted, and the execution period may be extended.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing performed in S413 during the power-on processing (see FIG. 103) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the system timer of the payout CPU 301 is 4 or less (S421). In S421, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the system timer is not 4 or less (when S421 is NO), the payout CPU 301 returns the process to S421.

  On the other hand, in S421, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the system timer is 4 or less (when S421 is YES), the payout CPU 301 subtracts “4” from the system timer (S422). In this process, the payout CPU 301 initializes a system timer.

  That is, if the system timer is a timer that counts every 1 ms, the payout CPU 301 executes the processing of S423 and later described later every 4 ms by executing S421 and S422.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all the timers used in the main processing (S423). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a ball lending control process (S424). In this process, when the lending operation unit 151 is operated, the payout CPU 301 manages game balls and creates a command to be transmitted to the card unit 150, and receives a ball lending command transmitted from the card unit 150. Then, the number of game balls to be lent is managed.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a prize ball control process (S425). In this process, the payout CPU 301 pays out the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the general winning ports 51, 52, the first winning port 53, and the second winning port 54 when the game ball wins. Manage outgoing game balls.

  Next, on condition that an error has occurred in the payout control circuit 300, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout state notification display device 178 so as to display that the error has occurred in the payout control circuit 300 (S426).

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
Next, a system timer interrupt process by the payout CPU 301 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the system timer interrupt process according to the present embodiment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout CPU 301 interrupts the main processing at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt processing even during the execution of the main processing shown in FIG. 104 described above.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 executes a system timer interrupt process according to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 millisecond) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) in the payout control circuit 300. I do.

  First, the payout CPU 301 receives a detection command (signal) of the main control circuit 70 and various sensors, and executes a command reception process for analyzing the received command at the same time (S431).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all the timers (for example, the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B) used in the system timer interrupt processing (S432). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a later-described secured ball detection process (see FIG. 106) (S433).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a below-described security ball absence detection process (see FIG. 107) (S434). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 executes a count switch detection process (see FIG. 108) described later (S435). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a motor start waiting process (see FIG. 109) described later (S436).

  Then, finally, the payout CPU 301 executes a command transmission process of transmitting a command indicating payout error information of the payout control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 70 (S437). For example, when a signal indicating that the lower plate is full is input from the lower plate full switch 179, the payout CPU 301 sends a payout error information command indicating that the lower plate is full to the main control circuit. 70.

  However, for the specified time (for example, 6 seconds) immediately after the power is turned on, the main control circuit 70 holds the activation waiting time of the sub-control circuit 200. Do not send commands.

  Here, when the power is turned on, the history information regarding the payout error information is cleared. Even if the lower plate is full before the power interruption and the lower plate full state is released by discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 during the power interruption, etc. Information indicating that the full state has been released is not transmitted. However, the dispensing motor abnormality or the excessive dispensing abnormality that is released when the power is turned on again is initialized when the power is restored.

[Detection processing with security ball]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the security ball presence detection process performed in S433 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the security ball presence detection process in the present embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (S441). In S441, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (if S441 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sends the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that replenishment is not necessary, and the process proceeds to S447.

  On the other hand, in S441, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0 (in the case of NO determination in S441), the payout CPU 301 sets the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. Is determined to be necessary, and it is determined whether or not the first 15-ball security switch 172A is in the ON state (S442).

  In S442, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball security switch 172A is not in the ON state (in the case of NO determination in S442), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number of balls in the first ball supply passage 171A (this embodiment). In the embodiment, 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, it is determined that there is no security ball, and the process proceeds to S447.

  On the other hand, in S442, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball security switch 172A is ON (in the case of YES determination in S442), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number of balls in the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that (in this embodiment) 15 game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a secured ball, and the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is decremented by "1" (S443).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (S444). In S444, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0 (if S444 is NO), the payout CPU 301 supplies the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. Is determined to be necessary, and the process proceeds to S447.

  On the other hand, in S444, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (when S444 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the replenishment of the ball is not necessary, and 1 is set to the first falling ball confirmation flag (S445).

  Here, the first falling ball confirmation flag is set to “1” when it is not necessary to supply game balls to the first ball supply passage 171A, that is, when there is a collateral ball, the first ball supply passage This flag is set to “0” when it is necessary to supply game balls to 171A, that is, when there is no secured ball.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 0 to the first stop factor flag (S446). Here, the first stop factor flag is a flag for which “0” or “1” is set according to whether or not there is a factor (stop factor) for stopping the payout of game balls by the prize ball case unit 170. Yes, particularly, regarding the payout of game balls accumulated (secured) in the first ball supply passage 171A, a flag that is set to “1” when there is a stop factor and is set to “0” when there is no stop factor. It is.

  In the processing of S446, it is determined in S444 that the supply of the game balls to the first ball supply passage 171A has been completed and a predetermined number (15 in the present embodiment) of game balls has been accumulated. Therefore, 0 is set to the first stop factor flag in the sense of canceling out of ball, which is the stop factor. Note that, as will be described later, there are various stop factors other than the out of ball. Here, a broken ball is cited as an example.

  Next, when S441 is determined as YES, when S442 is determined as NO, or when S444 is determined as NO, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (S447). ).

  In S447, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (when S447 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sends the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that replenishment is not necessary, and the security ball presence detection process ends.

  On the other hand, in S447, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0 (NO in S447), the payout CPU 301 sets the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. Is determined to be necessary, and it is determined whether or not the second 15-ball security switch 172B is ON (S448).

  In S448, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball security switch 172B is not in the ON state (in the case of NO determination in S448), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number of balls in the second ball supply passage 171B (this embodiment). In the embodiment, 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, it is determined that there is no secured ball, and the secured ball presence detection process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in S448, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball security switch 172B is in the ON state (if S448 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number of balls in the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that (15 in the present embodiment) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a secured ball, and the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is decremented by "1" (S449).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (S450). In S450, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0 (if S450 is NO), the payout CPU 301 supplies the game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B. Is determined to be necessary, and the security ball presence detection process ends.

  On the other hand, in S450, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (if S450 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that it is not necessary to supply a ball, and 1 is set to the second falling ball confirmation flag (S451).

  Here, the second falling ball confirmation flag is set to “1” when it is not necessary to supply game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B, that is, when there is a collateral ball, the second ball supply passage This flag is set to "0" when it is necessary to supply game balls to 171B, that is, when there is no secured ball.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 0 to the second stop factor flag (S452), and ends the secured ball presence detection process. Here, the second stop factor flag is a flag in which “0” or “1” is set according to whether or not there is a factor (stop factor) for stopping the payout of gaming balls by the prize ball case unit 170. Yes, particularly, regarding the payout of game balls accumulated (secured) in the second ball supply passage 171B, a flag that is set to “1” when there is a stop factor and set to “0” when there is no stop factor. It is.

  In the process of S452, it is determined in S450 that replenishment of the game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B is completed and a predetermined number (15 in the present embodiment) of game balls is accumulated. For this reason, 0 is set in the second stop factor flag in the sense of canceling out of ball, which is the stop factor.

  In this manner, in the security ball presence detection processing, the security ball counter and the 15-ball security switch determine whether or not there is a security ball, determine whether to supply game balls, and determine the stop factor (for the payout motor, sprocket, or payout). Since it is possible to determine whether or not to release the security ball, it is possible to more accurately manage the secured ball in the payout.

[Detection processing without security ball]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a description will be given of the security ball absence detection process performed in S434 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105). FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the security ball absence detection process in the present embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is 0 (S461). In S461, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is not 0 (NO in S461), the payout CPU 301 is refilling the first sphere supply passage 171A with game balls. Is determined, and the process proceeds to S471.

  On the other hand, in S461, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is 0 (if S461 is YES), the payout CPU 301 executes the game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the supply of the ball has been completed, and it is determined whether the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (S462).

  In S462, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (when S462 is YES), the payout CPU 301 stores the predetermined number (number of pieces) in the first ball supply passage 171A. In the embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a secured ball, and it is determined whether or not the first 15-ball secured switch 172A is in an OFF state (S463).

  Here, in S461 and S462, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” every time the system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 105 is performed every 1 ms, that is, the updated value of the first secured ball timer 306A and the secured value. In step S443 of the ball presence detection process (see FIG. 106), "1" is subtracted, that is, the updated value of the first secured ball counter 305A is compared. It is determined whether or not the payout is prohibited.

  For example, if S461 is a YES determination and S462 is a YES determination, both the value of the first secured ball timer 306A and the value of the first secured ball counter 305A are set to 0 as the predetermined values. Therefore, when 2000 ms, which is the initial value of the first secured ball timer 306A set as a time sufficient to pay out 15 game balls from the ball tank 161, has elapsed, the first secured ball counter is set. This means that 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of 305A, has elapsed.

  Since 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of the first secured ball counter 305A, is a value that is not subtracted unless the first 15-ball secured switch 172A detects a game ball, when 2000 ms has elapsed (0 ), The initial value of the first secured ball counter 305A becomes 1950 times (1950 ms), and the first ball supply passage 171A is supplied with 15 game balls. Is guaranteed.

  On the other hand, if S461 is YES and S462 is NO, the value of the first secured ball counter 305A becomes 0 when the value of the first secured ball timer 306A becomes 0. Not that.

  That is, when 2000 ms as the initial value of the first secured ball timer 306A has elapsed, 1950 times (1950 ms) as the initial value of the first secured ball counter 305A has not elapsed. Accordingly, it can be estimated that there is a time during which the first 15-ball security switch 172A does not detect a game ball before 2000 ms elapses, that is, a time when the supply of the game ball is interrupted. Therefore, if S461 is YES and S462 is NO, it is determined that 15 game balls have not been supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A.

  The payout CPU 301 that performs a process of comparing the value of the first secured ball timer 306A with the value of the first secured ball counter 305A constitutes a determination unit.

  Next, in S463, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball security switch 172A is not in the OFF state (in the case of NO in S463), the payout CPU 301 places the fifteen balls in the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that game balls are being replenished, and the process proceeds to S471.

  On the other hand, in S463, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball security switch 172A is in the OFF state (in the case of YES determination in S463), the payout CPU 301 performs the first process in S461 and S462. Although it is guaranteed that 15 game balls are supplied to one ball supply passage 171A, 15 game balls are not supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A for some reason. It is determined that there is no security ball, and the first falling ball confirmation flag is set to 0 (S464).

  Here, the factor that is determined to be YES in S463 includes, for example, a case where a game ball is excessively paid out due to a failure of the first sprocket 173A or the payout motor 174 or the like. At this time, the payout of game balls by the first sprocket 173A is prohibited.

  Here, the case where the game balls are excessively paid out means that, for example, as a result of excessive rotation of the first sprocket 173A, the number of game balls supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A is reduced from 15 to 14. The first 15-ball security switch 172A detects that the game ball that has been reduced and replenished to the first ball supply passage 171A following the paid-out game ball moves in the direction of the first sprocket 173A. This is the case where the first 15-ball security switch 172A is turned off because the game ball that has moved also moves in the direction of the first sprocket 173A.

  That is, the payout CPU 301 pays out the game ball by the first sprocket 173A even when the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 when the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is 0. If the game ball has not been detected by the first 15-ball security switch 172A before, the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A through the drive of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

  As described above, the payout CPU 301 can determine whether or not there is a game ball supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A, so that the payout management can be performed more accurately.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) in the first secured ball timer 306A as a monitoring time of the idle state of the payout motor 174 (S465). When the set time of 2000 ms has elapsed, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and a notification is made by the payout state notification display device 178.

  After that, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times of monitoring the idling state of the payout motor 174 in the first secured ball counter 305A (S466), and shifts the processing to S471.

  On the other hand, in S462, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0 (if S462 is NO), the payout CPU 301 stores the predetermined number (in the first ball supply passage 171A) in the first ball supply passage 171A. In the present embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no security ball, and 1 is set to the first stop factor flag (S467).

  In this process, as described above, since it is determined that 15 game balls have not been supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A in S461 and S462, the payout of game balls by the first sprocket 173A is prohibited. Is set to the first stop factor flag.

  In other words, when the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0 when the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is 0, the payout CPU 301 uses the first sprocket 173A through the drive of the payout motor 174. Prohibition of payout of game balls.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 1 (S468), and moves the processing to S471. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of requesting the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A.

  Here, the origin of the first sprocket 173A is a rotation position (drive position) at which a game ball can be paid out to the first payout passage 180A when the first sprocket 173A is rotated. In the present embodiment, the number of steps of the payout motor 174 is controlled based on the origin.

  Note that when the first sprocket 173A stops based on some stopping factor (such as an “error related to payout” described later), the first sprocket 173A detects a position detection sensor (for example, an index for ascertaining the rotational position of the first sprocket 173A). ) Is not provided, the current rotational position (drive position) is unknown, that is, it is unknown how many steps the dispensing motor 174 has been driven based on the origin, so that the first sprocket 173A The origin may be unknown.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first sprocket 173A stops based on the stop factor, that is, when the origin adjustment flag is set to 1, the origin adjustment for grasping the origin of the first sprocket 173A is performed. Control is performed. That is, when it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited as described above, the payout CPU 301 performs the origin adjustment control. The same applies to retry control described later.

  In this way, by performing the origin adjustment control, the origin position of the sprocket 173 can be adjusted. Therefore, for example, even if the dispensing device uses the sprocket 173 that does not include the position detection sensor, the dispensing can be accurately performed. Can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the dispensing device in which the sprocket 173 is not provided with the position detection sensor has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Also, by performing the origin adjustment control, it is possible to more accurately manage the position of the sprocket and the dispensing, so that the dispensing can be performed more accurately.

  The origin adjustment flag is a flag that is set in accordance with the presence / absence of a request for origin adjustment control, and is set to “1” when there is a request for origin adjustment control, and is set when there is no request for origin adjustment control. This flag is set to “0”.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (four steps in the present embodiment) until a game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A. Here, the unit drive amount (four steps in the present embodiment) is smaller than the payout drive amount (16 steps in the present embodiment) described later.

  Furthermore, the unit drive amount (four steps in the present embodiment) is divided into four (the later-described origin request retry times) a payout drive amount (16 steps in the present embodiment) described later as a specific number. Drive amount.

  The origin adjustment control is common to retry control described later. Therefore, even in the retry control, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (four steps in the present embodiment) until a game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A. Details will be described later. The payout CPU 301 that controls the driving of the payout motor 174 constitutes control means and drive control means.

  Here, in S467 described above, the first stop factor flag is set to 1 to prohibit the first sprocket 173A from paying out game balls. However, when the origin adjustment control is required as described above, If the payout of game balls by the first sprocket 173A is not permitted, the origin cannot be adjusted.

  The same applies to retry control. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if it is determined that the payout of the game balls is prohibited, the payout CPU 301 permits the payout of the game balls on condition that the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed. This can prevent the origin adjustment control (retry control) from being disabled due to the prohibition of the payout of the game balls.

  Next, when S461 is determined to be NO, when S463 is determined to be NO, or after the end of S466 or after the end of S468, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0. It is determined (S471).

  In S471, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is not 0 (if S471 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is refilling the game ball into the second ball supply passage 171B. Is determined, the security ball absence detection process ends.

  On the other hand, in S471, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0 (if S471 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the replenishment of the ball has been completed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (S472).

  In S472, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (in the case of YES determination in S472), the payout CPU 301 stores the predetermined number (number of pieces) in the second ball supply passage 171B. In the embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a secured ball, and it is determined whether or not the second 15-ball secured switch 172B is in an OFF state (S473).

  Here, the determination whether to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B is the same as the determination whether to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A described above. Description is omitted. Note that the payout CPU 301 that performs a process of comparing the value of the second secured ball timer 306B with the value of the second secured ball counter 305B constitutes a determination unit.

  Next, in S473, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball security switch 172B is not in the OFF state (if S473 is NO), the payout CPU 301 places the fifteen balls in the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that game balls are being replenished, and the security ball absence detection processing ends.

  On the other hand, in S473, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball security switch 172B is in the OFF state (in the case of YES determination in S473), the payout CPU 301 once performs the first in S471 and S472. Although it is guaranteed that 15 game balls are supplied to the second ball supply path 171B, 15 game balls are not supplied to the second ball supply path 171B due to some factor, that is, It is determined that there is no security ball, and 0 is set to the second falling ball confirmation flag (S474).

  Here, the factor that is determined to be YES in S473 includes, for example, a case where a game ball is excessively paid out due to a failure of the second sprocket 173B or the payout motor 174, or the like. At this time, payout of game balls by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited.

  In other words, even if the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 when the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0, the payout CPU 301 pays out the game ball by the second sprocket 173B. If the game ball has not been detected by the second 15-ball security switch 172B before the game is performed, the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B through the driving of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) in the second secured ball timer 306B as the monitoring time of the idle state of the payout motor 174 (S475). When the set time of 2000 ms has elapsed, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and a notification is made by the payout state notification display device 178.

  Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times of monitoring the idling state of the payout motor 174 in the second secured ball counter 305B (S476), and ends the secured ball absence detection processing.

  On the other hand, in S472, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0 (in the case of NO determination in S472), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number (in the second ball supply passage 171B) in the second ball supply passage 171B. In the present embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no security ball, and 1 is set to the second stop factor flag (S477).

  In this process, as described above, since it is determined in S471 and S472 that 15 game balls have not been supplied to the second ball supply passage 171B, the payout of game balls by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited. Is set to the second stop factor flag.

  In other words, when the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0 when the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0, the payout CPU 301 uses the second sprocket 173B through the drive of the payout motor 174. Prohibition of payout of game balls.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 1 (S478), and ends the security ball absence detection processing. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of requesting the origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B. Here, the origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B is the same as the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A, and a description thereof will be omitted.

[Count switch detection processing]
Next, the count switch detection processing performed in S435 in the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the counting switch detection processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected passage of a game ball (S481). In S481, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has not detected the passage of the game ball (in the case of NO determination in S481), the payout CPU 301 sets the counting switch. The detection processing ends.

  Here, when the origin adjustment control is being performed, the game ball is not yet detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B, and thus the determination at S481 is NO.

  On the other hand, in S481, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (in the case of YES determination in S481), the payout CPU 301 sets the first payout CPU 301 to the first payout CPU 301. It is determined that the game ball has been paid out by the sprocket 173A or the second sprocket 173B, and the required payout number is subtracted by "1" (S482).

  At this time, the payout CPU 301 can count the number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B. Therefore, the payout CPU 301 forms a counting unit.

  Here, the required number of payouts refers to a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 based on winning of a gaming machine or lending of a game ball to various starting ports or various winning ports, and received by the payout control circuit 300 or a lending ball control command. It is a value obtained by sequentially adding the number of prize balls or the number of lending balls based on the ball control signal, and is the total number of game balls to be paid out by the prize ball case unit 170 (total payout amount).

  The required number of payouts is stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. In addition, the number of award balls and the number of lending balls correspond to the payout amount. The RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300 constitutes a payout storage unit. The required payout number is decremented by payout of the game balls.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the number of requested drops (S483). Here, the required number of drops is determined as the number of game balls to be paid out by one drive of the payout motor 174 based on the required number of payouts (total amount of payouts) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. , And the maximum is 15.

  For example, if the required number of payouts (total amount of payout) is 15 or more, the requested number of drops is 15; if the required number of payouts (total amount of payout) is 14 or less, the number of requested drop is: The number is equal to the stored number of payout requests.

  The requested number of drops is determined by the payout CPU 301 according to the requested number of payouts (total payout amount). Note that the required number of drops corresponds to the divided payout amount. Further, the payout CPU 301 corresponds to a divided payout amount determination unit.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S484). In S484, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S484), the payout CPU 301 shifts the processing to S487.

  On the other hand, in S484, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (if S484 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S485).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S486). Here, the origin adjustment completion flag is a flag for determining whether the origin adjustment control is being performed or the origin adjustment control is completed. When the origin adjustment control is being performed, the flag is set to “0”, and the origin adjustment control is completed. Is a flag set to "1".

  Next, in the case of NO determination in S484, or after the end of S486, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of requested drops is less than 0 (S487). In S487, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the requested number of drops is not less than 0 (NO in S487), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

  On the other hand, in S487, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the requested number of drops is less than 0 (if S487 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of game balls actually paid out is larger than the requested number of drops. Is determined, the number of overpays is incremented by "1" (S488).

  Here, the number of overpay is the number of game balls that have exceeded the required number of dropped balls when the number of game balls actually paid out is larger than the required number of dropped balls, that is, when overpayment occurs. For example, if the requested number of falling balls is 15, but the number of actually paid game balls is 16, if one game ball is overpaid, the number of overpaid “1” is added.

  The payout CPU 301 adds the above-mentioned number of overpays to the total number of game balls detected by the first count switch 181A and the second count switch 181B (total number of game balls actually paid out). ) And the required number of payouts can be stored in the RAM 303.

  Therefore, the RAM 303 constitutes a difference accumulation unit. The number of overpays is stored in the RAM 303 until a predetermined initialization operation is performed. The predetermined initialization operation mentioned here includes, for example, turning on the power again.

  In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpays, or the work area of the error information portion can be obtained without turning on the power again. One work area including three work areas, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of overpay has become 10 or more (S489). In other words, the payout CPU 301 compares the total number of game balls detected by the first count switch 181A and the second count switch 181B (the total number of game balls actually paid out) with the required number of payouts. Then, it is determined whether or not the difference (total number of overpay) is 10 or more.

  In S489, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of overpays is not equal to or more than 10 (NO in S489), the payout CPU 301 sets the number of game balls related to overpayment to an allowable range (allowable value). The count switch detection process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in S489, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of overpay has become 10 or more (if S489 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of game balls related to the overpayout is not within the allowable range (allowable). Is determined, the overpay flag is set to 1 (S490), and the counting switch detection processing ends.

  Here, the overpay flag is a flag for determining whether or not the number of game balls related to overpayout is within an allowable range (allowable value), and the number of game balls related to overpayout is within the allowable range. , The flag is set to 0, and is set to 1 when the number of game balls related to overpayout is not within the allowable range (more than the allowable value).

  When the overpay flag is set to 1, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout motor 174 so as to stop the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B until the above-mentioned predetermined initialization operation is performed. .

[Motor start waiting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the motor start waiting process performed in S436 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start waiting process in the present embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S501). In S501, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 (NO in S501), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is being performed, and shifts the processing to S506.

  On the other hand, in S501, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (when S501 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been completed, and Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second stop factor flag is 1 (S502).

  In S502, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S502), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and starts the motor. The waiting process ends.

  On the other hand, in S502, when the payout CPU 301 determines that none of the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (NO in S502), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Then, it is determined whether the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S503).

  In S503, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (if NO in S503), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no security ball, and End the boot waiting process.

  On the other hand, in S503, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S503), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a secured ball and pays out. It is determined whether the requested number is greater than 0 (S504).

  In S504, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is not larger than 0 (NO in S504), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request, and ends the motor start waiting process.

  On the other hand, in S504, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is greater than 0 (YES in S504), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request, and performs a motor activation initial process (see FIG. 110) (S505).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S506). In S506, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S506), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for the origin adjustment control, and shifts the processing to S507. Therefore, when the determination in S506 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

  On the other hand, in S506, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S506), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for the origin adjustment control, and It is determined whether the value is larger, that is, whether the origin adjustment control has been performed 12 times (S508). Therefore, when the determination in S506 is YES, the origin adjustment control is performed.

  Here, the number of retries is the number of times the origin adjustment control is performed, and more specifically, a value that is added each time the number of motor operations described later is updated. In the origin adjustment control, a drive amount required to cause the sprocket 173 to pay out one game ball and then pay out the next game ball, that is, a drive amount required to pay out one game ball (payout drive amount). Since only the payout motor 174 is driven, the payout drive amount required to pay out this one game ball (in the present embodiment, 16 steps = unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times (origin request retry count) )) Was set to the number of motor operations = 1. Here, the unit drive amount as the excitation data is 4 steps × 5 ms.

  Therefore, each time one motor operation number is set (updated) in S510 to be described later, it is determined that the origin adjustment control is completed once, and the number of retries is added. As described above, since the origin adjustment control is common to the retry control, the number of retries can be said to be the number of times the retry control is performed.

  As described above, the payout CPU 301 updates the number of motor operations as a retry value on the condition that the drive amount of the payout motor 174 reaches the payout drive amount (16 steps in the present embodiment).

  The payout CPU 301 that updates the number of operating motors constitutes a retry value updating unit. Also, the payout CPU 301 manages the number of times the number of motor operations has been updated or the number of times excitation data has been set, that is, the number of retries as the number of times origin adjustment control (retry control) has been performed.

  In the present embodiment, each of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B is provided with three grooves for receiving game balls so that three game balls are paid out each time the sprocket rotates once. ing.

  Therefore, when the number of motor operations is updated six times, the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are each driven by only one rotation (in the present embodiment, 96 steps = 16 steps (unit drive amount ( Four steps) × 4 times (origin request retry times) × 6 times (half of 12 retry times) means that the payout motor 174 has been driven.

  Therefore, the number of times of retry is greater than 12 means that the drive amount for two rotations of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B (in this embodiment, 192 steps = 96 steps (drive amount for one rotation)) (× 2 times) means that the payout motor 174 was driven with a drive amount exceeding (× 2). The number of retries of 12 times is the upper limit of the number of retries in which 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times) are set as one set.

  In S508, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is greater than 12, (if S508 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of origin adjustment controls has reached the upper limit number (12 times). Then, the process proceeds to S507.

  At this time, the payout CPU 301 determines that the drive amount of the payout motor 174 has exceeded 192 steps (upper limit drive amount) or the number of retries has been reached without detecting the game ball by the first and second count switches 181A and 181B. The drive of the payout motor 174 is controlled so that the payout of the game balls is stopped until a predetermined initialization operation is performed on condition that the number of times has exceeded 12 times (upper limit number). Thereby, the origin adjustment control (retry control) ends. The predetermined initialization operation mentioned here includes, for example, turning on the power again.

  In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpays, or the work area of the error information portion without turning on the power again. The work area including one, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

  In S507, the payout CPU 301 sets the activation state of the payout motor 174 (S507), and moves the processing to S514. In this process, if the determination in S506 is NO, since the origin adjustment control is not performed, the acceleration state of the payout motor 174 according to the required number of drops is set so that the normal payout of the game balls is performed. If the determination in S508 is YES, the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state to stop paying out the game balls.

  On the other hand, in S508, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is not larger than 12 (in the case of NO determination in S508), the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 4 steps in preparation for the next origin adjustment control. (S509). In this process, four steps are set as the unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 when executing the origin adjustment control.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motor operations to one (S510), and sets the origin request retry count to four (S511). In this processing, the four steps set as the step counter mask value in S509 described above are multiplied by four times set as the origin request retry count, whereby the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball is obtained. Sixteen steps are set.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S512). Here, the falling ball monitoring timer determines whether there is a falling ball and whether a stop factor has occurred after driving the payout motor 174 with the excitation data for the unit driving amount (4 steps) in the origin adjustment control. Is a timer for measuring a falling ball monitoring time (130 ms in the origin adjustment control) for monitoring the falling ball.

  The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is the excitation data holding period (the present embodiment) as the holding period for holding the posture of the first and second sprockets 171A and 171B after driving the payout motor 174 for four steps. 30 ms) and a cooling period for cooling the payout motor 174 (100 ms in the origin adjustment control).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to “0” (S513). Next, after the end of S507 or after the end of S513, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S514), and ends the motor start waiting process.

  In this process, for example, in the case of performing the origin adjustment control, the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball is 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times (origin request retry times)). Set the excitation data. Further, when paying out normal game balls, excitation data for a predetermined step is set as a drive amount necessary to pay out the required number of game balls. When the payout motor 174 is set in the idle state so that the payout of the game balls is stopped, the excitation data is set to 0.

[Motor startup initial processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the motor start initial process performed in S505 during the motor start waiting process (see FIG. 109) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor startup initial process in the present embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of requested drops from the number of requested payouts (S521). In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers is set according to the payout request number (total payout amount). For example, if the number of requested payouts (total amount of payouts) is 20, the requested number of drops is set to 15. On the other hand, when the number of required payouts (total amount of payouts) is 10, the number of requested drops is set to 10, which is the same as the number of requested payouts.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a security ball monitoring setting process (S522). In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of times of ON detection monitoring in the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B in accordance with the requested number of drops.

  For example, if the number of required drops is 9 to 10, 650 times (650 ms) are set as the ON detection monitoring times. Further, the payout CPU 301 sets the monitoring time in the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B according to the number of requested fall. For example, if the number of requested drops is 9 to 10, 850 ms is set as the monitoring time.

  Here, the above-mentioned number of times of ON detection monitoring and monitoring time are the initial values of the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B set in the secured ball monitoring initial setting process of S412 during the power-on process of FIG. , And different from the initial values of the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets “0” to the first and second falling ball confirmation flags, respectively (S523). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 initializes the number of retries (S524), and sets "1" to an origin adjustment completion flag (S525).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S526). The clearing ball monitoring timer, which is cleared here, drives the payout motor 174 with the excitation data of the drive amount necessary to pay out the required number of drops in the normal payout control in which the origin adjustment control and the retry control are not executed. After that, the timer measures a falling ball monitoring time (500 ms in normal payout control) for monitoring whether there are falling balls of the required number of falling and whether or not a stop factor has occurred.

  The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) includes an excitation data holding period (30 ms in the present embodiment) and a cooling period of the payout motor 174 (470 ms in normal payout control). This falling ball monitoring time corresponds to a certain period.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the step counter to 0 (S527). Here, the step counter is a counter that counts the number of steps of the payout motor 174.

  For example, when the requested number of drops is 15, when the drop operation of 15 game balls, that is, the payout operation, is completed, the value of the step counter becomes a value for 240 steps. In this processing, the payout CPU 301 clears, for example, the value of 240 steps counted as described above.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 16 steps (S528), and ends the motor activation initial processing. Thus, 16 steps are set as the number of steps of the payout motor 174 necessary to pay out one game ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111 to FIG. 122, a characteristic portion related to payout control in the present embodiment will be described in detail.
FIG. 111 is a time chart illustrating an excitation method of the payout motor 174 according to the present embodiment. The payout motor 174 employs a two-phase excitation method and a method capable of switching between a high current and a low current.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the payout CPU 301 rotates the payout motor 174 in the forward direction by changing the excitation data in the order of t1, t2, t3, and t4. However, in the present embodiment, the payout motor 174 is structurally incapable of reverse rotation.

  Here, the origin is the position where both “A−” and “B−” of the payout motor 174 are on. Note that “A + and B + (indicated by“ S ”in the figure)” of the payout motor 174 represent on / off by software control, and “A− and B− (indicated by“ H ”in the figure)” It indicates ON / OFF by logical inversion of the output.

  However, in this embodiment, since there is no detecting means such as an index sensor as in the related art, it is necessary to perform phase matching between the apparent origin (excitation data 0) and the structural origin. This phase adjustment of the origin is the origin adjustment, and controlling the payout motor 174 to perform the phase adjustment is called origin adjustment control.

  The origin adjustment control is performed using the first payout operation when the first payout request is made when the origin adjustment is required (when there is an origin adjustment target factor). For example, the origin adjustment control is performed using the payout operation of the first game ball of the requested number of drops at the time of the first payout request after the power is turned on.

  Here, the payout request is made from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300. Specifically, the payout request is transmitted to the payout control circuit 300 as prize ball control data including information such as the number of payout requests. . As shown in FIG. 112, the payout control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control data from the main control circuit 70 by a reception interrupt.

  On the other hand, the payout control circuit 300 transmits payout error information data to the main control circuit 70 as shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 perform one-sided communication as shown in FIG. 41. However, as shown in FIG. The circuit 300 may communicate with each other.

  Here, when the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 communicate with each other, the serial communication method is used as the most desirable mode, but the present invention is not limited to the serial communication method. Various communication schemes such as can be used.

  As shown in FIG. 115, after the payout control circuit 300 detects an error by self-diagnosis, the payout control circuit 300 transmits error information including payout control error information to be described later to the main control circuit 70 by using a serial communication method.

  At this time, the minimum transmission interval of the error transmission from the payout control circuit 300 is set to a predetermined time (12 ms in the present embodiment), and when the error information changes continuously, the processing is shown in S437. As described above, instead of transmitting the error information to the main control circuit 70 each time the error information changes using the command transmission process executable every 1 ms, as shown in FIG. The combining is performed, and the error information is transmitted at the minimum transmission interval or after the minimum transmission interval has elapsed.

  As a method of synthesizing error information, as shown in FIG. 116, each bit numerical value of parameter 1 and parameter 2 composed of 8 bits is updated or changed, and error information is transmitted.

  At this time, when the parameter 1 and the parameter 2 are received as error information, the main control circuit 70 performs masking on each parameter and obtains error information (payout control error information).

  The management of error information in the payout control circuit 300, the management of error information in the main control circuit 70, and the management of error information in the sub control circuit 200 are as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 117 illustrates a mode of reporting error information in the payout control circuit 300, a mode of reporting error information in the main control circuit 70, and a mode of reporting error information in the sub-control circuit 200.

  Specifically, the lower tray full state in the payout control circuit 300 is recognized as lower tray full detection by the main control circuit 70, and based on the error information transmitted from the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200 The user is notified via the liquid crystal display device 13 that "Please remove the ball."

  Also, regarding the out-of-ball 1 state, the out-of-ball 2 state, the motor abnormal state, the VL unconnected state, the CR side communication abnormality, the over-payout abnormality, the dispensed ball clogging, the reception command abnormality, the reception abnormality, and the communication error in the payout control circuit 300 Is recognized by the main control circuit 70 as a payout abnormality detection, and the sub control circuit notifies the "call a clerk" via the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the payout error information transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

  As described above, the main control circuit 70 manages a plurality of pieces of error information relating to the payout control to be transmitted, divided into two types, “lower-dish-full-state error information” and “other information”.

  By transmitting and receiving such error information, the error ellipse is continuously transmitted at the minimum transmission interval of the payout control circuit 300 in an environment where the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 are performing serial communication with each other. (Error information, it can be expressed that a plurality of errors have occurred), it is possible to combine the error information.

  Therefore, the payout control circuit 300 does not transmit the error information after the main control circuit 70 requests transmission of the error information (or after any transmission request is made). It is possible to transmit error information at intervals or at predetermined time intervals.

  In the above description, error information (payout control error information) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various commands can be combined.

  Next, the prize ball control processing in the present embodiment will be described. In this prize ball control processing, at least the above-described origin adjustment control, normal payout control, and retry control are performed. First, the origin adjustment control in the prize ball control processing will be described.

  As described above, the origin adjustment control is executed when a target factor of the origin adjustment occurs. Here, the target factors when performing the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control processing include, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped, when the power is turned on, when the power is restored, when an underpayment occurs after the completion of the origin adjustment control, When the stop factor is canceled, when the abnormal payout factor is canceled, and when an overpay occurs.

  When the underpayout occurs after the completion of the origin adjustment control, for example, a step-out of the payout motor 174 occurs, or a predetermined number (15 in the present embodiment) of game balls is secured in the ball supply passage 171. There is a case where the 15-ball security switch 172 detects a game ball due to a short circuit, and an intermittent state occurs.

  The origin adjustment control at the time of canceling the stop factor is performed, for example, in response to the backflow of the game ball when the lower plate full switch 179 is short-circuited. Also, the origin adjustment control at the time of canceling the cause of the abnormal payment is performed in response to a physical shift of the origin due to, for example, disconnection, short circuit, or radio wave irradiation. Further, the origin adjustment control at the time of occurrence of overpay is performed in consideration of the subsequent step-out of the payout motor 174.

  In the origin adjustment control, as described above, when the payout motor 174 is driven by 16 steps, one game ball can be dropped (paid), so that the drive of 4 steps × 5 ms as a unit drive amount is performed. The point at which the confirmation of the falling ball is completed within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms = excitation data holding period 30 ms + cooling period 100 ms) is regarded as the physical origin (origin adjustment completed). If the falling ball cannot be confirmed within the falling ball monitoring time, the above-described driving of the payout motor 174 is performed in units of 4 steps for 16 steps.

  However, if a falling ball cannot be detected even when the payout motor 174 is driven for 16 steps, it is determined that normal payout is not performed (or it may be determined that there is a stop factor). The drive of the payout motor 174 in units of four steps is repeated for two rotations.

  Further, “repeat the drive of the payout motor 174 for two rotations” means that the state of the payout motor 174 or the position of the sprocket 173 at the time when it is determined that the falling ball cannot be detected even when the payout motor 174 is driven. As the (or rotation start position), for example, when 48 steps are required for one rotation of the motor, it indicates that driving for 96 steps is performed.

  This can also be expressed as equivalent to a drive that can drop 12 balls, and drives the payout motor 174 or the sprocket 173 (or rotates or rotates the rotation angle or rotation angle) enough to drop a predetermined number of game balls. Driving) is performed.

  Note that the origin adjustment control is completed when a falling ball is detected, but if the falling ball is not counted as a paid game ball, the ball will be overpaid. Therefore, it is necessary to count the falling balls at the time of completion of the origin adjustment control as the paid game balls.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the payout CPU 301 subtracts one drop request number to 14 pieces on condition that a falling ball is detected by the count switch 181 during the origin adjustment control. . As a result, upon completion of the origin adjustment control, the remaining requested drop number (14) excluding one drop-out number is paid out for the requested drop number. Thereafter, a normal payout operation is performed.

  FIG. 118 is a timing chart of the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control processing. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, if the stop factor is released after the power is turned on again, and then a payout request is issued, the origin adjustment control is executed, and the excitation data for 4 steps × 5 ms is first applied. 174 drives the payout motor 174 for four steps. At this time, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched from a low current to a high current when the origin adjustment control is started.

  Thereafter, when the driving of the payout motor 174 for four steps is completed, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period). Then, when the excitation data holding period has elapsed, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a low current, and thereafter, is maintained at a low current for 100 ms (cooling period).

  The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is constituted by 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 100 ms (cooling period). The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) can be calculated based on a free fall theoretical formula.

  Thereafter, when a falling ball is detected by the second counting switch 181B within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms), the number of required falling balls, which was three at the start of the origin adjustment, is updated to two. Further, the origin adjustment control is completed by detecting the falling ball, and the phase shift from the structural origin is eliminated.

  FIG. 119 is a timing chart of the origin adjustment retry operation after the completion of the origin adjustment using the award ball control processing. For example, as shown in FIG. 119, the operation of driving the payout motor 174 for four steps based on the above-described excitation data for 4 steps × 5 ms (this operation is referred to as an origin adjustment cycle) is performed only once. If not detected, the same origin adjustment cycle is repeated up to 16 steps. That is, after starting the origin adjustment control, a total of four origin adjustment cycles are repeated.

  However, if the falling ball cannot be detected even after the four origin adjustment cycles have been performed, the four origin adjustment cycles are performed again. Here, a period during which the first four origin adjustment cycles are performed is referred to as a basic retry operation period. Note that the origin adjustment cycle is a unit drive amount (4 steps) × 5 ms, and the basic retry operation period is a unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 (origin request retry times). In FIG. 119, the operation started when the counting switch 181 does not detect the falling ball during the basic retry operation period is defined as the origin adjustment retry. However, the operation is not limited to this. The mode of repeating the process up to the upper limit may be set as the origin adjustment retry.

  FIG. 120 is a timing chart of a basic payout operation of the prize ball control process, that is, a normal payout operation. FIG. 120 is a timing chart exemplifying a payout operation when paying out 15 game balls.

  As shown in FIG. 120, first, when 15 pieces are determined as the required number of drops, the payout CPU 301 determines the drive amount of the payout motor 174 based on the determined number of required drops (15 pieces). Specifically, excitation data necessary for paying out 15 game balls is determined. The payout CPU 301 that determines the drive amount of the payout motor 174 constitutes a drive amount determination unit.

  Next, when the excitation data required to pay out 15 game balls is set, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a high current, and the payout motor 174 is driven based on the set excitation data. The excitation data at this time is set so that the payout motor 174 gradually accelerates to a steady state, and then decelerates and stops.

  Thereafter, when the driving of the payout motor 174 based on the set excitation data ends, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period as a holding period). Then, when the excitation data holding period elapses, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a low current, and thereafter, is maintained at a low current for 470 ms (cooling period).

  The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is constituted by 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 470 ms (cooling period). During the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped. The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) at this time is different from the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) during the origin adjustment control.

  Then, during the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the payout CPU 301 monitors whether or not the falling of the requested number of game balls (15) has been confirmed. That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not game balls corresponding to the requested number of falls (15) are detected through the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B during the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms). The payout CPU 301 that makes such a determination constitutes a payout determination unit.

  The payout CPU 301 determines that, during the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), it is not possible to confirm that the required number of falling balls (15) has fallen, that is, the first number of playing balls corresponding to the required number of falling balls (15) If it is determined that the detection is not detected through the second counting switches 181A and 181B, it is determined that a stop factor has occurred, and a transition is made to an idle state to stop the driving of the payout motor 174 thereafter. As a result, the payout operation cannot be performed continuously.

  On the other hand, even if it is confirmed that the required number of dropped balls (15) has been dropped during the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the game device shifts to the idle state in preparation for the subsequent payout operation.

  Here, the excitation data according to the required number of drops in the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing is as shown in FIG. For example, when the required number of drops is 5 to 15, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), the excitation data is the acceleration data and the deceleration state for each of two game balls.

  FIG. 121 (b) shows the case where the number of drop requests is four, FIG. 121 (c) shows the case where the number of drop requests is three, FIG. 121 (d) shows the case where the number of drop requests is two, and FIG. (E) represents the excitation data when the number of required drops is one. Note that the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is provided for any of the requested falling numbers.

  FIG. 122 is a timing chart of the payout operation when a retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process. FIG. 122 is a timing chart exemplifying a payout operation when paying out five game balls.

  As shown in FIG. 122, when the payout operation of the required number of drops (five) is performed, if the game ball related to the fourth payout is not detected by the second counting switch 181B, the player may fall. When the ball monitoring time (500 ms) has elapsed, the number of dropped balls is one short of the required number (5). As a result, the payout CPU 301 determines that falling of the requested number of game balls (5) cannot be confirmed within the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms).

  As described above, when the number of game balls paid out is insufficient for the requested number of drops (five), the underpayment occurs, and the origin adjustment retry operation similar to the origin adjustment retry operation after the completion of the origin adjustment shown in FIG. 119 is performed. The operation is performed. The content of the origin adjustment retry operation is the same as that shown in FIG. 119, and thus the description is omitted.

Next, the error processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
Errors relating to the payout of game balls in the present embodiment include (1) overpayment, (2) clogged payout balls, (3) full bottom plate, (4) out of ball, (5) abnormality in payout motor, and the like. Can be When at least one of these errors occurs, the error is notified via the payout state notification display device 178 (see FIG. 41). Hereinafter, each of these errors will be described in detail.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the payout state notification display device 178. As shown in FIG. 123, the payout state notification display device 178 includes seven segments a to g and an eighth segment DP. Either of these segments a to g and DP is lit according to the type of error or the like.

  For example, (1) the segment b is lit when reporting an overpayout error, (2) the d segment is lit when reporting a clogged ball error, and (3) the lower plate. When reporting a full error, the segment f is lit, (4) when reporting a missing ball error, the segment e is lit, and (5) when dispensing motor abnormality is reported. Illuminates the segment c.

  The DP segment is lit when informing that the ball is being lent. Therefore, the manager of the hall can easily determine what kind of error has occurred by visually checking the lighting state of the segment of the payout state notification display device 178.

  First, (1) Overpayment is an error that does not constitute a stop factor even if it occurs and allows the payout operation to be continued. As shown in FIG. 124, the notification of the overpayment error is such that the number of overpaid game balls after the completion of the payout of the requested number of drops is equal to or greater than the overpayment prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment). It is the timing that became.

  In FIG. 124, the payout detection signal A is a signal indicating whether or not the first counting switch 181A has detected a game ball, and is turned on when a game ball is detected. Similarly, the payout detection signal B is a signal indicating whether or not the second counting switch 181B has detected a game ball.

  The error of the overpayment is released when the power is turned on again. That is, the over-payment error is released when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the overpayment error is also released.

  Next, (2) payout ball clogging is an error based on a stop factor generated due to, for example, ball clogging due to backflow of a game ball, adhesion of dust or entry of foreign matter, or disconnection or short circuit of the counting switch 181. As shown in FIG. 125, for example, when the payout detection signal A of the first counting switch 181A does not turn off even after 100 ms elapses from the time when the payout detection signal A is turned on, the clogging of the payout ball occurs, that is, the stop factor occurs. Is determined. When it is determined that the stop factor has occurred, it is a trigger for notifying an error of the dispensed ball clogging.

  When the counting switch 181 is short-circuited, the dispensing control circuit 300 cannot directly determine the presence or absence of the short-circuit. Therefore, it cannot be used as a stop factor until the retry operation of the 12 times of origin adjustment control described above is completed. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined that the stop factor has occurred when the falling ball monitoring time elapses after the completion of the retry operation of the origin adjustment control for 12 times.

  In addition, when the payout control circuit 300 constantly recognizes a change in voltage that may occur between the payout control circuit 181 and the count switch 181, if the short circuit of the count switch 181 can be recognized or determined, an error occurs without performing a retry operation. The notification may be performed, or the retry operation may be started simultaneously with the notification of the error.

  In addition, the notification of the error of the dispensed ball clogging is canceled by removing each of the factors such as the clogged ball due to the backflow, the adhesion of dust and the inclusion of foreign matter, and the disconnection and short circuit of the counting switch 181.

  Next, (3) lower plate full is an error based on a stop factor generated when the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 are full. As shown in FIG. 126, for example, when the lower plate full switch 179 is not turned off even after one second has passed since the lower plate full switch 179 is turned on, it is determined that a stop factor based on the lower plate full is generated. The time when it is determined that the stop factor has occurred is a trigger for notifying the error of the lower plate full.

  In addition, the notification of the error of the lower plate being full is released by discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 in a full state.

  Next, (4) the ball has run out, for example, when it is detected by the 15-ball security switch 172 that the number of security balls is insufficient, when the ball tank 161 is in a state of waiting for replenishment of game balls, the ball supply passage 171. This is an error based on a stop factor that occurs when the ball is clogged, or when the 15-ball security switch 172 is disconnected.

  Such an out-of-ball error is determined based on a comparison result between the above-described first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B and the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B. Occurs when the stop factor flag is set to 1.

  The trigger for notifying the error of the out of ball is when the above-mentioned stop factor occurs. In addition, this error of running out of balls can be caused by refilling the ball tank 161 with the ball or removing the game ball causing the clogging of the ball by removing a predetermined number (15) of the ball in the ball supply passage 171. Is released by being secured. At this time, the notification of the ball out error is also released.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127, for (5) payout motor abnormality, for example, 12 retry operations are executed based on the home position adjustment cycle, and the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) in the twelfth retry operation elapses. This is also an error based on a stop factor that occurs when the falling ball cannot be confirmed.

  Causes of such stop factors include, for example, a case where a sticky game ball sticks to and does not separate from the sprocket 173, a case where a ball bites between the sprocket 173 and the storage ball (poor motor rotation), and a case where foreign matter is present. There is a case where a step-out occurs due to the motor non-rotation state (only the excitation data is updated) such as mixing.

  As shown in FIG. 127, the notification motor of the delivery motor abnormality is triggered when the above-described stop factor occurs. Further, the dispensing motor abnormality is released by turning on the power again. That is, the trigger for releasing the dispensing motor abnormality is when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the delivery motor abnormality is also released.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, a reception process of the payout control circuit 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is turned off will be described.
As shown in FIG. 128, when an XINT interrupt (power interruption) at the time of power interruption occurs as a non-maskable interrupt prior to the reception interrupt on the side of the payout control circuit 300, the received data is polled in the XINT interrupt and one byte is transmitted. To rescue.

  Also, assuming that a power interruption occurs immediately after writing to the transmission buffer by the main control circuit 70, the dispensing control circuit 300 can receive data after a delay of the baud rate time even during XINT interrupt processing. It is preferable to consider the time elapsed for receiving within the XINT interrupt. However, the condition is that XINT of the power cutoff processing of the payout control circuit 300 does not occur earlier than the main control circuit 70 electrically.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment provides the values (the first value) of the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B on the condition that the payout of the game balls is started. ) And the values (second values) of the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B are updated.

  Therefore, if the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B continuously detect the game ball after the payout of the game ball is started, when the first value becomes 0, A second value smaller than the first value has already been set to 0. In this case, it is guaranteed that the supply of the game balls has been performed in accordance with the payout of the game balls.

  On the other hand, if the second value is not 0 when the first value becomes 0, it means that the supply of the game balls according to the payout of the game balls has not been performed for some reason.

  Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment compares the updated first value with the second value to determine whether or not the replenishment of the game balls has been correctly performed according to the payout of the game balls. Can be determined.

  As a result, for example, the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B are compared with a case where it is determined whether or not the replenishment of the game balls is performed based on the detection of the game balls by the presence or absence of the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B. It is possible to accurately manage and guarantee the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passages 171A and 171B.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment prohibits payout of game balls when the first value is 0 and the second value is not 0, so that the first and second ball supply passages are provided. It is possible to confirm the presence or absence of an abnormality related to the supply of the game ball to 171A and 171B. Thereby, security regarding supply and payout of the game balls can be further improved.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the second value becomes 0 when the first value is 0, and even if it is once guaranteed that the replenishment of the game balls has been performed. After that, until the game balls are paid out, the game balls are excessively paid out due to, for example, malfunctions of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B and the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B. When the number of game balls decreases, the payout of the game balls can be prohibited.

  Thereby, the management of the game balls in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B can be performed more accurately, and the security regarding supply and payout of the game balls can be further improved.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs retry control for driving the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (4 steps) until a game ball is detected by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B. Since it is feasible, a retry operation for eliminating, for example, ball biting can be performed without providing a slit sensor or the like for detecting the driving position of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B.

  When such a retry operation is performed, the driving positions of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B when the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B detect a game ball are adjusted as an origin. Therefore, the origins of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can be adjusted without using a slit sensor or the like.

  As described above, since the retry operation can be used not only at the time of ball biting or the like but also at the time of adjusting the origin, versatility can be given to the retry control, and as a result, the processing by the payout CPU 301 can be simplified. .

  Moreover, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not include a slit sensor or the like, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine can be simplified and reduced in cost.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the unit drive amount (four steps) of the payout motor 174 during execution of the retry control pays out one game ball to the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B. Since the payout drive amount (16 steps) required to pay out the next game ball after the game ball is played, the first and second count switches 181A and 181B are set to a plurality of times to pay out one game ball. It can be driven separately. Thus, for example, when a ball bite or the like has occurred, this can be resolved, and when the origin is adjusted, it can be adjusted to an accurate origin.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the unit drive amount (4 steps) is a drive amount obtained by dividing the payout drive amount (16 steps) into four times, one game ball is paid out. In this case, the number of times the payout motor 174 is driven can be divided into a plurality of times.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the driving amount of the payout motor 174 exceeds the upper limit driving amount (192 steps) without detecting a game ball by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B. At times, the payout means can be stopped until an initialization operation is performed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the award ball case unit 170 due to excessive repetition of the retry operation.

  In addition, since the payout motor 174 is stopped until the initialization operation is performed, the stop of the payout motor 174 causes, for example, no game balls accumulated in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B. It is possible to urge that the prize ball case unit 170 and thus the pachinko gaming machine 1 need to be returned from the abnormal state.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the origin adjustment control (retry control) when it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited, that is, when the stop factor flag is set to 1. The retry operation can always be performed after the driving of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B is stopped due to an abnormality.

  As described above, by performing the retry operation in conjunction with the stop of the driving of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, the processing can be smoothly performed as compared with the case where the retry operation is performed alone.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes a retry operation in the origin adjustment control (retry control) until a game ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B, and performs a motor operation. Since the number of times the number is updated (the number of retries) is managed as the number of retry operations, it is possible to reliably determine how many times the retry operation has been performed regardless of whether or not the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B detects a game ball. , And can be easily grasped. Further, the number of retry operations can be reliably and easily grasped without providing a slit sensor or the like. This makes it possible to smoothly manage the retry operation.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment controls the origin adjustment when the number of retries exceeds the upper limit number (12 times) without detecting a game ball by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. Since the retry control is terminated, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the prize ball case unit 170 due to excessive repetition of the retry operation.

  Further, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment compares the total number of game balls actually paid out with the required number of payouts, as a result of the comparison, the total number of game balls actually paid out and the payout request If there is a difference between the number and the number, it can be grasped as an overpayout of the game balls.

  Further, when the above-mentioned difference of the overpayout is equal to or more than the allowable value (10), the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are stopped until the initialization operation is performed. When an unnatural overpayment occurs, it is possible to prevent further overpayment from being performed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an overpayout which is a difference between the total number of game balls actually paid out and the required payout amount until an initialization operation is performed when overpayment occurs. Can be accumulated.

  As a result, it is possible to reliably detect, for example, the fact of unnatural overpayment caused by wrongdoing and the like and the amount of unnecessary game balls paid out (the number of award balls and the number of loaned balls) caused by the overpayment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the falling ball monitoring time after driving the payout motor 174, the gaming balls corresponding to the required number of falling balls are counted by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. It is possible to cool the payout motor 174 during the falling ball monitoring time, and at the same time, check whether or not the payout of the game balls corresponding to the required number of drops has been performed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently manage the payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of loaned balls) while securing a sufficient cooling period of the payout motor 174.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a holding period for holding the attitude of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B and a payout motor for monitoring a falling ball after driving the payout motor 174. Since the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can maintain the posture of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B after the payout motor 174 stops, the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can maintain the inertia force. This can prevent over-rotation. Further, the dispensing motor 174 can be cooled by providing the cooling period.

  Further, when the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B does not detect the game balls corresponding to the required number of drops during the holding period and the cooling period, the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped. The drive of the payout motor 174 can be efficiently managed using the cooling period.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Note that the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment of the present invention particularly in that the payout destination (movement destination) of the game ball by the sprocket 173 can be switched, but other configurations are different. The configuration is substantially the same. Therefore, in the following, a description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only a difference from the first embodiment will be particularly described.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the prize ball case unit 170 of the present embodiment has a first payout passage 180A and a second payout passage 180B, as in the first embodiment. The configuration is the same because of the two-row structure. Therefore, the configuration of the first payout passage 180A will be described as an example.

  The first payout passage 180A of the present embodiment is a first ball passage for paying out (or guiding, supplying, and circulating) game balls into the inside of a pachinko gaming machine (for example, the upper plate 21 or the like). 401A and a second ball passage 402A for guiding (moving) (or dispensing, supplying, and circulating) the game ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (for example, a ball circulation route of the island management facility). Have.

  Here, the island management facility is a device that can be connected to a plurality of or a single gaming machine and a gaming device (for example, a sand, a counter for each unit, a data display, etc.) provided for the gaming machine. A management device for managing the state of gaming balls and gaming machines, which is usually connected to a facility (eg, a computer or a data management device) for managing a game arcade called a hall computer. To collect information about gaming machines and transmit data.

  Here, the ball circulation path is a facility provided in the island management device that enables sharing of game balls between a plurality of or single game machines, and the ball circulation path can be independently driven as a ball circulation apparatus. It is not essential that the device is provided in the island management device, and the device may be provided in a game machine or a device for circulating game balls in the game machine.

  The second payout passage 180B also has a first spherical passage 401B and a second spherical passage 402B. Hereinafter, the first ball passage 401A and the first ball passage 401B are collectively referred to as a “first ball passage 401”, and the second ball passage 402A and the second ball passage 402B are collectively referred to as a “first ball passage 401B”. 2 ball path 402 ".

  Further, the first ball passage 401A is provided with a first counting switch 491A as first detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through the first ball passage 401A, and the second ball passage 402A is provided with a first counting switch 491A. A first ball release switch 492A is provided as second detection means passing through the second ball passage 402A.

  Similarly, a second counting switch 491B and a second ball removing switch 492B are provided for the first ball passage 401B and the second ball passage 402B. The first counting switch 491A and the second counting switch 491B are collectively referred to as a “counting switch 491”, and the first ball removing switch 492A and the second ball removing switch 492B are collectively referred to as a “ball removing switch 492”. "

  Further, between the payout passage 180, more specifically, between the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402, the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 is the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage. First and second flappers 400 </ b> A and 400 </ b> B are provided as passage switching means controlled by the payout CPU 301 so as to switch to any one of 402. These first and second flappers 400A and 400B may be collectively referred to as "flapper 400".

  The flapper 400 has a flapper driving device 410 (see FIG. 130), and the driving of the flapper driving device 410 is controlled by the payout CPU 301, so that the flapper 400 is rotatable in the arrow direction in the figure.

  Specifically, the flapper 400 sets the payout destination of the game ball to the second ball passage 402 side (the position indicated by the broken line in the drawing) and the payout destination of the game ball to the first ball passage 401 side. (The position shown by the solid line in the figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130, the payout control circuit 300 according to the present embodiment includes the first counting switch 491A, the second counting switch 491B, the first ball removing switch 492A, and the second ball switch 492A. The extraction switch 492B and the flapper driving device 410 are connected. Although the flapper driving device 410 is common to the first flapper 400A and the second flapper 400B, they may be provided separately.

  Further, the payout CPU 301 of the present embodiment, when executing the above-mentioned retry operation in a state where the number of prize balls and the number of loaned balls (payout amount) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300 are absent, causes the game ball to play. The flapper 400 is switched via the flapper driving device 410 so that the payout destination is the second ball passage 402.

  Further, the payout CPU 301 according to the present embodiment, when performing the retry operation in a state where the flapper 400 is switched so that the payout destination of the game ball is the second ball passage 402, uses the ball removal switch 492 to set the game ball. The retry operation is terminated on the condition that is detected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131 to FIG. 134, the contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300, particularly, only processes including steps different from those in the first embodiment will be described.

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
First, with reference to FIG. 131, a system timer interrupt process by the payout CPU 301 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 131, in the system timer interrupt processing according to the present embodiment, steps S531 to S535 are the same as S431 to S435 of the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 105) according to the first embodiment. Therefore, the description of those steps is omitted.

  After completing the process of S535, the payout CPU 301 executes a motor drive process described later (S536), and executes an origin adjustment excitation data setting process (S537). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 executes a command transmission process (S538), and ends the system timer interrupt process. The command transmission processing (S538) of the present embodiment is the same as the command transmission processing (S437) of the first embodiment.

[Count switch detection processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 132, the count switch detection processing performed in S535 in the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 131) of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 132, in the counting switch detection processing according to the present embodiment, steps S581 to S590 are the same as S481 to S490 in the counting switch detection processing (see FIG. 108) according to the first embodiment. Therefore, the description of those steps is omitted.

  If S581 is NO, if S587 is NO, if S589 is NO, or after the end of S590, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the first ball removal switch 492A or the second ball removal switch 492B is a game ball. It is determined whether or not the passage has been detected (S591).

  In S591, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first ball removal switch 492A or the second ball removal switch 492B has not detected the passage of the game ball (in the case of S591 being NO), the payout CPU 301 The counting switch detection processing ends.

  On the other hand, in S591, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first ball removal switch 492A or the second ball removal switch 492B has detected the passage of a game ball (in the case of YES determination in S591), the payout CPU 301 It is determined whether the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S592).

  In S592, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (when S592 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

  On the other hand, in S592, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (if S592 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S593).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S594). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 controls the flapper driving device 410 to automatically switch the first and second flappers 400A, 400B to the first ball passages 401A, 401B side (payout side) (S595), and the counting switch. The detection processing ends.

[Motor drive processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 133, a description will be given of the motor driving process performed in S536 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 131) of the present embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (S601).

  In S601, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (when S601 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and drives the motor. The process ends.

  On the other hand, in S601, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first nor the second stop factor flag is 1 (if S601 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Then, it is determined whether the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S602).

  In S602, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (if NO in S602), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no security ball, and The driving process ends.

  On the other hand, in S602, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S602), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a security ball and pays out. It is determined whether the requested number is greater than 0 (S603).

  In S603, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is not larger than 0 (NO in S603), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request, and ends the motor driving process.

  On the other hand, in S603, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is larger than 0 (YES in S603), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request, and executes the motor activation initial process ( S604). The motor startup initial process is the same as in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs an activation state setting process of the payout motor 174 (S605). In this processing, since the payout CPU 301 does not perform the origin adjustment control, the payout motor 174 sets the acceleration state of the payout motor 174 in accordance with the requested number of drops so that the normal game balls are paid out.

  Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S606). In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data for a predetermined step as a drive amount required to pay out the required number of game balls assuming that normal game balls are paid out.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the payout control flag to “1” (S607), and ends the motor drive processing. Here, the payout control flag is a flag in which “0” or “1” is set according to whether to switch the flapper 400, and is set to “1” when the flapper 400 is switched. This flag is set to “0” when the flapper 400 is not switched.

[Origin adjustment excitation data setting processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 134, the origin adjustment excitation data setting processing performed in S537 during the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 131) of the present embodiment will be described.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S611). In S611, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (when S611 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for the origin adjustment control, and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting processing. I do. Therefore, when the determination in S611 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

  On the other hand, in S611, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (when S611 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for the origin adjustment control, and the number of retries is smaller than 12. It is determined whether it is larger, that is, whether the origin adjustment control has been performed 12 times (S612). Therefore, if the determination in S611 is YES, the origin adjustment control is performed.

  In S612, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is greater than 12, (if S612 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of origin adjustment controls has reached the upper limit number (12 times). Then, the process proceeds to S613.

  In S613, the payout CPU 301 sets the activation state of the payout motor 174 (S613), and moves the processing to S623. In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the payout motor 174 to an idle state in order to stop paying out game balls.

  On the other hand, in S612, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is not larger than 12 (NO in S612), the payout CPU 301 resets the activation state of the payout motor 174 (S614).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 resets the excitation data (S615), and determines whether or not the payout control flag is 1 (S616). In S616, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout control flag is not 1 (if S616 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the switching between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B is unnecessary. Then, the process proceeds to S618. In this case, the switching between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B is not performed, and the payout destination of the game ball is maintained on the first ball passage 401A and 401B side (payout side).

  On the other hand, in S616, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout control flag is 1 (when S616 is YES), the payout CPU 301 needs to switch the first and second flappers 400A, 400B. Then, the flapper driving device 410 is controlled to automatically switch the first and second flappers 400A and 400B to the second ball passages 402A and 402B side (ball elimination side) (S617).

  Next, in the case of NO determination in S616 or after the end of S617, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 4 steps in preparation for the origin adjustment control (S618). In this process, four steps are set as the unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 when executing the origin adjustment control.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motor operations to one (S619), and sets the origin request retry count to four (S620). In this process, by multiplying the four steps set as the step counter mask value in S618 described above by four times set as the origin request retry count, the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball is obtained. Sixteen steps are set.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S621). The falling ball monitoring timer is the same as in the first embodiment. Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to “0” (S622).

  Next, after the end of S613 or S622, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S623), and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting processing. In this process, for example, when performing the origin adjustment control, the excitation data for 16 steps is set as the payout drive amount necessary to pay out one game ball.

  Further, when paying out normal game balls, excitation data for a predetermined step is set as a drive amount necessary to pay out the required number of game balls. When the payout motor 174 is set in the idle state so that the payout of the game balls is stopped, the excitation data is set to 0.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the following functions and effects in addition to the functions and effects of the first embodiment.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the payout destination of the game ball is set to the first ball passage 401 or the second ball passage 402 in each of the first and second payout passages 180A and 180B. Since the flapper 400 is provided for switching to one of them, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed when a game ball is paid out to the outside of the game machine, for example, when the game ball is lent or when a prize ball is played. In this case, the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 can be switched to the first ball passage 401 by the flapper 400.

  On the other hand, when the origin adjustment control (retry control) is performed without paying out the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine, the payout destination of the game balls by the sprocket 173 is switched to the second ball passage 402 by the flapper 400. Can be. This prevents the game balls from being overpaid by the origin adjustment control (retry control).

  Therefore, by switching to one of the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402 by the flapper 400, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed regardless of whether or not the game ball is paid out of the gaming machine. be able to.

  In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes the origin adjustment control (retry control) in a state where there is no payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of loaned balls) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. Since the flapper 400 is switched such that the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 is the second ball passage 402, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed without performing the payout of the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being overpaid by the sprocket 173.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment ends the origin adjustment control (retry control) on condition that the ball removal switch 492 detects a game ball, so that the payout amount (the number of award balls) stored in the RAM 303. Even if the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed in a state where there is no game ball and the number of lent balls, the counting switch 491 does not detect a game ball.

  For this reason, the game ball paid out from the sprocket 173 is paid out of the gaming machine by the origin adjustment control (retry control) executed without the payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of loaned balls) stored in the RAM 303. It can be prevented from being detected as a game ball. Thereby, the range of operation of the origin adjustment control (retry control) can be expanded.

(Third embodiment)
Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the first embodiment of the present invention refers to the remaining drop request number obtained by subtracting one ball from the drop request number after completion of the origin adjustment control (for example, 15 points before subtraction). The remaining configuration is substantially the same as that described above, except that the payout of the number of the required balls is 14).

  Therefore, in the following, a description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only a difference from the first embodiment will be particularly described. Specifically, only processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described. Processing other than the processing described below (for example, system timer interrupt processing) is the same as the processing in the first embodiment.

[Count switch detection processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 135, a description will be given of the count switch detection processing performed in S435 in the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 105) similar to the first embodiment. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the counting switch detection processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of a game ball (S681). In S681, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B has not detected the passage of the game ball (in the case of NO determination in S681), the payout CPU 301 sets the count switch. The detection processing ends. Here, when the origin adjustment control is being performed, the game ball is not yet detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B, and thus the determination at S681 is NO.

  On the other hand, in S681, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of a game ball (in the case of YES determination in S681), the payout CPU 301 issues a drop request. The number is subtracted by "1" (S682).

  That is, the payout CPU 301 updates the number of requested drops on condition that the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B. The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a divided payout amount updating unit.

  Here, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the number of payout requests is not subtracted in the counting switch detection processing. When the number of required dropouts is determined (set) in S727 in the motor activation initial process (see FIG. 137) described later, the number of required payouts is equal to the number of game balls corresponding to the determined (set) number of required drops. Has been subtracted.

  In other words, the payout CPU 301 subtracts the number of game balls for the determined (set) number of drop requests when the number of requested drops is determined (set) from the number of required payouts. I have. The payout CPU 301 that performs the subtraction of the game balls constitutes a subtraction unit.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S683). If the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 in S683 (NO in S683), the payout CPU 301 ends the count switch detection process.

  On the other hand, in S683, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (if S683 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S684).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S685). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets the post-origin adjustment execution flag to 1 (S686), and ends the count switch detection process.

  Here, the post-origin adjustment execution flag is a flag in which “0” or “1” is set depending on whether the origin adjustment control has been executed or before (not executed). Is set to "1" after the execution of "?", And set to "0" before the execution of the origin adjustment control.

[Motor start waiting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, a description will be given of the motor start waiting process performed in S436 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105) similar to the first embodiment. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start waiting process in the present embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S701). In S701, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 (when S701 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is being performed, and shifts the processing to S705.

  On the other hand, in S701, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (if S701 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been completed, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second stop factor flag is 1 (S702).

  In S702, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S702), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and starts the motor. The waiting process ends.

  On the other hand, in S702, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first nor the second stop factor flag is 1 (NO in S702), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Then, it is determined whether the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S703).

  In S703, when the payout CPU 301 determines that none of the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (NO in S703), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no security ball, and End the boot waiting process.

  On the other hand, in S703, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S703), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a security ball, and will be described later. A motor start initial process (see FIG. 41) is executed (S704). In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, it is not determined whether or not the number of requested payouts is greater than zero.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, a payout request flag described later is set, and whether or not there is a payout request from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300 is determined based on the payout request flag. The payout request flag is transmitted at the same time that information on the number of payout requests is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300, for example. The payout request flag is set to “1” when there is a payout request, and is set to “0” when there is no payout request.

  Here, the processing of S705 to S713 is the same as the processing of S506 to S514 in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

[Motor startup initial processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, a description will be given of the motor start initial process performed in S704 during the motor start waiting process (see FIG. 136) of the present embodiment. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor startup initial process in the present embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the post-origin adjustment execution flag is 1 (S721). In S721, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the post-origin adjustment execution flag is not 1 (if S721 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has not been executed (or has not been executed). , And then moves the process to S723.

  On the other hand, in S721, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the post-origin adjustment execution flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S721), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been performed and falls. It is determined whether or not the requested number is 0 or less (S722).

  In S722, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the requested number of drops is not equal to or less than 0 (NO in S722), the payout CPU 301 leaves the requested number of drops as it is, that is, in the counting switch detection process (see FIG. 135). The process proceeds to S728 with the requested number of drops after “1” has been subtracted in S682.

  On the other hand, in S722, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the requested number of drops is 0 or less (when S722 is YES), the payout CPU 301 resets (or initializes) the requested number of drops. Then, the value of the required number of drops is reduced to the required number of payouts (S723).

  For example, when the value of the required number of drops becomes “−1” due to the overpayout of the game balls, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the required number of payouts already subtracted by the required number of drops.

  That is, the payout CPU 301 reflects the number of drop requests after subtracting “1” in S682 of the above-described counting switch detection process (see FIG. 135) (“−1” in the case of overpayment) in the number of payout requests. The payout CPU 301 that performs such reflection constitutes reflection means. When the process of S723 is performed for the first time (first time), both the number of requested payouts and the number of requested drops are “0”.

  Here, the payout CPU 301 determines that the drop request number after subtracting “1” in S682 of the above-described counting switch detection processing (see FIG. 135) when all the game balls for the payout request number have been paid out is “ If it is not "0", it is determined that a payout error has occurred. The payout CPU 301 that makes such a determination constitutes a payout error determination unit.

  For example, if the required number of dropped balls after the subtraction is greater than “0” when the required number of game balls have been paid out, it can be determined that a payout error due to underpayment has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the required number of dropped balls after the subtraction is smaller than "0" when the required number of game balls are paid out, it can be determined that a payout error due to overpayment has occurred.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the number of payout requests is smaller than “−10” (S724). That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of overpay has become 10 or more.

  In S724, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the number of requested payouts is smaller than “−10” (if S724 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of game balls related to overpayout is not within the allowable range. Thus, the overpay flag is set to 1 (S725), and the motor activation initial process ends.

  On the other hand, in S724, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the required number of payouts is not smaller than “−10” (in the case of NO determination in S724), the payout CPU 301 allows the number of game balls related to the overpayout. It is determined that it is within the range, and it is determined whether or not the payout request flag is 1 (S726).

  In S726, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request flag is not 1 (if S726 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no game ball payout request from the main control circuit 70, The motor startup initial processing ends.

  On the other hand, in S726, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request flag is 1 (if S726 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the number of drop requests from the number of payout requests (S727).

  In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers is set according to the payout request number (total payout amount). At this time, at the same time as the setting of the required number of drops, the required number of payouts is subtracted by the set required number of drops.

  Here, the processing of S728 to S734 is the same as the processing of S522 to S528 in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the following functions and effects in addition to the functions and effects of the first embodiment.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of required drops is updated on condition that the gaming balls are detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. That is, the required number of drops is updated each time a game ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B.

  Thus, for example, when the payout motor 174 is driven to pay out the game balls in accordance with the required number of drops, if there is a payout exceeding the required number of drops (overpayment), the number of the game balls corresponding to the overpaid amount is reduced. The number of required drops can be updated in consideration of the number.

  On the other hand, the required number of payouts is reduced by the number of game balls corresponding to the number of required drops at the time the number of required drops is determined, and the updated number of required drops is reflected. Thus, even if the above-described over-payout is caused by one drive of the pay-out motor 174, the number of game balls subtracted from the required number of payouts and the number of game balls actually paid out are determined. Can be matched.

  As a result, it is not necessary to stop the payout motor 174 each time an overpayment occurs due to one drive of the payout motor 174, so that the payout of the game balls can be continued. Therefore, smooth payout can be performed.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is an enclosed type gaming machine, in which a launching means for launching a game ball is installed at the top of the game machine, and the fired game ball passes through a game area provided on the game board. (The game board itself may be a game area), and the present invention is also applied to an enclosed game machine collected in a ball polishing device or a lifting device provided in the game machine.

  In the case where the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to such a gaming machine, a sprocket means for lifting a game ball provided in a lifting device (for example, a screw or the like) and a payout motor Even if the driving means for driving the means for pumping (for example, a pumping motor) and the counting switch are means for detecting discharge from the pumping apparatus (for example, a sensor for managing the circulation of game balls). Good.

  According to the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the game balls pass through the payout passage 180, are paid out to the upper plate 21 provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and move from the upper plate 21 to the launching device 15, so that as described above. The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to a device that is lifted to a simple launching device 15.

  In the present embodiment, the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171, the ball passage near the sprocket 173, and the payout passage 180 may be integrally formed. The expression “integrally” as used herein includes a state where they are integrally formed by welding, die cutting, screwing, caulking, or the like.

  In addition, when the ball tank lower passage 162 and the ball supply passage 171 are integrally formed, and when the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sub-rocket 173 are integrally formed, four configurations are exemplified. Two configurations may be extracted and formed integrally by a configuration divided into cases.

  Similarly, a case where the ball passage near the sprocket 173 and the discharge passage 180 are integrally formed, a case where the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sprocket 173 are integrally formed are exemplified. The three components may be extracted from the four components to be formed, and the components may be formed according to the divided configurations.

  Further, the ball supply passage 171 may be provided in a game member (for example, a decoration unit or a ball polishing device of a sealed-type game machine, etc.) configuring the game machine. This means that the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied even when a device provided with a member corresponding to the sprocket 173 is connected to a gaming member acting as the ball supply passage 171.

  Further, the ball supply bribe 171 may be provided with a configuration capable of moving a game ball like the sub-rocket 173, and in general, a game existing in the ball supply passage 171 in conjunction with and in synchronization with the sprocket 173. If the ball can move, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied.

  In the present embodiment, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period), and after the excitation data holding period has elapsed, the current of the payout motor 174 becomes a low current. It is switched on and then kept at low current for 470 ms (cooling period). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is constituted by 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 470 ms (cooling period). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms) may be constituted by the holding period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period).

  With such a configuration, the position of the sprocket 173 can be finely adjusted during the sprocket adjustment period, and normal rotation and reverse rotation assuming ball engagement may be repeated. In addition, a heat detection unit capable of detecting the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is provided, and when the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is equal to or more than a predetermined value and a predetermined area, the payout control circuit 300 can determine the abnormality of the payout motor 174. May use the sprocket adjustment period as the cooling period continuously.

  Furthermore, even if the heat detecting means is not provided, the payout of a predetermined value or more (for example, the payout of 10 balls or more when paying up to 16 balls) continues continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times or more). , The sprocket adjustment period may be set to a specific value (for example, 50 ms). At this time, the set sprocket adjustment period may be a predetermined value or a constant value. Normally, there is no need to set the sprocket adjustment period to perform cooling because a sufficient cooling period is provided, but since the environment differs for each amusement arcade where gaming machines are installed, the payout motor during the original cooling period The cooling of 174 may be insufficient. Therefore, by assuming such a case and adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to take care of the cooling period of the payout motor 174 when the payout is continuous. As a result, it is possible to pay out more safely.

  As described above, if the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms) is configured by 30 ms (excitation data holding period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period), It can also be expressed that the cooling period of the payout motor 174 has been extended based on the extended ball monitoring time, and that the falling ball monitoring time has been extended based on the extended cooling period. Is possible.

  In the present embodiment, the shape, material, and driving method are particularly limited as long as the payout CPU 301 controls the flapper 400 to switch to either the first ball passage 401 or the second ball passage 402. Not something. For example, as shown in FIG. 129, the ball may be plate-shaped, or may be moved horizontally by curing a game ball falling from the upper portion of the ball passage so that the game ball cannot pass through one ball passage. Thus, a mechanism that can eventually distribute the game balls may be used, or a mechanism similar to the sprocket 173 may be provided, and the game balls may be received once and then guided in an arbitrary direction. There may be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, 5 ms × 4 steps are defined as the excitation data corresponding to the unit drive amount. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the unit drive amount is not set and one retry count is performed. The drive of the payout motor 174 of 5 ms × 16 steps is performed as the excitation data in the above, and the excitation data holding period after the stop of the drive of the payout motor 174 of 5 ms × 16 steps is set to 30 ms + the cooling period 470 ms = 500 ms. It is set to 5000 ms (basic retry operation period), and the time obtained by subtracting the excitation data holding period, the cooling period, and the time required for one retry (5 ms × 16 = 80 ms) from the basic retry operation period is the falling ball. Set as the monitoring time, the stop factor occurs within the falling ball monitoring time, or the specified number of times (240 times) If the try is ended, it is also possible to transition to the idle state. At this time, the maximum number of retries is 240, and the time required for one retry is set as the basic retry operation period. As a result, a sufficient monitoring time is set as the falling ball monitoring time, so that the falling ball monitoring time can be used as a time for storing the 15-ball security switch 172 for intermittent prevention when the switch is disconnected. It becomes possible to pay out more safely.

  In the present embodiment, the number of required game balls to be moved by one drive of the payout motor 174 is subtracted based on the number of detected game balls by the counting switch 181 in the retry control, whereby the required number of dropped balls (divided Although the "dispensing amount" is set, the term "set the number of requested drops (divided dispensing amount)" can include contents such as determination, update, and change.

  Further, the payout in the present embodiment is based on the premise that game balls are paid out as game media. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Game media include medals, credits, the number of electronically managed game media, It is considered to pay out various media such as pseudo media handled in monetary terms.

  Note that the term "movement" described in the claims of the present application includes a case where the position of a game ball is moved by game ball control means, such as payout, lending, retry control, and shipping. Therefore, the present invention can be applied to any case where the position of the game ball is moved by the above-mentioned game ball control means.

  Also, "the game ball moves" means that the game ball is directly pushed or pulled by the game ball control means, or the game ball is released by unlocking the game ball. As a result of starting a fall or moving one game ball by the game ball control means, one or more game balls are indirectly moved. Including the case.

  Further, the “accessory” in the present invention may include a general gimmick, a movable member (movable body), a decorative member, and the like, and may be drivable or not driven. You may. In addition, although a plurality of movable bodies may be generally referred to as “gears”, in the present invention, they may be a single movable body, or may be a generic name of a plurality of movable bodies. Further, in the case of a “main part” formed by a plurality of movable bodies, a case in which the plurality of movable bodies interlock, approach, or unite may be considered.

[Application example]
In each of the above embodiments and the above-described various modified examples, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The various technologies of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, and can be applied to various gaming machines such as, for example, ball game machines, gaming machines, enclosed game machines, slot machines, and pachislot machines. Can also.

(Appendix 1)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having a decorative accessory (logo accessory 210) movable from a standby position to an operating position, and The accessory includes at least one decorative portion (the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B), a decorative member provided behind the decorative portion to perform display (the base lens 220), and the decoration. A support member that supports the member and movably supports the decorative portion (the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B), and is driven by the decoration accessory driving means (the motor 60D), whereby the support member is moved. A moving mechanism (226) for moving the decorative part while moving the decorative part from the standby position to the operating position, wherein the decorative accessory is configured to move from the standby position to the operating position. By moving the decorative portion, and from those easily visually recognize the decorative member provided at the rear of the decorative portion.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention is driven by the decorative accessory driving means, and moves the decorative portions located on the left and right sides outward in the left-right direction while moving the support member from the standby position to the drop position. When the decorative portions located on the left and right sides are moved, the decorative member provided behind the decorative portion is easily visible.

  Thus, it is possible to perform an effect of not only dropping the decorative portion, but also moving the decorative portion, and further perform an effect of displaying a decorative member that is easily visible behind the decorative portion.

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the effect, and to enhance the interest in the game of the player.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the decoration accessory includes a holding plate (base plate) having a first holding plate side guide (a guide groove 225A) and a second holding plate side guide (a guide groove 225B). 225), and the moving mechanism has a first main swing member side guide portion (guide groove 229D) and a second main swing member side guide portion (guide groove 229E). When the driving force of the driving means is transmitted, a main swing member (main arm) swinging around the first swing fulcrum (guide pin 225C) with respect to the holding plate between the standby position and the operating position. 229), an auxiliary swing member (233) having an engagement hole (233B), and swinging about the second swing fulcrum (guide pin 225D) with respect to the holding plate; and the main swing. And a first power transmission member (middle gear 237) fixed to the member. Wherein the support member rotatably supports the first power transmission member and engages with the first main swing member side guide portion and the second main swing member side guide portion. A first engagement protrusion (engagement protrusion 234A) and a second engagement protrusion (engagement protrusion 234B), and a third engagement protrusion (engagement) engaging with the engagement hole of the sub-oscillating member. A support (support plate 234) having a projection 234C); a second power transmission member (right gear 235) rotatably supported by the support and engaging with the first power transmission member; And a first transmission portion (right character portion 211A) of at least one of the decoration portions, and an engagement portion that engages with the second power transmission member. (Rack teeth 238A), and the second And an engagement member (right rack member 238) supporting at least one of the decorative portions and a second decorative portion (left character portion 211B) and engaging with the third power transmission member. A second engaging member (left rack member 239) having a portion (rack teeth 239A) and movably provided with respect to the support; and a plurality of decorative portions and the first engaging member. The decorative member interposed between the second engaging member and the second engaging member.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the gaming machine, the support member that supports the decoration portion is engaged with the first main swing member side guide portion and the second main swing member side guide portion of the main swing member. And a support having a first engagement projection and a second engagement projection that engage with each other, and a third engagement projection that engages with an engagement hole of the sub-oscillating member.

  Thereby, when the main swinging member and the sub-oscillating member swing by the drive of the decorative accessory driving means, the decorative portion is moved from the standby position to the operating position while keeping the posture of the decorative portion horizontal via the support. Can be moved.

  In addition, the support member is rotatably supported by the support, supports the second power transmission member and the third power transmission member engaged with the first power transmission member, and supports the first decorative portion, A first engagement member that has an engagement portion that engages with the second power transmission member and is movable with respect to the support; A second engaging member having an engaging portion to be engaged and movable with respect to the support.

  Accordingly, when the main swinging member and the sub-swinging member swing, the first power transmission member is moved in accordance with the inclination of the main swinging member while keeping the posture of the decorative portion horizontal via the support. By rotating and moving the first engagement member via the second power transmission member, and moving the second engagement member via the third power transmission member, The first decorative part and the second decorative part can be moved.

  As a result, the movement mechanism for effectively moving the decoration unit can enhance the interest in the effect, and can enhance the interest in the game of the player.

  In addition, the decoration part can be moved to the standby position and the operation position by the single decoration accessory driving means, and the decoration part can be moved in the left and right direction as the decoration part moves to the operation position. The number of motors can be reduced, and the number of parts of decoration accessories can be reduced.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a role that can be moved from the standby position to the driving position (right lightning role 81, left lightning role 86) and driving means (motor 60B, motor 60C) for driving the role. And a moving mechanism (106, 107) for moving the accessory from the standby position to the driving position; and moving the accessory to the driving position and moving the decorative portion, The tip of the accessory may overlap at least a part of the decorative member in the front-rear direction in a state where the decorative member provided behind the decorative portion is easily visible.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention has an advantage in that the accessory moves to the driving position and the decoration is moved so that the decoration member provided behind the decoration is easily visible. The tip of the object overlaps at least a part of the decorative member in the front-rear direction.

  Thereby, an effect in which the decorative member and the accessory are related can be executed, and the interest of the player in playing the game can be synergistically improved as compared with the case where the effect of the decorative accessory and the accessory is performed independently. .

  In addition, by overlapping the leading end of the accessory with at least a part of the decorative member in the front-rear direction, it is possible for the player to recognize the decorative portion of the decorative accessory associated with the accessory from the shape and position of the accessory. it can.

  This can prevent the player from overlooking the effect of the decorative accessory being performed in accordance with the form of the accessory, and a situation may occur in which the player's interest in the game cannot be improved. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a frame (glass door 4) having an opening (4a) for exposing the game board (12) and having frame-side decorative members (decorative members 58A to 58D) around the opening. ), The game board has a game board side decorative member (decorative members 58E to 58H) around the display area, and the accessory moves to the drive position and moves the decorative portion. Thus, in a state in which the decorative member provided behind the decorative portion is easily visible, the frame-side decorative member and the game board-side decorative member located on the extension of the accessory are in the form of the accessory. The production may be performed in conjunction with the production.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention has an advantage in that the accessory moves to the driving position and the decoration is moved so that the decoration member provided behind the decoration is easily visible. The frame-side decorative member and the game board-side decorative member located on the extension of the object perform an effect in conjunction with the form of the accessory.

  Thereby, the effect in which the frame-side decorative member, the game board-side decorative member, and the accessory are related can be executed, and when the effect of the frame-side decorative member, the game board-side decorative member, and the accessory are each performed alone, Compared with this, it is possible to synergistically improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the player can recognize the frame-side decorative member and the game board-side decorative member from the shape and position of the accessory. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the frame-side decorative member and the game board-side decorative member perform an effect according to the form of the accessory, and it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Such a situation can be prevented from occurring.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, by providing the mechanism which moves a decoration accessory effectively, the attraction to an effect can be improved and the gaming machine which can enhance the attraction to a game of a player can be provided.

(Appendix 2)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming board (12) having a game area on which a game ball rolls, and a decoration movable from a standby position to an operating position by a driving means (motor 60D). A character (logo character 210), a starting area (for example, a second starting port 45 described later) provided on the game board and capable of detecting the passage of a game ball, and a game ball provided on the game board. A variable winning device (for example, one of a first state (open state described later) that is easy to receive and a second state (closed state described later) that is more difficult to receive game balls than the first state (for example, And a second large winning opening 54 to be described later), and when the starting area detects a game ball, the variable winning device repeats the first state and the second state to provide an advantageous state for the player. Special game state (for example, (For example, a main control circuit 70, which will be described later), and identification information (for example, a main control circuit 70 described later) corresponding to the lottery result based on the lottery result by the lottery means. , A special symbol described later), and thereafter, the identification information is displayed based on the result of the lottery performed by the identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 61 described later) for stopping and displaying the identification information. Effect control means (for example, a later-described sub-control circuit 200) for controlling an effect operation performed during a variable display period of information, and effect notifying means (for example, to be described later) for notifying information on the effect operation when the effect operation is performed. A display device 13), when the starting area detects the passage of a game ball during the fluctuation display period of the identification information, a result of the lottery performed by the lottery means performed at the time of the detection is recorded as a reserved ball. Storage means (for example, a start-up opening passage detection process described later) that performs at least one decoration part (a right character part 211A, a middle character part 211C, and a left character part 211B); A decoration member (base lens 220) provided behind the decoration portion, and a support member that supports the decoration member and movably supports the decoration portion, wherein the decoration accessory is the standby member. By moving the decorative part along with moving from the position to the operating position, the decorative member provided behind the decorative part is easily visible, and the effect control means is provided on the predetermined holding ball. Prior to performing the variation display of the identification information based on the content of the predetermined holding ball, a preliminary effect determination unit (for example, described later) that determines whether or not to execute a preliminary effect (for example, a prefetching effect to be described later) based on the content of the predetermined sphere. Read ahead The first effect (for example, a symbol effect described later) having a predetermined effect form, and a second effect (for example, described later) having a different effect form from the first effect. First pre-production effect control means (for example, an effect before the start of a pre-read specialization zone, an effect at the start of a pre-read specialization zone, which will be described later) that executes at least one of the background effect) using the effect notification means. In the pre-article effect, when the first effect and the second effect of the same system are executed by the first advance effect control unit during the variable display period of the identification information based on the reserved ball, the first effect of the same system is executed. After the execution of the first effect and the second effect, in a variation display period of the identification information based on the predetermined holding ball, a third effect in which the effect form is different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, as described later) of Second special effects control means (for example, effects in a pre-read specialization zone described later) for executing the special effects in reading special zone J to K) using the special effect notifying means, and the third special effects. Has a configuration in which the degree of expectation of the transition of the game state to the special game state at the time of execution of is higher than the degree of expectation of the transition of the game state to the special game state at the time of execution of the first effect or the second effect. .

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention further improves the degree of expectation of the player to the special game state (big hit game state) in the pre-production (pre-reading production), and increases the degree of expectation of the player for the pre-production (pre-read production). Interest can be improved.

1 Pachinko machine 4 Glass door (frame)
12 Game board 13a Display area 58A to 58D Decoration member (frame-side decoration member)
58E-58H Decoration member (Game board side decoration member)
59p, 59r Light emitting element 60A Motor (third driving means, third moving mechanism)
60B motor (first driving means, driving means, first moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
60C motor (second driving means, driving means, second moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
60D motor (decorative accessory driving means)
60E Gold door drive motor (first movable member drive means)
60e, 60f Motor shaft (output shaft)
60F silver door drive motor (second movable member drive means)
81 Right lightning role (first role, role, second moving member)
85A Projecting part (first accessory side engaging part)
86 Left lightning role (second role, role, second moving member)
90A projecting part (second accessory side engaging part)
91 Right lightning role arm (third swing member, third moving mechanism)
91C tooth part (first proximal end engaging part)
91D Projecting portion (third swing member side engaging portion)
92 Left lightning bolt arm (fourth swinging member, third moving mechanism)
92C tooth part (second base end engaging part)
92D Projecting portion (fourth swinging member side engaging portion)
93 Base plate (support plate)
93A guide groove (third support plate side guide portion)
93B Guide groove (fourth support plate side guide)
93C guide groove (first support plate side guide portion)
93D guide groove (second support plate side guide portion)
94 gears (third moving mechanism)
95 gear (third moving mechanism)
96 Right Lightning Bolt Arm (First Swinging Member, First Moving Mechanism, Moving Mechanism)
96A pin (first swing axis)
96B guide groove (first swing member side guide portion)
96D projecting portion (first swing member side engaging portion)
98 Cam gear (first moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
99 gears (first moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
100 gears (first moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
101 Left lightning bolt arm (second swing member, second moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
101A pin (second swing axis)
101B Guide groove (second swing member side guide portion)
101D Projecting portion (second rocking member side engaging portion)
102 Cam gear (second moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
103 gears (second moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
106 first moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
107 second moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
108 Third moving mechanism 210 Logo accessory (decoration accessory)
211A Right character part (decoration part, first decoration part)
211B Left character part (decoration part, second decoration part)
211C Middle character part (decoration part)
220 Base lens (decorative member)
225 Base plate (holding plate)
225A guide groove (first holding plate side guide portion)
225B Guide groove (second holding plate side guide)
225C Guide pin (first swing fulcrum)
225D guide pin (second swing fulcrum)
226 Moving mechanism 227 Support member 228 Cam gear (moving mechanism)
229 Main arm (main swinging member, moving mechanism)
229D Guide groove (first main swing member side guide portion)
229E Guide groove (second main swinging member side guide portion)
231 Logo link (moving mechanism)
232 Compression spring (moving mechanism)
233 Sub arm (sub swing member, moving mechanism)
233B Engagement hole 234 Support plate (support)
234A Engagement projection (first engagement projection)
234B Engagement projection (second engagement projection)
234C Engagement projection (third engagement projection)
235 Right gear (second power transmission member)
236 Left gear (third power transmission member)
237 Middle gear (first power transmission member)
238 Right rack member (first engagement member)
238A Rack tooth (engagement part)
239 Left rack member (second engagement member)
239A Rack tooth (engagement part)
421 right gold door (first movable member, first movable member)
422 Left gold door (first movable member, first moving member)
423 Right silver door (second movable member, first movable member)
424 Left silver door (second movable member, first movable member)
425 Lower guide rail (guide member)
426 Upper guide shaft (long member)
427 Lower guide shaft (long member)
428 Right gold door rack member (first mounting part, right gold door, first movable member)
428a, 428b rack teeth (first movable member moving mechanism)
429 Left gold door rack member (second mounting part, left gold door, first movable member)
429a Rack teeth (first movable member moving mechanism)
430 Right silver door rack member (third mounting part, right silver door, second movable member)
430a rack teeth (second movable member moving mechanism)
431 Left silver door rack member (fourth mounting part, left silver door, second movable member)
431a, 431b Rack teeth (second movable member moving mechanism)
435 Gear (first power output member, first movable member moving mechanism)
436 to 439 Gear (first movable member moving mechanism)
441 Gear (second power output member, second movable member moving mechanism)
442 to 445 gear (second movable member moving mechanism)
450 Lower panel base (fixing member)
451 First movable member moving mechanism 452 Second movable member moving mechanism 461A, 461B Screw groove (groove)
462A, 462B Screw hole (hole)
463 pan head screw (fastening member)
471 Decoration member 475 Panel substrate (substrate)
476 Display member 477 Base 477C Support frame (mounting part)
477c Tip (tip of support frame)
480 Front reflector (first light guide member)
480C, 480D Through hole (first through hole)
480a, 480b Rear end surface (opposing surface of first light guide member and second light guide member)
481 Back reflector (second light guide member)
481a, 481b Tip surface (surface facing first light guide member and second light guide member)
481C Through hole (second through hole)
481c Open end (open end of second through hole)

Claims (2)

A game board having a game area in which game balls roll,
A decorative accessory movable by the driving means from the standby position to the operating position,
A starting area provided on the game board and capable of detecting passage of a game ball;
A variable winning device that is provided on the game board and that is in one of a first state in which game balls are easily accepted and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to accept than the first state;
When the starting area detects a game ball, the variable winning device repeats the first state and the second state to determine whether or not to shift to a special game state which is advantageous to the player. Lottery means for performing
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and then stopping and displaying the identification information;
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, effect control means for controlling the effect operation performed during the variable display period of the identification information,
At the time of performing the effect operation, effect notification means for notifying information on the effect operation,
When the starting area detects the passage of a game ball during the fluctuation display period of the identification information, a reserve ball storage unit that stores a result of a lottery by the lottery unit performed at the time of the detection as a reserve ball,
The decoration accessory,
At least one decorative part,
A decorative member provided behind the decorative portion,
A support member that supports the decorative member and movably supports the decorative portion,
Has,
The decorative accessory moves the decorative portion as it moves from the standby position to the operating position as one of the effect operations, thereby visually recognizing the decorative member provided behind the decorative portion. Easy and
The effect control means,
Prior to the execution of the variation display of the identification information based on the predetermined ball, based on the content of the predetermined ball, preliminary effect determination means to determine whether to perform a preliminary effect,
A first pre-production control unit that executes a first production having a predetermined production form and a second production having a production form different from the first production as the pre-production using the production notification unit;
In the preliminary effect, if the first effect and the second effect of the same type are executed by the first preliminary effect control means during the variable display period of the identification information based on the reserved ball, After the execution of the first effect and the second effect, in a change display period of the identification information based on the predetermined holding ball, a third effect having a different effect form from the first effect and the second effect, A second pre-production effect control means that is executed using the production notification means,
In the preliminary effect, when the first effect and the second effect of different types are executed by the first preliminary effect control means, the third effect by the second advance effect control means is not executed. A gaming machine characterized by that: A ball supply passage capable of accumulating game balls for awarding to a player when the player wins the variable winning device;
Moving means capable of moving a game ball having passed through the ball supply passage to a payout passage;
Driving means for driving the moving means,
Control means for controlling the driving of the driving means,
A payout detecting means for detecting a game ball moved to the payout passage by the moving means,
The control means, after driving the driving means, stops driving of the driving means for a certain period, and makes a determination regarding the detection of the game ball by the payout detection means during the certain period,
The certain period includes at least a holding period for holding the posture of the moving unit and a cooling period for cooling the driving unit,
During the holding period, the current applied to the driving unit is maintained at the current when the driving unit is driven,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein during the cooling period, a current applied to the driving unit is lower than a current when the driving unit is driven.

Images